Garmin | G1000: Tiger AG-5B | Garmin G1000: Tiger AG-5B G1000 Pilot's Guide for the Tiger AG-5B

Garmin G1000: Tiger AG-5B G1000 Pilot's Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
G1000
TM
Pilot’s Guide for the
Tiger AG-5B
Front Matter.indd 1
7/11/2005 5:50:10 PM
Part Number
190-00617-00
(Rev. A)
Change Summary
Initial Release
Record of Revisions
Revision Date of Revision Revision Page Range
A
07/12/05
i – I-5
Description
Initial release.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
Front Matter.indd 2
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:50:10 PM
COPYRIGHT
Copyright © 2005 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0464.00 or later for the Tiger AG-5B Some differences in operation may
be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411
Fax 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Unit 5, The Quadrangle, Abbey Park Industrial Estate, Romsey, Hampshire S051 9DL, U.K.
Tel: 44/0870.8501241
Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or
stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission
to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to
be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text
of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is
strictly prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, and G1000™ is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries.
These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications; XM® is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc..
July 2005
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Front Matter.indd 1
Printed in the U.S.A.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
i
7/11/2005 5:50:10 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT MATTER
COPYRIGHT .................................................................................. i
TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................. ii
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................... x
WARRANTY ................................................................................xii
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..............................................1-1
1.2 LRU DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................1-1
1.3 PFD/MFD CONTROLS ................................................1-6
1.4 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS ..........................................1-8
1.5 SYSTEM POWER-UP ....................................................1-9
1.6 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING ........................................1-11
1.7 SYSTEM OPERATION ................................................1-11
Normal Mode ..................................................................1-11
Reversionary Mode .......................................................1-12
AHRS Modes of Operation ...........................................1-13
GPS Input Failure ......................................................1-13
Air Data Input Failure ................................................1-13
Magnetometer Failure ...............................................1-13
Vspeed References ......................................................2-9
True Airspeed Box .......................................................2-9
Attitude Indicator ..........................................................2-10
Pitch Indication .........................................................2-10
Roll Indication ...........................................................2-11
Slip/Skid Indication ....................................................2-11
Altimeter .........................................................................2-12
Altitude Values ..........................................................2-12
Altitude Reference Bug..............................................2-12
Altitude Trend Vector .................................................2-12
Altitude Reference Box ..............................................2-12
Barometric Setting Box ..............................................2-12
Metric Display ...........................................................2-13
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator .......................2-13
Marker Beacon Annunciations ...................................2-13
Vertical Speed Indicator...............................................2-14
Vertical Speed Pointer ...............................................2-14
Horizontal Situation Indicator ....................................2-15
360˚ HSI ...............................................................2-15
Arc HSI ................................................................2-16
Heading Indication ....................................................2-16
Turn Rate Indicator ....................................................2-17
Course Deviation Indicator ........................................2-17
Bearing Pointers and Information Windows ................2-18
Navigation Source .....................................................2-19
2.5 COMMUNICATION, NAVIGATION &
SURVEILLANCE ............................................................2-20
2.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................2-1
Communication Frequency Window ..........................2-20
Navigation Frequency Window...................................2-20
Navigation Status Bar...................................................2-21
Transponder Status Bar ................................................2-22
Transponder Operation ..............................................2-22
Transponder Code Selection.......................................2-22
2.2 BACKLIGHTING..............................................................2-4
2.6 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA ............................2-23
1.8 CHECKLISTS ..................................................................1-14
SECTION 2 PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY
2.3 SOFTKEY FUNCTION ...................................................2-5
2.4 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS ..............................................2-9
Airspeed Indicator ...........................................................2-9
Speed Indication .........................................................2-9
Speed Ranges .............................................................2-9
Airspeed Trend Vector .................................................2-9
ii
Front Matter.indd 2
Outside Air Temperature Box ......................................2-23
System Time Box ............................................................2-23
Traffic Annunciation ......................................................2-23
Inset Map .........................................................................2-24
Working with Menus .....................................................2-26
Auxiliary Window Keys .................................................2-27
Auxiliary Windows .........................................................2-27
Timer/References Window .........................................2-27
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:50:11 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Generic Timer .......................................................2-28
Vspeeds and Vspeed Bug Status ...........................2-28
Flight ID ...............................................................2-29
Nearest Airports Window ...........................................2-29
Direct-to Window ......................................................2-30
Direct-to Navigation .............................................2-30
Flight Plan Window ...................................................2-32
Create New Flight Plan.........................................2-33
Activate Leg .........................................................2-33
Store Flight Plan ...................................................2-33
Invert Flight Plan ..................................................2-34
Delete Flight Plan .................................................2-34
Load Departure ....................................................2-35
Load Arrival ..........................................................2-36
Load Approach .....................................................2-36
Remove Departure ...............................................2-37
Remove Arrival .....................................................2-37
Remove Approach ................................................2-37
Closest Point of FPL ..............................................2-37
Change Fields ......................................................2-38
Restore Defaults ...................................................2-38
Procedures Window ..................................................2-38
Select Approach ...................................................2-39
Select Arrival ........................................................2-40
Select Departure...................................................2-41
Activate Approach ................................................2-41
Activate Vector-To-Final ........................................2-41
2.7 REVERSIONARY MODE ...........................................2-42
2.8 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS & ALERTS .....................2-43
Alerts Window ................................................................2-43
Annunciation Window...................................................2-43
SECTION 3 NAV/COM
3.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................3-1
Windows and Fields.........................................................3-2
Radio Selection ................................................................3-2
Controls ..............................................................................3-3
Tuning Box .........................................................................3-4
Switching Between Radios ............................................3-4
Manually Tuning a Frequency .......................................3-4
Radio Indicators ...............................................................3-5
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Front Matter.indd 3
Volume ...............................................................................3-5
Frequency Transfer Arrow..............................................3-5
3.2 COM OPERATION .........................................................3-6
Frequency spacing ...........................................................3-6
Automatic Squelch ..........................................................3-6
Selecting a COM Radio ...................................................3-6
Emergency Frequency (121.500 MHz) ..........................3-7
Quick-Tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz .................3-7
Stuck Microphone ............................................................3-7
3.3 NAV OPERATION ..........................................................3-8
Frequency range ..............................................................3-8
Morse Code Identifier .....................................................3-8
NAV Radio Selection for navigation ............................3-8
3.4 FREQUENCY AUTO-TUNING ....................................3-9
Auto-tuning on the PFD .................................................3-9
Auto-tuning on the MFD ..............................................3-10
WPT – Airport Information Page ................................3-10
WPT – VOR Information Page ....................................3-12
NRST – Nearest Airports Page....................................3-13
NRST – Nearest VOR Page .........................................3-14
NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page..............................3-15
Auto-Tuning on Approach Activation
(NAV Frequencies) ..........................................................3-16
SECTION 4 TRANSPONDER
4.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................4-1
Transponder Softkeys .....................................................4-1
Transponder Status Bar ..................................................4-1
Mode S Features ..............................................................4-2
Traffic Information Service (TIS) ..................................4-2
4.2 OPERATION .....................................................................4-3
Mode Selection ................................................................4-3
Ground Mode (Automatic)...........................................4-3
Standby Mode (Manual) ..............................................4-3
Manual ON Mode .......................................................4-3
Altitude Mode (Automatic or Manual) .........................4-4
Reply Status ................................................................4-4
Code Selection..................................................................4-4
Entering a Code ..........................................................4-4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
iii
7/11/2005 5:50:11 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VFR Code....................................................................4-5
Important Codes .........................................................4-5
IDENT Function .................................................................4-5
SECTION 5 AUDIO PANEL
5.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................5-1
Transceivers.......................................................................5-1
Mono/Stereo Headsets ...................................................5-2
Unmuted/Unswitched Inputs .........................................5-2
Front Panel Controls .......................................................5-2
5.2 OPERATION .....................................................................5-4
Power-up and Fail-safe Operation ...............................5-4
Power-up ....................................................................5-4
Fail-safe Operation ......................................................5-4
Selecting and Deselecting Keys ...................................5-4
Lighting ..............................................................................5-4
Transceiver Keys...............................................................5-4
COM MIC Keys ............................................................5-4
COM Keys ...................................................................5-4
Transmitting ................................................................5-5
Optional COM Muting .....................................................5-5
COM Muting on Receive .............................................5-5
COM Muting on Transmit ............................................5-5
PA Function .......................................................................5-5
Speaker ..............................................................................5-5
Marker Beacon Receiver ................................................5-6
Description and Operation ...........................................5-6
Marker Beacon Signal Sensitivity .................................5-6
Marker Beacon Volume Adjustment ............................5-6
Navigation Radios ...........................................................5-7
Intercom System (ICS) Isolation ...................................5-8
PILOT Mode ................................................................5-8
COPILOT Mode ...........................................................5-8
CREW Mode ...............................................................5-8
ALL Mode ...................................................................5-8
Intercom Volume and Squelch Control .......................5-9
Intercom Volume Control .............................................5-9
Intercom Manual Squelch Control ................................5-9
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ) .................................5-9
Digital Clearance Recorder with Playback
Capability ........................................................................5-10
Reversionary Mode .......................................................5-10
iv
Front Matter.indd 4
SECTION 6 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.1 INTRODUCTION ..............................................................6-1
EIS Indicators ....................................................................6-1
Round Dial Gauge .......................................................6-1
Horizontal Bar Indicators .............................................6-1
Bar Graphs (Lean Page Only) .......................................6-1
Digital Readouts .........................................................6-1
6.2 ENGINE PAGE .................................................................6-2
Tachometer .......................................................................6-2
Fuel Pressure Indicator ...................................................6-2
CHT Indicator ....................................................................6-2
Oil Temperature Indicator..............................................6-2
Oil Pressure Indicator .....................................................6-2
Ammeter ............................................................................6-2
Voltmeter...........................................................................6-2
Fuel Qty GAL Indicator ...................................................6-3
6.3 LEAN PAGE ......................................................................6-4
Cylinder Select .................................................................6-4
Assist ..................................................................................6-4
6.4 SYSTEM PAGE ................................................................6-6
SECTION 7 MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY OPERATION
7.1 DESCRIPTION .................................................................7-1
7.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ............................................7-1
7.3 MFD POWER-UP ...........................................................7-1
Splash Screen Information ............................................7-1
7.4 MFD BACKLIGHTING ..................................................7-2
7.5 MFD SOFTKEYS .............................................................7-2
7.6 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS (OPTIONAL) .............7-2
Displaying the Checklist Page ......................................7-2
Selecting a Procedure Group ........................................7-3
Selecting a Checklist within the Procedure Group ..7-3
Selecting a Checklist Item .............................................7-3
Removing the Check mark from a Checklist Item ....7-3
Advancing to the Next Checklist ..................................7-3
One-Button Access to Emergency Procedures ..........7-3
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:50:12 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Exiting the Checklist Page .............................................7-3
7.7 MFD PAGE GROUPS ....................................................7-6
7.8 WORKING WITH MENUS ...........................................7-7
7.9 NAVIGATION MAP PAGE ..........................................7-8
Navigation Map Page Operations ................................7-9
Changing the Map Orientation.....................................7-9
Selecting a Map Range ...................................................7-9
Using the Auto Zoom Feature .......................................7-9
Identifying Aviation Map Data ...................................7-10
Decluttering the Map ...................................................7-11
Map Panning ...................................................................7-12
Displaying Topographic Data on the Navigation
Map Page .........................................................................7-14
Displaying Terrain Information on the
Navigation Map Page ...................................................7-15
Displaying Traffic on the Navigation Map Page .....7-15
MFD Data Bar..................................................................7-16
Navigation Map Page Options Menu ........................7-16
Map Setup .......................................................................7-16
Map Group Options .......................................................7-16
Orientation ...............................................................7-17
Auto Zoom................................................................7-18
Land Data .................................................................7-18
Track Vector ..............................................................7-19
Wind Vector ..............................................................7-19
Nav Range Ring ........................................................7-20
Topo Data .................................................................7-20
Topo Range ..............................................................7-21
Terrain Data ..............................................................7-21
Obstacle Data ...........................................................7-22
Fuel Range Ring (Fuel RNG) (RSV) .............................7-22
Traffic Group ..................................................................7-23
Aviation Group Options ..............................................7-25
Land Group Options ......................................................7-27
Measure Bearing/Distance ...........................................7-29
7.10 TRAFFIC MAP PAGE................................................7-30
TIS Symbology ................................................................7-31
Traffic Map Page Operations.......................................7-31
Power-Up Test ...........................................................7-31
Changing the Map Range..........................................7-31
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Front Matter.indd 5
Operating Mode ........................................................7-32
TIS Audio Alert ..........................................................7-32
TIS Traffic Status ........................................................7-33
Traffic Banner .......................................................7-33
7.11 TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE ................................7-34
Terrain Proximity Page Operations ...........................7-35
Displaying Obstacle Data.............................................7-36
Obstacle Shapes ........................................................7-36
Navigation Map Display Conditions ...........................7-36
7.12 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION ......................................7-37
Direct-to Navigation Operations................................7-38
Selecting a Direct-to Waypoint ...................................7-38
Selecting a Direct-to Destination by Facility or
City Name ............................................................7-38
Selecting a Direct-to Destination from the Active
Flight Plan............................................................7-39
Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct-to
Destination ..........................................................7-40
Shortcuts .................................................................7-40
Canceling Direct-to Navigation .................................7-41
Specifying a Course to a Waypoint .............................7-41
7.13 FLIGHT PLANS ...........................................................7-42
Active Flight Plan Page ................................................7-42
Active Flight Plan Page Options .................................7-42
Create a New Flight Plan ...........................................7-43
Activate Leg ..............................................................7-44
Store Flight Plan ........................................................7-45
Invert Flight Plan .......................................................7-46
Delete a Waypoint .....................................................7-46
Load a Departure ......................................................7-47
Load an Arrival ..........................................................7-48
Load an Approach .....................................................7-49
Remove a Departure, Arrival, or Approach ..................7-50
Closest Point of Flight Plan Feature ............................7-50
Change Fields ...........................................................7-51
Restore Defaults........................................................7-51
Shortcuts ..................................................................7-51
Flight Plan Catalog Page ..............................................7-52
Flight Plan Catalog Page Operations .......................7-52
Activate a Flight Plan ................................................7-53
Stop Navigating a Flight Plan ....................................7-53
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
v
7/11/2005 5:50:12 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Invert and Activate a Flight Plan ................................7-54
Create a New Flight Plan ...........................................7-54
Copy a Flight Plan .....................................................7-55
Delete a Flight Plan ...................................................7-55
Delete All Flight Plans................................................7-56
Sort By Comment/Number .........................................7-56
Point-n-Shoot Flight Plan Creation Feature.................7-57
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Page ...............................7-58
VNAV Page Menu Options .........................................7-59
7.14 PROCEDURES ............................................................7-60
Arrivals and Departures ...............................................7-60
Approaches .....................................................................7-61
G1000 Navigational Guidance for Approaches .......7-61
Selecting Approaches ...................................................7-62
7.15 WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP.....................................7-65
Page Selection ................................................................7-65
Airport Information Page (INFO)................................7-66
Airport Information Page Operations..........................7-66
Airport Runway Information Field ..............................7-68
Airport Frequency Information Field ........................7-69
Airport Frequency Descriptions ..................................7-70
Airport Information Page Options.............................7-70
Departure Information Page (DP) ..............................7-71
Arrival Information Page (STAR) ................................7-72
Approach Information Page ........................................7-74
Intersection Information Page ...................................7-76
Intersection Information Page Operations ..................7-77
NDB Information Page ..................................................7-78
NDB Information Page Operations .............................7-79
NDB Information Page Options ..................................7-80
VOR Information Page ..................................................7-81
VOR Information Page Operations .............................7-82
VOR Information Page Options ..................................7-83
User Waypoint Information Page ...............................7-84
User Waypoint Information Page Operations ..............7-85
Creating User Waypoints..............................................7-86
Creating User Waypoints from the Navigation
Map Page .................................................................7-87
Modifying User Waypoints ..........................................7-88
User Waypoint Information Page Options ...............7-89
vi
Front Matter.indd 6
7.16 AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP ....................................7-92
Trip Planning Page .........................................................7-92
Trip Planning .............................................................7-93
Fuel Planning ............................................................7-94
Other Statistics ..........................................................7-95
Utility Page ...............................................................7-96
Utility Page Operations ..............................................7-97
Trip Statistics .............................................................7-98
Scheduler .................................................................7-98
GPS Status Page .............................................................7-99
Satellite Status Page ................................................7-100
RAIM Prediction ......................................................7-102
GPS Signal Strength ................................................7-103
System Setup Page ......................................................7-104
Pilot Profiles ............................................................7-105
Selecting the Active Profile ......................................7-105
Creating a Profile ....................................................7-105
Deleting a Profile ....................................................7-106
Renaming a Profile ..................................................7-106
Date/Time ...............................................................7-107
Display Units ...........................................................7-107
Map Datums ...........................................................7-108
Airspace Alerts ........................................................7-109
Arrival Alerts ...........................................................7-110
Audio Alerts ............................................................7-111
MFD Data Bar Fields ...............................................7-111
GPS CDI ..................................................................7-112
COM Configuration .................................................7-112
Nearest APT ............................................................7-113
System Status Page .....................................................7-114
7.17 NEAREST PAGE GROUP ......................................7-115
Navigating to a Nearest Waypoint ..........................7-116
Nearest Airports Page ..............................................7-118
Nearest Intersections Page .......................................7-120
Nearest NDB Page........................................................7-121
Nearest VOR Page ........................................................7-122
Nearest User Waypoint Page .....................................7-124
Nearest Frequencies Page .........................................7-125
Nearest Airspaces Page ..............................................7-127
Airspace Alerts Box .................................................7-128
Airspaces ................................................................7-129
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:50:13 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 8 ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
8.1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................8-1
8.2 ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS .....................................8-2
8.3 AG-5B AIRCRAFT ALERTS .........................................8-3
WARNING Alerts ...............................................................8-3
CAUTION Alerts.................................................................8-3
Message Advisory Alerts ................................................8-4
Voice Alerts .......................................................................8-4
8.4 G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS........................8-5
8.5 G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES ...........8-8
MFD & PFD Message Advisories ...................................8-8
Database Message Advisories ......................................8-9
GMA 1347 Message Advisories ...................................8-10
GIA 63 Message Advisories..........................................8-11
GEA 71 Message Advisories.........................................8-13
GTX 33 Message Advisories .........................................8-13
GRS 77 Message Advisories .........................................8-14
GMU 44 Message Advisories .......................................8-14
GDC 74A Message Advisories......................................8-15
Miscellaneous Message Advisories............................8-15
SECTION 9 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
9.1 STORMSCOPE INTERFACE.........................................9-1
Displaying Weather Data on the Nearest Pages ............9-8
Displaying METAR and TAF information on the
Airport Information Page .............................................9-9
Displaying Weather Data on the AUX - Trip Planning
Page Map .................................................................9-10
Displaying Weather Data on the Flight Plan
Page Maps ................................................................9-10
Displaying Weather on the Weather Data Link Page ..9-10
Weather Data Link Page Softkeys...............................9-10
NEXRAD Abnormalities..............................................9-11
NEXRAD Limitations ..................................................9-11
NEXRAD Intensity .....................................................9-12
Weather Data Link Page Setup ..................................9-17
Map Panning Information-Weather Data Link Page ....9-17
Weather Product Symbols ...........................................9-18
Weather Product Age ................................................9-18
GDL 69A – XM Digital Audio Entertainment ............9-19
XM Information Page ................................................9-19
Data and Audio Radio ID ...........................................9-20
Service Class .............................................................9-20
Weather Products Window ........................................9-20
XM Radio Page (Figure 9-12) .......................................9-21
XM Radio Softkeys ....................................................9-21
Active Channel ..........................................................9-21
Channels ..................................................................9-21
Category ...................................................................9-21
Volume .....................................................................9-23
Presets ......................................................................9-23
GDL 69 Troubleshooting ...............................................9-24
Displaying Stormscope Lightning Data on the
Navigation Map Page .....................................................9-1
Stormscope Lightning Data Display Range ...................9-3
Customized Display .....................................................9-3
Clearing Stormscope Lightning Data Using the
Navigation Map Page Options Menu ...........................9-4
Stormscope Page .............................................................9-5
Stormscope Page Operations .......................................9-6
APPENDIX B ABBREVIATIONS, ACRONYMS &
NAV TERMS ..........................................................................APP-2
9.2 GARMIN GDL 69/69A OPTIONAL INTERFACE ..9-7
APPENDIX C QUESTIONS & ANSWERS .................APP-7
Introduction ......................................................................9-7
GDL 69 Weather ...............................................................9-7
Displaying XM Weather Products on the
Navigation Map Page ..................................................9-8
Navigation Map Page Weather Control Softkeys ...........9-8
Navigation Map Setup Options ....................................9-8
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Front Matter.indd 7
APPENDIX A SD CARD USE ........................................APP-1
Aviation Database .......................................................APP-1
Terrain Database ..........................................................APP-1
APPENDIX D G1000 MAP DATUMS ......................APP-11
APPENDIX E GENERAL TIS INFORMATION .......APP-13
Introduction ................................................................APP-13
TIS vs. TCAS .................................................................APP-13
TIS Limitations ............................................................APP-13
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
vii
7/11/2005 5:50:14 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX F MAP SYMBOLS ....................................APP-15
Airport ..........................................................................APP-15
NAVAIDS .......................................................................APP-15
Basemap.......................................................................APP-15
Traffic............................................................................APP-16
Lightning Strike .........................................................APP-16
Miscellaneous .............................................................APP-16
Line Symbols ...............................................................APP-17
Obstacle database ....................................................APP-18
Terrain Color Chart ....................................................APP-18
INDEX
Index ............................................................................I-1
APPENDIX G G1000 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS ..APP-19
GDU 1040 MFD & PFD ................................................APP-19
GMA 1347 Audio Panel .............................................APP-19
GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units ...........................APP-19
GDC 74A Air Data Computer ...................................APP-20
GTX 33 Mode S Transponder ...................................APP-20
GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit ..................................APP-20
GDL 69/69A Weather Data Link...............................APP-20
GRS 77 AHRS ...............................................................APP-21
viii
Front Matter.indd 8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:50:14 PM
WARNINGS & CAUTIONS
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain function.
The G1000 Terrain Proximity feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The Terrain
Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications
requiring a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third party sources. Garmin is
not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied
upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical
charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The Garmin G1000, as installed in Tiger AG-5B aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without
a fault indication shown by the G1000. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence
by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could
vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A Air Data Computer,
or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure
altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: The Jeppesen database used in the G1000 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure
that its information remains current. Updates are released every 28 days. A database information packet is
included in the G1000 package. Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: The basemap (land and water data) must not be used for navigation, but rather only for non-navigational situational awareness. Any basemap indication should be compared with other navigation sources.
CAUTION: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the G1000 to attempt to penetrate a
thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Airman’s Information Manual
(AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an intense
radar echo.”
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Front Matter.indd 9
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
ix
7/11/2005 5:50:14 PM
WARNINGS & CAUTIONS
CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G1000
Pilot’s Guide documentation. Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations,
carefully compare indications from the G1000 to all available navigation sources, including the information
from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before
continuing navigation.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by
an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
CAUTION: The GDU 1040 PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is
very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass
lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system. Depictions of equipment
may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: There are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms that can cause isolated
discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more discharge points in the strike
display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after the screen has been cleared.
Avoid the clusters to avoid the thunderstorms. In the cell display mode, even a single discharge point may
represent thunderstorm activity and should therefore be avoided.
x
Front Matter.indd 10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:50:14 PM
WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no
charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty does not
cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING
FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusion of
incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole discretion.
SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit the
Garmin Web site at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Front Matter.indd 11
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
xi
7/11/2005 5:50:15 PM
Front Matter.indd 12
7/11/2005 5:50:15 PM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section is designed to provide an overview of the
G1000 Integrated Cockpit System as installed in the Tiger
AG-5B aircraft.
The G1000 includes the following Line Replaceable
Units (LRUs):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
GDU 1040 Multi Function Display (MFD)
GIA 63 Integrated Avionics Units (2)
GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
GRS 77 Attitude & Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
GMU 44 Magnetometer
GMA 1347 Audio System with integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
GTX 32 or GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
GDL 69/69A Data Link (optional)
All LRUs have a modular design, which greatly
eases troubleshooting and maintenance of the G1000
system. A top-level G1000 block diagram is given in
Figure 1-1. Additional or optional interfaces are depicted
in Figure 1-2.
1.2 LRU DESCRIPTIONS
• GDU 1040 – The GDU 1040 has a 10.4-inch LCD
display with 1024 x 768 resolution. The left display is configured as a PFD and the right display is
configured as a MFD. Both GDU 1040s link and
display all functions of the G1000 system during
flight. The displays communicate with each other
through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet
connection. Each display is also paired with an
Ethernet connection to a GIA 63 Integrated Avionics
Unit.
• GMA 1347 – The GMA 1347 integrates NAV/COM
digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon
controls. The GMA 1347 also controls manual
display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP
button) and is installed between the MFD and the
PFD. The GMA 1347 communicates with both
GIA 63s using an RS-232 digital interface.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for detailed
specifications regarding the G1000 LRUs.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
System Overview.indd 1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
1-1
7/7/2005 8:44:34 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GIA 63 – The GIA 63 is the central Integrated
Avionics Unit (IAU) of the G1000 system. The
GIA 63 is the main communications hub, linking
all LRUs with the PFD and the MFD displays. Each
GIA 63 contains a GPS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS
receivers, and system integration microprocessors.
Each GIA 63 is paired with a GDU 1040 display
through an Ethernet connection. The GIAs do not
communicate with each other directly.
• GRS 77 – The GRS 77 is an Attitude and Heading
Reference System (AHRS) that provides aircraft
attitude and heading information to both the
G1000 displays and the GIA 63s. The unit contains advanced sensors, accelerometers, and rate
sensors. In addition, the GRS 77 interfaces with
the GDC 74A Air Data Computer and the GMU 44
Magnetometer. The GRS 77 also utilizes two GPS
signal inputs sent from the GIA 63s. Attitude and
heading information is sent using an ARINC 429
digital interface to both GDU 1040s and GIA 63s.
The AHRS modes of operation are discussed later
in this document.
1-2
System Overview.indd 2
• GMU 44 – The GMU 44 Magnetometer measures
local magnetic field information. Data is sent to
the GRS 77 AHRS for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power
directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with
the GRS 77 using an RS-485 digital interface.
• GDC 74A – The GDC 74A Air Data Computer
processes information received from the pitot/static
system and the outside air temperature (OAT)
sensor. The GDC 74A provides pressure altitude,
airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the
G1000 system and communicates with the GIA 63s,
GDU 1040s and GRS 77 using an ARINC 429 digital
interface.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:45:43 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GEA 71 – The GEA 71 receives and processes signals
from the engine and airframe sensors. Sensor types
include engine temperature and pressure sensors as
well as fuel measurement and pressure sensors. The
GEA 71 communicates with both GIA 63s using an
RS-485 digital interface.
• GDL 69/69A (optional) – The GDL 69/69A is an
XM satellite radio receiver that provides real-time
weather information to the G1000 MFD. The GDL
69A also provides digital audio entertainment in the
cockpit. The GDL 69/69A communicates with the
MFD on the High-Speed Data Bus. A subscription
to the XM Satellite Radio service is required for the
GDL 69/69A to be used.
• GTX 33 – The GTX 33 is a solid-state, Mode S
transponder that provides Modes A, C and S operation. The GTX 33 is controlled through the PFD
and communicates with both GIA 63s through an
RS-232 digital interface.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
System Overview.indd 3
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
1-3
7/7/2005 8:47:25 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
High-Speed Data Bus (Ethernet)
GMA 1347
Audio Panel
GDU 1040 (PFD)
GDU 1040 (MFD)
Reversionary
Control
Reversionary
Control
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
No. 1 GIA 63
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Inegration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GPS Output
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
GRS 77
AHRS
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
No. 2 GIA 63
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GPS Output
GMU 44
Magnetometer
Heading
Autopilot
GTX 33
Transponder
GEA 71
Engine/Airframe
Unit
Figure 1-1 Basic G1000 System
1-4
System Overview.indd 4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:47:39 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
High-Speed Data Bus (Ethernet)
No. 2 GIA 63
Integrated Avionics Unit
System Integration Processors
I/O Processors
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS
Glideslope
GDL 69/69A
Data Link
Real-time Weather and
Digital Audio Entertainment
(subscription-based service
optional)
L3
Stormscope
Lightning Strike and
Thunderstorm Detection
(optional)
Figure 1-2 G1000 Optional Features
NOTE: For information on all optional equipment shown in the above figure, consult the section on optional
equipment. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this additional
equipment.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
System Overview.indd 5
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
1-5
7/7/2005 8:47:42 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 PFD/MFD CONTROLS
1
2
3
5
4
17
6
7
8
9
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Controls
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob
10
Direct-to Key
2
NAV Frequency Toggle Key
11
Flight Plan Key
10
14
3
NAV Knob
12
Clear Key
11
Heading Knob
13
Flight Management System Knob
15
4
5
Range Joystick
14
Menu Key
12
16
6
Course/Baro Knob
15
Procedure Key
7
COM Knob
16
Enter Key
8
COM Frequency Toggle Key
17
Altitude Knob
9
COM VOL/SQ Knob
1-6
System Overview.indd 6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
13
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:47:55 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The G1000 controls and keys have been designed to
simplify the operation of the system and to minimize
workload as well as the time required to access sophisticated functionality. The following list provides an overview of the primary function(s) of the keys and knobs
located on the display bezel.
• (1) NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls the NAV audio
level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the field as a
percentage.
• (2) NAV Frequency Toggle Key – Toggles the
standby and active NAV frequencies.
• (3) Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the MHz (large knob)
and kHz (small knob) standby frequencies for the
NAV receiver. Press to toggle the tuning cursor (cyan
box) between the NAV1 and NAV2 fields.
• (4) Heading Knob – Manually selects a heading.
When this knob is pressed, a window displaying a
digital heading momentarily appears to the left of the
heading indicator and the heading bug synchronizes
with the compass lubber line.
• (5) Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated.
Activates the map pointer when pressed.
• (6) CRS/BARO Knob – The large knob sets the
altimeter barometric pressure and the small knob
adjusts the course. The course is only adjustable
when the HSI is in VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP
mode. Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the
currently selected VOR.
• (7) Dual COM Knob – Tunes the MHz (large knob)
and kHz (small knob) standby frequencies for the
COM transceiver. Pressing the knob toggles the
tuning cursor (cyan box) between the COM1 and
COM2 fields.
• (8) COM Frequency Toggle Key – Toggles the
standby and active COM frequencies. Pressing and
holding this key for two seconds automatically tunes
the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) in the active
frequency field.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
System Overview.indd 7
• (9) COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio
level. Pressing this knob turns the COM automatic
squelch ON and OFF. Audio volume level is shown
in the field as a percentage.
• (10) Direct-to Key (
) – Allows the user to enter
a destination waypoint and establish a direct course
to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route, or taken from the map
cursor position).
• (11) FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page
for creating and editing the active flight plan or for
accessing stored flight plans.
• (12) CLR Key (DFLT MAP) – Erases information,
cancels an entry, or removes page menus. To immediately display the Navigation Map Page, press and
hold the CLR key (MFD only).
• (13) Dual FMS Knobs – Used to select the page
to be viewed (only on the MFD). The large knob
selects a page group (MAP, WPT, AUX, NRST) while
the small knob selects a specific page within the page
group. Pressing the small knob turns the selection
cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data
may be entered in the different windows using a
combination of the small and large knobs. The large
knob is used to move the cursor on the page, while
the small knob is used to select individual characters for the highlighted cursor location. When the
G1000 displays a list of information that is too long
for the display screen, a scroll bar appears along the
right side of the display to indicate the availability of
additional items within the selected category. Press
the FMS/PUSH CRSR knob to activate the cursor
and turn the large knob to scroll through the list.
• (14) MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list
of options. This option list allows the user to access
additional features or to make setting changes that
relate to certain pages.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
1-7
7/7/2005 8:47:56 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• (15) PROC Key – Selects approaches, departures
and arrivals from the flight plan. When using a
flight plan, available procedures for the departure
and/or arrival airport are automatically suggested. If
a flight plan is not used, the desired airport and the
desired procedure may be selected. This key selects
IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures
(STARs) and approaches (IAPs) from the database
and loads them into the active flight plan.
• (16) ENT Key – Accepts a menu selection or data
entry. This key is used to approve an operation or
to complete data entry. It is also used to confirm
selections and information entries.
• (17) Dual ALT Knob – Sets the reference altitude
in the window located above the Altimeter. The
large knob selects the thousands, while the small
knob selects the hundreds.
1.4 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
The GDU 1040 data card slots use Secure Digital (SD)
cards. SD cards are used for aviation database updates
and terrain database storage.
To install an SD card:
1.
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot located
on the right side of the display bezel (the front
edge of the card should be flush with the face
of the display bezel).
To remove an SD card:
1.
Gently press on the SD card to release the
spring latch and eject the card.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions
on updating the aviation database.
NOTE: The selected COM (displayed in green)
is controlled by the COM MIC key on the audio
panel (GMA 1347).
1-8
System Overview.indd 8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:47:56 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM POWER-UP
The G1000 system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The Garmin G1000 PFD/MFD and supporting
sub-systems include both power-on and continuous builtin test features that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM,
external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
While the system begins to initialize, test annunciations are displayed to the pilot at power-up, as shown in
the figure below. All system annunciations should clear
within one (1) minute of power-up. The GMA 1347 also
annunciates all bezel lights briefly upon power-up.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook
for specific procedures concerning avionics power
application and emergency power supply operation.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
NOTE: Refer to the Annunciations and Alerts
section for more information regarding system
annunciations and alerts.
On the PFD, the AHRS system displays the ‘AHRS
ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’ message and begins to initialize.
The AHRS should display valid attitude and heading fields
within one (1) minute of power-up. The AHRS can align
itself while the aircraft is taxiing or during level flight.
Figure 1-4 PFD Initialization
190-00617-00 Rev. A
System Overview.indd 9
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
1-9
7/7/2005 8:48:03 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
When the MFD powers up, the MFD Power-up page
displays the following data:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
System version
Copyright
Checklist filename (if installed)
Land database name and version
Obstacle database name and version
Terrain database name and version
Aviation database name, version, and effective
dates
When this information has been reviewed for currency
(to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is
prompted to continue. Current database information is
displayed with valid operating dates, cycle number and
database type.
Press the ENT key to acknowledge this information
and proceed to the Navigation Map Page. When the
system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to
determine a position, the Navigation Map Page appears
showing the aircraft current position.
Figure 1-5 MFD Power-up Page
1-10
System Overview.indd 10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:48:09 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
1.7 SYSTEM OPERATION
The G1000 PFD and MFD displays use photocell technology to automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured
to optimize display appearance through a broad range of
cockpit lighting conditions. PFD, MFD, and GMA 1347
bezel/key lighting is normally controlled directly by the
existing instrument panel dimmer bus.
If desired, the PFD and MFD display backlighting
may be adjusted manually. PFD, MFD, and GMA 1347
bezel/key brightness can also be adjusted manually as
well. GMA 1347 bezel/key brightness is directly tied to
the MFD bezel/key adjustment.
NOTE: Refer to the Primary Flight Display section
for instructions on how to manually adjust the
display backlighting.
NORMAL MODE
The PFD and MFD are connected together on a single
Ethernet bus, allowing for high-speed communication between the two units. Each GIA 63 is connected to a single
display, as shown in Figure 1-1. This allows the units to
share information, enabling true system integration.
In normal operating mode, the PFD displays graphical
flight instrumentation in lieu of traditional gyro instruments. Attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, and vertical
speed are all shown on one display. The MFD shows a
full-color moving map with navigation information. Both
displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection, as well as for the heading, course/baro and altitude
reference functions. On the left of the MFD display, the
Engine Indication System (EIS) cluster shows engine and
airframe instrumentation. Figure 1-6 gives an example of
the G1000 system in normal mode.
Figure 1-6 G1000 Normal Mode
190-00617-00 Rev. A
System Overview.indd 11
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
1-11
7/7/2005 8:48:34 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
REVERSIONARY MODE
Should a failure occur in either display, the G1000
automatically enters reversionary mode. In reversionary
mode, all important flight information is shown on the
remaining display. Figure 1-6 shows an example where
the PFD fails.
If a display fails, the GIA 63-GDU 1040 Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the GIA can no longer communicate
with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the
NAV and COM functions provided to the failed display by
the GIA are flagged as invalid on the remaining display.
The system reverts to using backup paths for the GRS 77,
GDC 74A, GEA 71 and GTX 33, as required. The change
to backup paths is completely automated for all LRUs,
and no pilot action is required.
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup
paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the
Annunciations and Alerts section for further
information regarding these and other system
alerts.
Reversionary mode may also be manually activated by
the pilot if the system fails to detect a display problem.
Reversionary mode is activated manually by pressing
the red DISPLAY BACKUP button at the bottom of the
GMA 1347. Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.
Figure 1-7 G1000 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
1-12
System Overview.indd 12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:49:01 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AHRS MODES OF OPERATION
Air Data Input Failure
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77
AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal
(primary) mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either external measurement is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air data information
to assist in attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of
operation are available (see table below) and depend upon
the combination of the sensor inputs available. Loss of air
data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
A failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS
output while AHRS is operating in normal (primary)
mode. A failure of the air data input while the AHRS is
operating in reversionary ‘No GPS’ mode results in invalid
attitude and heading information on the PFD (as indicated
by red ‘X’ flags).
GPS Input Failure
Magnetometer Failure
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions
to one of the reversionary ‘No Magnetometer’ modes and
continues to output valid attitude information. However,
the heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with
a red ‘X’.
The G1000 system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information provided from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable,
the AHRS transitions seamlessly to using the other GPS
receiver. An alert message informs the pilot of the use of
the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
continues to operate in reversionary ‘No GPS’ mode, so
long as air data and magnetometer inputs are available
and valid.
NOTE: Refer to the Annunciations and Alerts
section for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering in any of the
three reversionary modes listed below can
degrade AHRS accuracy.
Available AHRS Functions
AHRS Mode
Normal/Primary
Reversionary:
No GPS
Reversionary:
No Magnetometer
Reversionary:
No Magnetometer
No Air Data
190-00617-00 Rev. A
System Overview.indd 13
Available Sensor Inputs
GPS Input
GMU 44
GDC 74A
Heading
(At least one) Magnetometer Air Data Computer
X
X
X
X
Pitch
Roll
X
X
X
X
X
–
X
X
X
X
–
X
–
X
X
X
–
X
–
–
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
1-13
7/7/2005 8:49:01 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.8 CHECKLISTS
The Checklist Page displays the following data:
As an option, the G1000 MFD is able to display electronic checklists customized for the Tiger AG-5B. The
G1000 accesses the Tiger AG-5B checklists from an SD
card which is inserted into a slot on the bezel.
If the SD card contains a valid checklist file, the
Power-up Page displays both the aircraft make and model
to which the checklist applies and copyright information.
With the Checklist Page displayed:
• If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file, the page displays ‘INVALID CHECKLIST’.
• If the SD card does not contain any
checklist, the page displays ‘CHECKLIST
NOT PRESENT’.
• Selected checklist group
• Selected checklist title
• Selected checklist text, including:
• Plain text
• Notes
• Cautions
• Warnings
• Challenge/Response pairs
• Challenges with no responses
• Check state of each checkable item
• Checklist complete indicator
If a valid checklist file exists, pressing the CHKLIST
softkey allows access to all checklists. Pressing the EXIT
softkey exits the Checklist Pages and displays the page
last viewed.
NOTE: The checklists cannot be edited from
within the system. Refer to the Garmin Aviation
Checklist Editor (ACE) User’s Guide for information on creating and editing checklists.
1-14
System Overview.indd 14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:49:01 AM
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-8 Sample Checklist
190-00617-00 Rev. A
System Overview.indd 15
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
1-15
7/7/2005 8:49:07 AM
System Overview.indd 16
7/7/2005 8:49:07 AM
INTRODUCTION
SECTION 2 PRIMARY FLIGHT
DISPLAY
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This section of the Pilot’s Guide describes the major
features of the G1000 Primary Flight Display (PFD) as installed on the Tiger AG-5B aircraft. The G1000 system
consists of two 10.4-inch color flat panel displays. During normal operation, the left display is configured as a
Primary Flight Display.
The PFD provides increased situational awareness by
replacing the traditional “six-pack” of instruments on the
pilot’s panel with an easy-to-scan display that provides
a large horizon and airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical
speed, navigation, communication, annunciation, terrain,
traffic and lightning (optional) information. The PFD also
controls the operation of the transponder, the selection of
NAV/COM frequencies, audio volume and many navigation features. The operation of these features is explained
in other supporting sections of the pilot’s guide.
The G1000 system controls were designed so that, regardless of which seat the pilot is flying from, the aircraft
can be flown with one hand and the controls manipulated
by the other hand.
The PFD displays the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Navigation Frequency Window
Navigation Status Bar
Communication Frequency Window
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed Box
Attitude Indicator
Slip/Skid Indicator
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Turn Rate Indicator
Bearing Pointers
BRG1 Information Window
BRG2 Information Window
Altimeter
Altitude Reference Box
Barometric Setting Box
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator
Marker Beacon Receiver Annunciations
Vertical Speed Indicator
Alerts Window
Annunciation Window
System Time Box
Transponder Status Bar
Outside Air Temperature Box
Inset Map
Direct-to Window
Flight Plan Window
Procedures Window
Timer/References Window
Nearest Airports Window
WARNING: In the event that the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become
unusable, please refer to the backup instruments.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-1
7/11/2005 4:27:56 PM
INTRODUCTION
1
18
17
16
15
14
2
13
12
3
11
4
10
9
5
6
8
7
1
NAV Frequency Window
10
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
11
Barometric Setting Box
3
True Airspeed Box
12
Vertical Speed Indicator
4
Heading Box
13
Altimeter
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator
14
Altitude Reference Box
6
Outside Air Temperature Box
15
COM Frequency Window
7
Softkeys
16
Navigation Status Bar
8
System Time Box
17
Slip/Skid Indicator
9
Transponder Status Bar
18
Attitude Indicator
Figure 2-1 Default PFD Information
2-2
PFD.indd 2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:01 PM
INTRODUCTION
11
1
10
9
8
2
7
3
6
5
4
1
Traffic Annunciation
7
Selected Course Box
2
Selected Heading Box
8
Annunciation Window
3
Inset Map
9
Vertical Speed Pointer
4
BRG1 Information Window
10
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator
5
BRG2 Information Window
11
Marker Beacon Annunciation
6
Auxiliary Window
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 3
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-3
7/11/2005 4:28:08 PM
BACKLIGHTING
2.2 BACKLIGHTING
To manually adjust the backlighting for the
PFD and MFD keys:
The backlighting of the display and the keys can be
adjusted for the PFD and MFD. The backlighting intensity ranges from 0.14% to 100.00%. Two modes exist for
adjustment:
1.
Press the MENU key on the PFD to display
the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ is now
highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘PFD
DSPL’. Turn the small FMS knob in the direction
of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection window. Turn the FMS knob to select
‘MANUAL’, then press the ENT key.
4.
With the intensity value now highlighted,
turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
backlighting, then press the ENT key.
5.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘MFD
DSPL’ and turn the small FMS knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD
KEY’. Repeat steps 3 and 4. Press the CLR or
MENU key to remove the window.
• Auto – The G1000 adjusts the backlighting automatically with reference to the amount of light in
the cockpit (default setting).
• Manual – Allows the pilot to manually adjust the
backlighting.
NOTE: The backlighting can only be adjusted
from the PFD, except in reversionary mode.
NOTE: No other window can be displayed in the
lower right corner of the PFD when the MENU
key is pressed to change the backlighting.
To manually adjust the backlighting for the
PFD and MFD:
2-4
PFD.indd 4
1.
Press the MENU key on the PFD to display
the PFD Setup Menu window. ‘AUTO’ is now
highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection window. Turn the FMS knob to select
‘MANUAL’, then press the ENT key.
3.
With the intensity value now highlighted,
turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
backlighting, then press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next
to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2 and 3. Press
the CLR or MENU key to remove the window.
Figure 2-3 PFD Setup Menu Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:09 PM
SOFTKEYS
2.3 SOFTKEY FUNCTION
When a softkey is turned on, its color changes to black
text on gray background and remains this way until it is
turned off, at which time it changes to white text on black
background. The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST and
ALERTS softkeys change momentarily to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white
text on black background.
Figure 2-4 Softkey On
Figure 2-5 Softkey Off
The PFD softkeys listed provide control over flight
management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic and lightning (optional).
INSET – Press to display the Inset Map in the lower
left corner of the PFD.
OFF – Press to remove the Inset Map
DCLTR (3) – Press momentarily to select the
desired amount of map detail. The declutter
level appears adjacent to the DCLTR softkey.
• No declutter: All map features are visible.
• Declutter – 1: Declutters land data.
• Declutter – 2: Declutters land and SUA data.
• Declutter – 3: Removes everything except for
the active flight plan.
TRAFFIC – Press to display TIS traffic on the map.
TOPO – Press to display topographical data (i.e.,
coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes, etc.) and
elevation scale on the inset map.
TERRAIN – Press to display terrain information
on the inset map.
STRMSCP (optional) – Press to display the lightning data on the inset map (within a 200 nm
radius of the aircraft).
NEXRAD (optional) – Press to display NEXRAD
weather and coverage information.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 5
XM LTNG (optional) – Press to display XM lightning information.
BACK – Press to return to the previous level
softkey configuration.
PFD – Press to display the additional softkeys for
additional configurations to the PFD.
METRIC – Press to display the current and reference altitudes in meters, in addition to feet.
Pressing the metric softkey also changes the
barometric setting to hectopascals.
DFLTS – Press to reset default settings on the PFD.
BRG1 (bearing) – Press to cycle through the following information:
• NAV1 – Displays NAV1 waypoint frequency or
identifier and GPS-derived distance information in the BRG1 information window.
• GPS – Displays GPS waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance information in the BRG1
information window.
• OFF – Removes the BRG1 information
window.
360 HSI – Press to display the 360° compass rose.
ARC HSI – Press to display the 140° viewable arc.
BRG2 (bearing) – Press to cycle through the following information:
• NAV2 – Displays NAV2 waypoint frequency or
identifier and GPS-derived distance information
in the BRG2 information window.
• GPS – Displays GPS waypoint identifier and
GPS-derived distance information in the BRG2
information window.
• OFF – Removes the BRG2 information window.
STD BARO – Press to set the barometric pressure
to 29.92 inches of mercury (1013 hPa by
pressing the METRIC softkey).
BACK – Press to return to the previous level
softkeys.
CDI – Press to change navigation mode on the CDI
between GPS, NAV1 and NAV2.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-5
7/11/2005 4:28:09 PM
SOFTKEYS
OBS – Press to select OBS mode on the CDI when
navigating by GPS.
XPDR – Press to display the transponder mode selection softkeys.
STBY – Press to select standby mode.
ON – Press to select mode A.
ALT – Press to select altitude reporting mode.
VFR – Press to automatically squawk 1200 (only
in the U.S.A., refer to ICAO standards for VFR
codes in other countries).
CODE – Press to display transponder code selection
softkeys 0-7.
0 through 7 – Press numbers to enter code.
IDENT – Press to provide special aircraft
position identification to Air Traffic Control
(ATC).
BKSP – Press to remove numbers entered, one
at a time.
BACK – Press to return to the previous level
softkeys.
IDENT – Press to provide special aircraft position
identification to Air Traffic Control (ATC).
BACK – Press to return to the previous level
softkeys.
IDENT – Press to provide special aircraft position
identification to Air Traffic Control (ATC).
TMR/REF – Press to display the Timer/References
window.
NRST – Press to display the Nearest Airports
window.
ALERTS – Press to display the Alerts window.
2-6
PFD.indd 6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:09 PM
SOFTKEYS
INSET
PFD
OBS
IDENT
XPDR
CDI
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
Figure 2-6 PFD Softkey Flow Chart – 1
INSET
OFF
DCLTR
TRAFFIC
TOPO
TERRAIN
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
BACK
ALERTS
Press the BACK or OFF softkey
to return to the top level softkeys.
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
Figure 2-7 PFD Softkey Flow Chart – 2
PFD
METRIC
DFLTS
BRG1
360 HSI
Press the DFLTS softkey to change the PFD
metric values to standard.
ARC HSI
BRG2
STD BARO
BACK
ALERTS
Press the STD BARO or BACK softkeys
to return to the top level softkeys.
Figure 2-8 PFD Softkey Flow Chart – 3
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 7
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-7
7/11/2005 4:28:11 PM
SOFTKEYS
PFD
INSET
OBS
CDI
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
CODE
IDENT
BACK
ALERTS
NRST
CDI (NAV1)
CDI (NAV2)
GPS
ALT
ON
STBY
VFR
ALERTS
Press the BACK softkey
to return to the top level
softkeys.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Press the IDENT
softkey to return to
the top level softkeys.
Figure 2-9 PFD Softkey Flow Chart – 4
2-8
PFD.indd 8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:12 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
The Airspeed indicator displays airspeed on a rolling
number gauge, using a moving tape. The following information is also displayed:
•
•
•
•
Speed indication
Speed ranges
Airspeed trend vector
Vspeed references
True Airspeed Box
The True Airspeed box is located below the Airspeed
indicator and displays the true airspeed in knots.
Speed Indication
The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots, while minor
tick marks on the moving tape are indicated at intervals
of 5 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60
knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The actual airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer
remains black until reaching never-exceed speed (VNE), at
which point it turns red.
Speed Ranges
A color-coded (white, green, yellow, and red) speed
range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red range is
also present for low speed awareness. Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for speed criteria.
Airspeed Trend Vector
The vertical, magenta line extends up or down on the
airspeed scale located right of the color-coded speed range
strip. The end of the trend vector displays approximately
what the airspeed will be in 6 seconds if the current rate
of acceleration or deceleration is maintained. The trend
vector is absent if the speed remains constant and if any
data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a
system failure.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 9
Vspeed References
Vspeeds are set using the TMR/REF softkey. Glide, VR,
VX, and VY are shown on the References window. When
active (ON), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective
locations to the right of the airspeed scale (refer to the
Auxiliary Windows portion of this PFD section to set and
display Vspeeds).
Airspeed Trend
Vector
Actual
Airspeed
Vspeed
References
True Airspeed
Box
Speed Ranges
Figure 2-10 Airspeed Indicator
Figure 2-11 Red Pointer at VNE
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-9
7/11/2005 4:28:13 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Pitch Indication
The attitude information is displayed over a virtual
blue sky and a brown ground with a white horizon line.
The aircraft wing tips are represented by two yellow bars
on the horizon line. The yellow inverted “V” represents
the aircraft. The Attitude indicator displays the following
information:
Major pitch marks and numeric labels at 10, 20, 30,
40, 50, 60, 70 and 80 degrees are shown above and below the horizon line. Minor pitch marks at 5, 15 and 25
degrees above the horizon line and 5, 15, 25, 35 and 45
degrees below the horizon line are shown. The horizon
line is part of the pitch scale. Red extreme pitch warning
chevrons pointing toward the horizon are displayed starting at 50 degrees above and 30 degrees below the horizon
line (refer to the figures on the next page).
• Pitch indication
• Roll indication
• Slip/Skid indication
10
9
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Aircraft Wing Tips
7
Pitch Scale
8
Slip/Skid Indicator
9
Sky Representation
10
Roll Index
Figure 2-12 Attitude Indicator
2-10
PFD.indd 10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:15 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Roll Indication
Major tick marks at 30 and 60 degrees and minor tick
marks at 10, 20 and 45 degrees are shown to the left and
right on the roll scale. The inverted white triangle indicates 0 on the roll scale. Angle of bank is indicated by the
position of the roll pointer on the roll scale.
NOTE: Supplemental flight data such as the Inset
Map, Alerts and Annunciation window disappear
from the PFD when pitch is greater than +30˚
and less than -20˚, or when a 65˚ bank angle is
reached.
Figure 2-13 Attitude Indicator (Nose High)
Slip/Skid Indication
The Slip/Skid indicator resides beneath the roll pointer.
The indicator moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration.
A slip/skid is indicated by the location of the Slip/Skid indicator relative to the roll pointer. One Slip/Skid indicator
displacement is equal to one ball displacement when compared to a traditional Slip/Skid indicator.
Figure 2-14 Attitude Indicator (Nose Low)
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 11
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-11
7/11/2005 4:28:17 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays barometric altitude values in
feet on a rolling number gauge using a moving tape. The
Altimeter displays the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
To set the altitude reference bug:
1. Turn the ALT knobs to set the altitude reference
bug. The small ALT knob sets the hundreds and
the large ALT knob sets the thousands. This
altitude also appears in the altitude reference
box above the altimeter.
Altitude values
Altitude reference bug
Altitude trend vector
Altitude reference box
Barometric setting box
Metric display
Altitude Reference
Box
Altitude Reference Bug
Altitude Trend
Vector
Current Altitude
Barometric Setting
Box
Figure 2-15 Altimeter
Altitude Values
The numeric labels and major tick marks are shown
at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals
of 20 feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black
pointer.
2-12
PFD.indd 12
Altitude Reference Bug
The Altitude Reference bug is displayed at the reference
altitude or the edge of the tape (whichever is closer to the
current altitude) to provide increased altitude awareness.
Altitude Trend Vector
The vertical, magenta line extends up or down the altitude scale located left of the numeric labels. The end of
the trend vector displays approximately what the altitude
will be in 6 seconds if the current rate of vertical speed is
maintained. The trend vector is absent if altitude remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate it is not available due to a system failure.
Altitude Reference Box
The Altitude Reference box displays the reference altitude in feet. The metric value, when selected, is displayed
on top of the Altitude Reference box. The Altitude Reference box is not part of the autopilot altitude preselect
system and is used to aide the pilot in altitude control.
Barometric Setting Box
The Barometric Setting box displays the barometric
pressure in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa).
To select barometric pressure:
1.
Turn the large BARO knob to select the
desired setting.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:18 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Metric Display
Reference and current altitude can be displayed in meters. The barometric pressure may also be displayed in
hectopascals.
To display altitude in meters and barometric
pressure in hectopascals:
1.
2.
Press the PFD softkey to display the second
level softkeys.
Press the METRIC softkey to display altitude in
meters and barometric pressure in hectopascals.
Press the BACK softkey to return to the top level
softkeys.
Vertical Deviation/Glideslope Indicator
The Vertical Deviation/Glideslope indicator is a window on the left side of the Altimeter. The window appears
when an ILS is tuned in the active NAV field (and selected
on the Audio Panel). A green diamond appears and acts
as the vertical deviation indication, just like a glideslope
needle on a conventional indicator.
Marker Beacon Annunciations
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the
PFD to the left of the Altitude Reference Box. Outer marker reception is indicated by a blue light. Middle marker
reception is indicated by an amber light. Inner marker
reception is indicated by a white light (refer to the Audio
Panel section for more information).
Marker Beacon
Annunciation
Vertical
Deviation/Glideslope
Indicator
Figure 2-16 Altimeter (Metric)
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 13
Figure 2-17 Marker Beacon and Vertical Deviation
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-13
7/11/2005 4:28:19 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR
The Vertical Speed Indicator displays the aircraft vertical speed with numeric labels and tick marks at 1,000 ft
and 2,000 ft in each direction on the non-moving tape.
Minor tick marks are at intervals of 500 ft.
Vertical Speed Pointer
The Vertical Speed pointer displays the current vertical
speed and points to that speed on the non-moving tape.
If the rate of ascent is greater than 2,000 feet per minute,
the pointer appears at the top edge of the non-moving
tape and the number of feet per minute appears inside
the pointer. If the rate of descent is greater than 2,000
feet per minute, a negative sign is displayed in the pointer
(-2,000) for negative (down) vertical speed and the pointer appears at the bottom edge of the non-moving tape.
NOTE: Digits appear in the pointer when the
climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm.
2-14
PFD.indd 14
Vertical Speed
Pointer
Figure 2-18 Vertical Speed Indicator
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:20 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card with letters at the cardinal points and
numeric labels every 30 degrees. Major tick marks are
at 10-degree intervals and minor tick marks at 5 degree
intervals. The HSI is displayed in a heading-up orientation. The HSI compass can be displayed as a 360° rose or
a 140° arc by pressing the PFD softkey, followed by the
360 HSI, or the ARC HSI softkey. The HSI displays the
following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Heading indication
Turn Rate indicator
Course Deviation Indicator
Bearing pointers (360˚ HSI only)
Bearing information windows (360˚ HSI only)
Navigation source
14
1
12
2
11
3
10
4
9
8
5
7
6
1
2
360˚ HSI
The 360˚ HSI contains a course deviation indicator
(CDI), with a course pointer arrow, the TO/FROM arrow,
a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a
single line arrow (GPS, VOR1 and LOC1) or a double line
arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction
of the set course. The TO/FROM arrow rotates with the
course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID
is received.
13
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Turn Rate Indicator
Lateral Deviation Scale
Navigation Source
Aircraft Symbol
Course Deviation Indicator
Rotating Compass Rose
OBS Mode
TO/FROM Indicator
Heading Bug
Course Pointer
Flight Phase
Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector
Heading
Lubber Line
Figure 2-19 Horizontal Situation Indicator
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 15
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-15
7/11/2005 4:28:21 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Arc HSI
Heading Indication
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc contains a course pointer arrow, the
TO/FROM indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the
TO/FROM and sliding deviation indicators are one and
the same), and a deviation scale. Upon station passage,
the TO/FROM indicator flips and points to the tail of the
aircraft, just like the conventional TO/FROM flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI
can appear in two different ways:
• GPS, OBS, VOR – appears as a arrowhead
• Localizer – appears as a diamond
When the Arc HSI is displayed the BRG1 and BRG2
information windows are disabled.
A digital reading of the current magnetic heading appears on top of the HSI. A rotatable heading bug on the
compass rose or Arc marks the desired heading. The heading displayed on the HSI is always magnetic, even if the
NAV ANGLE is set to ‘TRUE’ in the Aux System Setup Page
on the MFD.
Figure 2-21 Current Heading
When the pilot selects a heading by rotating the HDG
knob, a digital reading appears for three (3) seconds in a
box to the left of the lubber line, next to the HSI.
NOTE: If the pilot makes a heading change
greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the
CDI switches to the opposite side of the deviation
scale and displays reverse sensing.
Figure 2-22 Selected Heading Box
When the pilot selects a course by rotating the CRS
knob, a digital reading appears for three (3) seconds in a
box to the right of the lubber line, next to the HSI.
Lateral Deviation
Scale
Course Deviation and
TO/FROM Indicator
Figure 2-20 Arc HSI
Figure 2-23 Selected Course Box
2-16
PFD.indd 16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:23 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Turn Rate Indicator
Course Deviation Indicator
The Turn Rate indicator resides directly above the rotating compass card. Each tick mark is at 9 (half standard
rate tick mark) and 18 (standard rate tick mark) degrees
to the left and right of the lubber line. A wide magenta
line displays the current turn rate, up to 24 degrees. A
magenta arrowhead appears at 25 degrees and disappears
at 24 degrees. This trend vector provides the pilot with
a 6 second prediction of what the heading will be at the
present turn rate.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or
right from the course pointer along a deviation scale to
display aircraft position relative to the course.
The CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical
CDI when coupled to a VOR or LOC. When coupled
to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a
GPS-derived distance (5.0, 1.0, or 0.3 nm). The CDI scale
automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (enroute 5.0 nm, terminal area
1.0 nm, or approach 0.3 nm). The desired GPS scale settings may be selected manually from the MFD (refer to the
Multi Function Display section).
Figure 2-24 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
Figure 2-25 Arc CDI and Compass Rose CDI
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 17
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-17
7/11/2005 4:28:24 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Bearing Pointers and Information Windows
There are 2 bearing pointers available and 1 or 2 can be
displayed on the HSI. Pressing the PFD softkey provides
access to the BRG1 and BRG2 softkeys. BRG1 pointer is
a single cyan (light blue) line with an open arrowhead at
the end. BRG2 pointer is a double cyan (light blue) line
with an open arrowhead at the end. The bearing pointers never override the CDI. When one or two bearing
pointers are displayed (but not necessarily visible if there
is no data available), a white ring is presented around the
center of the compass rose to visually separate the bearing
pointer(s) from the CDI.
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The BRG1 information window is displayed to the lower left of the HSI and
includes the bearing source (GPS and NAV1), a pointer
icon, and the frequency and GPS-derived great circle distance (NAV1 and GPS) to the bearing source. The BRG2
information window is displayed to the lower right of the
HSI and includes the bearing source (GPS and NAV2),
a pointer icon, and the frequency and GPS-derived great
circle distance (NAV2 and GPS) to the bearing source.
If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency. If an active waypoint
is not selected, the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI
and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window.
Bearing 2
Pointer
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 1
Information
Window
Bearing 2
Information
Window
Figure 2-26 HSI with Bearing Information
Distance to
Bearing Source
Waypoint
Identifier
Bearing
Source
Pointer
Icon
Figure 2-27 BRG1 Information Window
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an
ILS frequency, the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI
and the frequency is replaced with “ILS”. If the NAV radio
is not receiving the tuned VOR station, the bearing pointer
is removed from the HSI and the frequency displayed in the
information window is replaced with “NO DATA”.
When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source,
the frequency is replaced by the station identifier when
the station is within range.
2-18
PFD.indd 18
Distance to
Bearing Source
Waypoint
Frequency
Pointer
Icon
Bearing
Source
Figure 2-28 BRG2 Information Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:26 PM
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Source
The HSI can display two sources of navigation: GPS
or NAV (VOR, localizer, and glideslope). In GPS mode,
the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically. Enabling
OBS mode suspends auto sequencing of waypoints, but
retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the navigation
reference even after passing the waypoint. When OBS is
disabled, the GPS returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints. OBS mode also allows
the pilot to set the desired course TO/FROM a waypoint.
To enable/disable OBS mode while navigating
with GPS:
1.
Press the OBS softkey to select OBS Mode.
2.
Turn the small CRS knob to select the desired
course TO/FROM the waypoint.
3.
Press the OBS softkey again to return to normal
operation.
Color indicates the current navigation source: magenta
(for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC). As the pilot crosses the MAP, “SUSP” appears on the HSI in place of “OBS”
and the OBS softkey (now) reads “SUSP”, indicating that
automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. A yellow ‘INTEG’ and ‘WARN’ may appear
on the HSI when the following occurs:
• INTEG – RAIM is not available.
• WARN – GPS detects a position error.
To change between navigation sources:
1.
2.
3.
Press the CDI softkey to change from GPS to
VOR1 or LOC1. This places the cyan tuning box
over the NAV1 standby frequency in the upper
left corner of the PFD.
Press the CDI softkey again to change from
VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places
the cyan tuning box over the NAV2 standby
frequency.
Press the CDI softkey a third time to return to
GPS.
Figure 2-29 GPS INTEG, GPS SUSP, LOC1 and VOR2
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 19
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-19
7/11/2005 4:28:28 PM
CNS
2.5 COMMUNICATION, NAVIGATION &
SURVEILLANCE
COMMUNICATION FREQUENCY WINDOW
The Communication Frequency window provides the
control and display of dual VHF Radio Communication
Transceivers (COM1 and COM2). The Communication
Frequency window displays the following information:
Active COM
Frequency Field
Selected COM
Radio
(Green)
COM Radios
Frequency
Toggle Arrow
• COM1 and COM2 active and standby frequencies
• Color-coded indication of the active COM transceiver
Operating procedures for the Communication Frequency
window are located in the NAV/COM section.
Frequency
Tuning Box
Standby COM
Frequency Field
Figure 2-30 Communication Frequency Window
NAVIGATION FREQUENCY WINDOW
The Navigation Frequency window provides the control and display of dual VOR/ILS receivers (NAV1 and
NAV2). The Navigation Frequency window displays the
following information:
• NAV1 and NAV2 active and standby frequencies
• NAV1 and NAV2 identifier, if the active NAV1 or
NAV2 frequency is a valid, identified frequency
• Color-coded indication of the active NAV receiver
Frequency
Tuning Box
Active NAV
Frequency Field
Selected NAV
Receiver
(Green)
NAV Receivers
Standby NAV
Frequency Field
Frequency
Toggle Arrow
Figure 2-31 Navigation Frequency Window
Operating procedures for the Navigation Frequency
window are located in the NAV/COM section.
2-20
PFD.indd 20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:30 PM
CNS
NAVIGATION STATUS BAR
The Navigation Status bar resides at the top of the PFD
and displays valuable information while flying a route.
The following information is displayed:
•
•
•
•
•
The next waypoint in the active flight plan
Distance to the next waypoint (DIS)
Desired track to the next waypoint (DTK)
Current track angle (TRK)
GPS Navigation Annunciations
NOTE: The fields in the PFD Navigation Status
bar cannot be changed.
Next Waypoint
Distance to
Next Waypoint
Desired Track
to
Next Waypoint
Current Track
Figure 2-32 Navigation Status Bar
Figure 2-33 Navigation Status Bar Message
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 21
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-21
7/11/2005 4:28:31 PM
CNS
TRANSPONDER STATUS BAR
The Transponder Status bar displays the transponder
code, reply symbol, and mode of operation. TIS (Traffic
Information System) surveillance data up-linked by the
Air Traffic Control (ATC) radar through the GTX 33 Mode
S Transponder appears on the Inset Map (PFD) and on
the Navigation and Traffic Map Pages on the MFD (refer
to the Multi Function Display section). If the transponder
is configured with Automated Airborne Determination,
normal operation begins when liftoff is sensed. When the
aircraft is on the ground, the window automatically displays “GND”. The transponder does not respond to ATCRBS interrogations when GND is annunciated. If a delay
time is set in Configuration Mode, the transponder waits
a specified length of time after landing before changing to
GND mode.
Transponder Operation
Pressing the XPDR softkey displays the second-level
softkeys:
• STBY – Selects standby mode. When in standby
mode, the transponder does not reply to any
interrogations.
• ON – Selects Mode A. In this mode, the transponder replies to interrogations, as indicated by the
Reply Symbol (R). Replies do not include altitude
information.
• ALT – Selects Mode C. In ALT mode, the transponder replies to identification and altitude interrogations as indicated by the Reply Symbol (R). Replies
to altitude interrogations include the standard
pressure altitude received from an external altitude
source (not adjusted for barometric pressure). The
ALT mode may be selected in aircraft not equipped
with an altitude encoder; however, in this case, the
reply signal only replies to mode A interrogations.
The transponder also responds to interrogations
from TCAS-equipped aircraft.
2-22
PFD.indd 22
• VFR – Sets the transponder code to the pre-programmed VFR code selected in Configuration
Mode (this is set to 1200 at the factory in the
U.S.A. only; refer to ICAO standards for VFR
codes in other countries).
• CODE – Displays the transponder code selection
softkeys, which include the digits 0-7 and BKSP.
• IDENT – Pressing the IDENT softkey activates
the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for
18 seconds, identifying the transponder return on
the ATC screen.
Transponder Code Selection
Transponder code selection is performed with eight
softkeys (0-7) providing 4,096 active identification codes.
Pushing one of these softkeys begins the code selection
sequence. The new code is activated five (5) seconds after the fourth digit is entered. Pressing the BKSP softkey
removes one digit at a time until the status bar is empty
(refer to the Transponder section).
Figure 2-34 Transponder Status Bar
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:32 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
2.6 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE BOX
The G1000 system displays Traffic Information Service
(TIS) traffic on the Inset Map (PFD) and the Navigation
Map Page (MFD). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically occurs:
The outside air temperature (OAT) is displayed in °C
with the “OAT” label. °F can be displayed using the AUX
System Setup Page on the MFD (refer to the Multi Function Display section).
Figure 2-34 Outside Air Temperature Box
SYSTEM TIME BOX
The System Time box displays the local time. Time
and date are obtained from the satellites and cannot be
changed. The pilot may select the desired time format
and offset. There are 3 time formats available: Local
12-hr, Local 24-hr and Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC). The Time Offset (Time Zone) corresponds to the
number of hours plus or minus UTC (refer to the Multi
Function Display section).
• The Inset Map is enabled and displays the traffic.
• A single “TRAFFIC” voice message is heard.
• A flashing “TRAFFIC” annunciation appears to the
top left of the Attitude indicator. This alert flashes
with black text on yellow background for five (5)
seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are
detected in the area.
If a second TA appears, or if the number of TAs displayed decreases and then increases, a new audio alert is
heard and a new visual alert is displayed.
NOTE: Refer to the Multi Function Display section
and the Appendix for more details about Traffic
Information Service (TIS).
Figure 2-36 Traffic Annunciation
Figure 2-35 System Time Box
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 23
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-23
7/11/2005 4:28:33 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
INSET MAP
The Inset Map is a smaller version of the Navigation
Map Page on the MFD. It appears in the lower left corner
of the PFD and is displayed by pressing the INSET softkey. The map disappears from the PFD each time pitch is
greater than +30° and less than –20°, or when a 65° bank
angle is reached. The direct-to function is not available
from the Inset Map. The fuel reserve rings are enabled
and disabled from the MFD only. The Inset Map displays
the following information:
• Moving map with orientation references
– North Up
– Track Up
– DTK Up
– HDG Up
• Zoom range legend
• Declutter levels (3)
• Aircraft icon
• Traffic data
• Topo data
• Terrain data
• Weather information (optional)
• Enabled map features
• Active navigation route
• Track vector
• Fuel ring (reserve)
The map orientation is always the same as that of the
Navigation Map Page on the MFD. Map orientation and
other map features are enabled on the MFD (refer to the
Multi Function Display section).
NOTE: Refer to the Multi Function Display section for a detailed explanation of the declutter
levels.
2-24
PFD.indd 24
The following Inset Map operations can be performed
and are independent of the MFD:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change the zoom range
Change the declutter level
Enable/disable traffic data
Enable/disable topo data
Enable/disable terrain data
Enable/disable weather information (optional)
Pan Map
1
9
2
8
3
7
6
4
5
1
Wind Vector
2
NAV Compass Range
3
NAV Compass
4
Traffic Icon and Scale
5
Map Range
6
Terrain Icon
7
Active Navigation Route
8
Track Vector
9
Map Orientation
Figure 2-37 Inset Map
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:36 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
To change the zoom range:
1. Turn the joystick clockwise to increase or
counterclockwise to decrease the range. Zoom
ranges from 500 feet to 2,000 nautical miles.
To change the declutter level:
1. Press the INSET softkey. Press the DCLTR softkey to remove background map details until
the desired amount of detail is depicted. The
declutter level appears above the softkey (i.e.
DCLTR-1). Refer to the Multi Function Display
section for more detail.
To enable/disable traffic data:
1. Press the INSET softkey. Press the TRAFFIC
softkey to display Traffic Information Service
(TIS) traffic. Traffic symbology appears next to
the aircraft icon and at the bottom right corner
of the map.
2. Press the TRAFFIC softkey again to remove data
from the map.
TIS displays traffic within seven nautical miles from
3,000 ft below to 3,500 ft above the requesting aircraft
and includes location, direction, altitude and climb/descent information. If a second TA appears or if the number of TAs displayed decreases and then increases, a new
audio and visual alert is heard and displayed.
NOTE: Refer to the Multi Function Display section
and the Appendix for more details about Traffic
Information Service (TIS).
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 25
To enable/disable topo data:
1. Press the INSET softkey. Press the TOPO softkey to display topographic land colors, which
represent the rise and fall of land elevation.
2. Press the TOPO softkey again to remove topo
data from the map.
When topo data is removed from the display, all cartographic data is automatically removed and the Jeppesen
Nav Data is presented on a black background.
To enable/disable terrain data:
1. Press the INSET softkey. Press the TERRAIN
softkey to display color-coded terrain tiles, which
are based upon the aircraft current altitude. A
mountain icon appears above the zoom range
at the lower right corner of the map, showing
that terrain is selected.
• Red (warning) – Land elevation is within 100
ft of the aircraft current altitude or above.
• Yellow (caution) – Land elevation is greater
than 100 ft to 1,000 ft below aircraft altitude.
• Black – Land elevation greater than 1,000 ft
below aircraft altitude.
2. Press the TERRAIN softkey again to remove the
terrain data from the map.
Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude
is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
NOTE: Refer to the Multi Function Display section
and the Appendix for more details about terrain
data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-25
7/11/2005 4:28:36 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
To enable/disable Stormscope (optional),
NEXRAD (optional), or XM lightning
(optional) data:
1. Press the INSET softkey. Press the STRMSCP
(optional), NEXRAD (optional), or XM LTNG
(optional) softkey to display weather information.
2. Press the STRMSCP, NEXRAD, or XM LTNG softkey again to remove the weather information
from the map.
NOTE: Refer to the Optional Equipment section
for more details about the weather options.
To pan the map:
NOTE: The joystick on the PFD operates independently of the one on the MFD.
1.
2.
3.
PFD.indd 26
Much of the G1000 operation is accomplished using
a menu interface. The G1000 has a bezel-mounted dedicated MENU key that, when pressed, displays a contextsensitive list of options. This option list allows the pilot to
access additional features or make setting changes which
specifically relate to the currently displayed window.
There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional submenus that are in turn used
to view, edit, select and review options.
Once the Page Menu window is displayed, turn the
FMS knob to scroll through a list of available options (a
scroll bar always appears to the right of the window when
the option list is longer than the window) and press the
ENT key to select the desired option. The CLR key may
be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS knob also removes the displayed
menu. Pressing the softkeys does not display a menu or
submenu.
Push in the joystick to display the panning pointer.
This allows the pilot to move the map beyond its
current limits without adjusting the range.
Push in and move the joystick to pan the map
in the general direction of the desired location.
When the pointer is placed on an object, the name
of the object is highlighted for approximately four Figure 2-38 Page Menu – No Options with NRST Window Displayed
(4) seconds (even if the name was not originally
displayed on the map). This feature applies to
everything displayed on the map except for route
lines.
Push in the joystick again to cancel the panning
function and return to the present position on
the map.
NOTE: The airspace boundary stays highlighted
for approximately four (4) seconds before returning to normal shading.
2-26
WORKING WITH MENUS
Figure 2-39 Page Menu – Options with FPL Window Displayed
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:38 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
AUXILIARY WINDOW KEYS
AUXILIARY WINDOWS
The main keys which are used in association with the
PFD Auxiliary window operation are listed below:
The lower right area of the PFD is a shared area that, at
any one time, can present the following windows:
• DIRECT-TO – Activates the direct-to function
and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected
destination (specified by identifier, chosen from
the active route).
• FPL – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan or accessing stored flight plans.
• CLR – Erases information, cancels an entry, or
removes page menus.
• MENU – Displays a context-sensitive list of
options. This option list allows the user to access
additional features or make setting changes which
relate to certain pages.
• PROC – Selects approaches, departures and
arrivals for the flight plan. When using a flight
plan, available procedures for the departure
and/or arrival airport are offered automatically. If
a flight plan is not used, the desired airport, then
the desired procedure may be selected. This key
selects IFR departure procedures (SIDs), arrival
procedures (STARs) and approach procedures
(SIAPs) from the database and loads them into the
active flight plan.
• ENT – Accepts a menu selection or data entry.
This key is used to approve an operation or
complete data entry. It is also used to confirm
information.
•
•
•
•
•
TIMER/REFERENCES
NEAREST
DIRECT-TO
FLIGHT PLAN
PROCEDURES
Timer/References Window
The Timer/References window is enabled and disabled
by pressing the TMR/REF softkey. The following information can be set using the Timer/References window:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Generic timer
Timer direction (count UP or DOWN)
START, STOP, or RESET
Best glide speed reference
Best glide speed bug (ON, OFF)
Rotation speed reference (VR)
VR bug (ON, OFF)
Best angle-of-climb speed reference (VX)
VX bug (ON, OFF)
Best rate-of-climb speed reference (VY)
VY bug (ON, OFF)
Flight ID
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for limitations.
NOTE: Pressing the softkeys does not display a
menu or submenu.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 27
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-27
7/11/2005 4:28:38 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Generic Timer
The Generic Timer contains hours, minutes and seconds fields, timer direction (count UP or DOWN), and
timer status START, STOP, or RESET.
To change the Generic Timer:
1.
Press the TMR/REF softkey, then turn the large
FMS knob to select the time field (hh/mm/ss).
Turn the FMS knobs to set the desired time,
then press the ENT key. The UP/DOWN field is
now highlighted.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the UP/
DOWN window. Turn the FMS knob to select
‘UP’ or ‘DOWN’, then press the ENT key.
‘START?’ is now highlighted.
3.
Press the ENT key to START, STOP, or RESET the
timer (if the timer is counting DOWN, it must
be reset manually). Press the CLR key or the
TMR/REF softkey to remove the window.
Figure 2-40 Timer Status Prompts
Vspeeds and Vspeed Bug Status
The Vspeeds can be changed and the Vspeed bugs can
be turned ON or OFF from the Timer/References window.
By default, all Vspeed values are reset and all Vspeed bugs
are turned OFF when power is cycled.
Figure 2-41 Timer/References Window
To change Vspeeds and turn the Vspeed
bug ON or OFF:
1. Press the TMR/REF softkey, then turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the field of the Vspeed
to be changed.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
speed and press the ENT key (when a speed has
been changed, an asterisk appears next to the
speed). The ON/OFF field is now highlighted.
3. To change each setting individually, turn the
small FMS knob in the direction of the green
arrowhead.
4. All Vspeed references can be changed simultaneously by pressing the MENU key and select
‘All References ON’ or ‘All References OFF’, then
press the ENT key.
To restore all defaults:
1. From the Timer/References window, press the
MENU key, then turn the FMS knob to highlight
‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT key. Press
the TMR/REF softkey to remove the window.
2-28
PFD.indd 28
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:40 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Flight ID
Nearest Airports Window
Flight status automatic reporting of aircraft identification (ID) is transmitted from the GTX 33 to the ground
stations and other aircraft.
The flight ID is set to fixed (“SAME AS TAIL” and
“CONFIG ENTRY”), or variable (“PFD ENTRY”) at the time
of installation. The two fixed selections do not require any
action from the pilot. The variable (“PFD ENTRY”) flight ID
requires the pilot to enter the flight ID on the Timer/References window each time the G1000 is powered on.
NOTE: If the G1000 is set to variable (“PFD
ENTRY”) and the flight ID entry field on the
Timer/References window is not visible, the pilot
should contact a Garmin-authorized Service
Center.
The Nearest Airports window is enabled and disabled
by pressing the NRST softkey. The Nearest Airports window displays the 25 nearest airports with the following
information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Identifier
Airport symbol
Bearing to
Distance from
Best approach available
Primary communication frequency
Length of longest hard surface runway (or soft
surface, if no hard surface runway exists)
NOTE: From the Nearest Airports window, information for a selected airport can be viewed, the
active primary communication frequency can
be selected, and direct-to navigation can be
activated.
To enter or change the Flight ID:
1.
Press the TMR/REF softkey, then turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the flight ID field.
2.
Turn the FMS knobs to enter the desired flight
ID. Press the ENT key to update the flight ID.
Airport Symbol
Identifier
Figure 2-42 Flight ID Field
Primary
COM
Frequency
Best
Approach
Available
Distance
Runway
Length
Bearing
To
Figure 2-43 Nearest Airports Window
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 29
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-29
7/11/2005 4:28:42 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
To view information about an airport:
1. Press the NRST softkey to display a list of the
Nearest Airports.
2. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired airport
and press the ENT key.
3. The airport information is displayed with
‘BACK’ highlighted at the bottom of the
window. When finished viewing the airport
information, press the ENT key to return to the
nearest airports list.
To activate a Direct-to from the Airport
Information window:
1. From the Airport Information window, press
the Direct-to key.
2. Press the ENT key twice.
To select a COM frequency:
1. From the Nearest Airports window, turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the desired frequency, then press the ENT key. The frequency
is placed in the tuning box.
Direct-to Window
The Direct-to window is enabled and disabled by
pressing the Direct-to key. The currently selected waypoint displays the following information:
Figure 2-44 Airport Information Window
To select an airport from the Airport Information window by the airport identifier,
location, and name fields:
1. From the Nearest Airport window, turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the desired field.
2. Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired location, then press the ENT key.
3. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘BACK’,
then press the ENT key.
To activate a Direct-to from the Nearest
Airports window:
1. From the Nearest Airports window, turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the desired airport,
then press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to
window appears. Press the ENT key twice.
2-30
PFD.indd 30
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Identifier
Waypoint symbol
Waypoint location
Facility name
Flight plan waypoint list
Nearest waypoint List
Bearing to waypoint
Distance from waypoint
Latitude/longitude
Course to selected waypoint
Direct-to Navigation
Selection of a waypoint for Direct-to navigation may be
done in several ways:
• By specifying the identifier, waypoint location, or
facility name.
• By selecting from a list of waypoints in the active
flight plan.
• By selecting from a list of the 25 nearest airports.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:43 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
To select a Direct-to by identifier:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the FMS knobs
to select the desired waypoint identifier. Press
the ENT key to confirm the selection. Press the
ENT key again to activate the direct-to.
Figure 2-45 Direct-to Window
NOTE: When entering an all-letter/alphabetical
airport identifier (only in the U.S.A.), the pilot
must precede it with the letter “K” (KMCI). If the
airport identifier is alphanumeric, simply enter
the three-digit identifier (51K). The full ICAO
identifier must be entered for all waypoints.
To select a Direct-to by city or facility name:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the large FMS
knob to highlight the city (line to the right of
the identifier), or the facility (line directly below
the identifier) field.
2. Turn the FMS knobs to enter the city (line to the
right of the identifier field), or the facility (line
directly below the identifier field). Once the
desired city or facility name is displayed, press
the ENT key to confirm the selection. Press the
ENT key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 31
To select a Direct-to from a list of waypoints in an active flight plan:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the large FMS
knob to highlight the FPL field.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to display a selection
window showing all waypoints in the active
flight plan.
3. Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list and
highlight the desired waypoint, then press the
ENT key. Press the ENT key again to activate the
direct-to.
To select a Direct-to from the Nearest Airports list:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the large FMS
knob to highlight the NRST field.
2. Turn the small FMS knob to display a selection
window showing the 25 nearest airports.
3. Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list
and highlight the desired airport, then press
the ENT key. Press the ENT key again to activate
the direct-to.
To select a specific course to a waypoint:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then turn the FMS knobs
to select the desired destination waypoint, then
press the ENT key.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘CRS’
field. Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired
course and press the ENT key.
3. Press the ENT key to activate the direct-to using
the selected course to the destination.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-31
7/11/2005 4:28:44 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
To cancel a Direct-to:
1. Press the Direct-to key, then press the MENU
key to display the Direct-to Options Menu.
2. Press the ENT key to cancel direct-to navigation.
If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
flight plan navigation along the closest leg.
Figure 2-46 Cancel Direct-To NAV
Flight Plan Window
The Flight Plan window is enabled and disabled by
pressing the FPL key. Flight plans can be created, edited
and activated from the PFD. The G1000 allows for the
creation of up to 99 flight plans, with up to 31 waypoints
in each flight plan.
The following options are available for the Flight Plan
window:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Activate Leg
Store Flight Plan
Invert Flight Plan
Delete Flight Plan
Load Departure
Load Arrival
Load Approach
Remove Departure
Remove Arrival
Remove Approach
Closest Point of FPL
Change Fields
Restore Defaults
The following options are not available for the Flight
Plan window from the PFD:
• Load communication frequency
• Select from a stored flight plan list
The Flight Plan window on the PFD displays the following information:
• Flight plan title
• Indication of the active leg (magenta line and arrow)
• List of waypoints in the flight plan, including the
airport identifiers
• Leg distance
• Leg desired track
2-32
PFD.indd 32
Figure 2-47 Flight Plan Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:46 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Create New Flight Plan
New flight plans can be created on the PFD and MFD.
The system can store up to 99 flight plans with up to 31
waypoints each.
To create a new flight plan:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the FPL key, then press the FMS knob to
activate the cursor. The waypoint field is now
highlighted.
Turn the small FMS knob to activate the Waypoint Information window.
Turn the FMS knobs to enter the identifier of
the airport/waypoint and press the ENT key.
The system returns to the Flight Plan window
with the cursor flashing on the next waypoint
field.
Repeat step 3 above to enter the identifier for
each additional waypoint.
NOTE: An ‘active’ flight plan is created as soon as
the first two waypoints are entered on the Active
Flight Plan Page.
Activate Leg
Activate leg selects the highlighted leg as the “active
leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used for navigation guidance).
To activate a flight plan along a specific
leg:
1.
From the active Flight Plan window, press
the FMS knob to active the cursor and turn
the large FMS knob to highlight the desired
destination waypoint.
2.
Press the MENU key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’ and
press the ENT key. A confirmation window is
displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted, press
the ENT key.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 33
Figure 2-48 Activate Leg Confirmation Window
Store Flight Plan
The active flight plan is erased either when the unit is
turned off, or when another flight plan is activated. When
storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from
the current database to define the waypoints. If the navigation database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not
been modified. If an approach, a departure, or an arrival
procedure is no longer available, the flight plan becomes
locked until the procedure is deleted from the flight plan,
or until the correct navigation database is installed.
To store a flight plan:
1. From the Flight Plan window, once all the
waypoints have been entered, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to select ‘Store Flight Plan’,
then press the ENT key. The Store Flight Plan
window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted.
Press the ENT key to store the flight plan.
3. To cancel, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
Figure 2-49 Page Options Menu
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-33
7/11/2005 4:28:48 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Invert Flight Plan
Invert Flight Plan reverses the active flight plan. After
traveling along a flight plan, the pilot may wish to reverse
the route for navigation back to the original departure
point.
To activate an existing flight plan in
reverse:
1.
From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Invert Flight
Plan’, then press the ENT key. The flight plan
is now reversed and activated.
Figure 2-50 Invert Flight Plan Confirmation Window
Delete Flight Plan
The entire flight plan or selected waypoints within the
flight plan may be deleted.
To delete the entire flight plan:
1. From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete Flight
Plan’, then press the ENT key. The ‘Delete All
Waypoints in Flight Plan’ message is displayed
with ‘OK’ highlighted. Press the ENT key to
delete all waypoints in the flight plan.
3. To cancel, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
To delete selected waypoints in the flight
plan:
1. From the Flight Plan window, turn the large
FMS knob to select the desired waypoint.
2. Press the CLR key. The ‘Remove Waypoint
Name’ window is displayed with ‘OK’ highlighted. Press the ENT key to delete the
selected waypoint.
3. To cancel, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
Figure 2-51 Delete Flight Plan Confirmation Window
2-34
PFD.indd 34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:49 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Load Departure
Load Departure allows the pilot to select a published
standard instrument departure (SID) for the departure
airport, or replace the current departure with a new selection. When using a direct-to, the G1000 uses the nearest
airport as a reference when displaying available departures.
NOTE: The PROC key can also be used to load a
departure, an approach, or an arrival.
To select a departure for the departure
airport:
1. From the Flight Plan window , press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Load Departure’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available departures for the
departure airport.
3. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired departure, then press the ENT key.
NOTE: This runway window is not displayed for
every departure. ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway
field, indicating that the departure procedure
applies to all runways. For airports with parallel
runways, ‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway
designation to indicate that the departure procedure applies to both runways.
4.
5.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 35
A window may appear listing runways for the
departure. Turn the FMS knob to select the
desired runway, then press the ENT key. The
transition window is now displayed.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition waypoint, then press the ENT key. With
‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
Figure 2-52 Departure
Figure 2-53 Departure Runway
Figure 2-54 Departure Transition
Figure 2-55 Select Departure Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-35
7/11/2005 4:28:54 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Load Arrival
Load Arrival allows the pilot to select a published standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport, or replace a current arrival with a new selection.
NOTE: The PROC key can also be used to load a
departure, an approach, or an arrival.
To select an arrival for a direct-to or flight
plan destination airport:
1. From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Load Arrival’,
then press the ENT key. A window appears
listing the available arrivals for the destination
airport.
3. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired arrival,
then press the ENT key. A window appears
listing the available transitions for the arrival.
4. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition waypoint, then press the ENT key.
NOTE: This runway window is not displayed for
every arrival. ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway
field, indicating that the arrival procedure applies
to all runways. For airports with parallel runways,
‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate that the arrival procedure applies
to both runways.
5.
A window may appear listing runways for the
arrival. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
runway, then press the ENT key. With ‘LOAD?’
highlighted, press the ENT key.
When adding an arrival to an active flight plan, the pilot may need to remove a duplicate destination waypoint
from the flight plan list.
2-36
PFD.indd 36
Load Approach
Load Approach allows the pilot to select a published
instrument approach for the destination airport, or replace the current approach with a new selection.
To select an approach for a direct-to or
flight plan destination airport:
1. From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2. Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Load Approach’,
then press the ENT key. A window appears listing the available approaches for the destination airport.
3. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
approach, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available transitions for the
approach.
NOTE: The ‘Vectors’ option assumes that the pilot
will receive vectors from ATC to the final course
segment of the approach.
4.
5.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition or vectors, then press the ENT key. With
‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key to load
the approach.
To activate the approach, turn the large FMS
knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’, then press the
ENT key.
‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without
immediately using the approach for navigation guidance.
This allows the pilot to continue navigating the original
flight plan until cleared for the approach, but keeps the
approach available for quick activation when needed.
‘ACTIVATE’ adds the approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:54 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Remove Departure
Remove Departure deletes the current standard instrument departure (SID) from the active flight plan.
Remove Arrival
Remove Arrival deletes the current standard terminal
arrival route (STAR) from the active flight plan.
Closest Point of FPL
Closest Point of FPL calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes from a reference
waypoint. It may also be used to create a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference waypoint.
Remove Approach
Remove Approach deletes the currently selected approach from the active flight plan.
To remove a departure, an arrival, or an
approach from a direct-to or active flight
plan:
1.
From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Remove Departure’, ‘Remove Arrival’, or ‘Remove Approach’,
then press the ENT key. A confirmation window
appears listing the procedure that is about to
be removed, with ‘OK’ highlighted. Press the
ENT key to remove the procedure.
3.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 37
Figure 2-56 Closest Point of FPL Window
To determine the closest point along the
active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1.
From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Closest Point
of FPL’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears with the reference waypoint field
highlighted.
3.
Turn the FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the
reference waypoint, then press the ENT key. The
G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and distance
(DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan,
from the selected reference waypoint.
4.
To create a user waypoint at this location and
add it to the flight plan, press the ENT key. The
name for the new user waypoint is derived from
the identifier or the reference waypoint.
To cancel, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’, then press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-37
7/11/2005 4:28:55 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Change Fields
Restore Defaults
Change Fields allows the pilot to select the desired
data items to be displayed on the Flight Plan window. The
user-selectable data fields can be changed to display the
following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cumulative Distance (CUM)
Distance (DIS)
Desired Track (DTK)
Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Restore Defaults returns all data fields to the factory
default settings.
To restore factory default settings for data
fields on the Flight Plan window:
1.
From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Restore
Defaults’, then press the ENT key.
Procedures Window
The Procedures window is enabled and disabled by
pressing the PROC key. The following options are available from the Procedures window:
Figure 2-57 Change Fields on Flight Plan
•
•
•
•
•
Activate Vector-To-Final
Activate Approach
Select Approach
Select Arrival
Select Departure
To change a data field on the Flight Plan
window:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2-38
PFD.indd 38
From the Flight Plan window, press the MENU
key to display the page menu options.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Change Fields’,
then press the ENT key. The cursor flashes on
one of the data fields.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the field
to be changed.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
with optional data items.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired data
item, then press the ENT key. Press the small
FMS knob to remove the cursor.
Figure 2-58 Procedures Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:28:57 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Select Approach
Select Approach allows the pilot to choose a published
instrument approach for the destination airport, or replace
the current approach with a new selection.
NOTE: The pilot may also select an approach, an
arrival and a departure by pressing the MENU
key.
‘LOAD’ adds the approach to the flight plan without
immediately using the approach for navigation guidance.
This allows the pilot to continue navigating the original
flight plan until cleared for the approach, but keeps the
approach available for quick activation when needed.
‘ACTIVATE’ adds the approach to the flight plan and begins navigating the approach course.
To select an approach for a direct-to or
flight plan destination airport:
1.
From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Select
Approach’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available approaches for
the destination airport.
3.
Figure 2-59 Approach
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
approach, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available transitions for the
approach.
NOTE: The ‘Vectors’ option assumes that the pilot
will receive vectors from ATC to the final course
segment of the approach.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition or vectors, then press the ENT key. With
‘LOAD?’ highlighted, press the ENT key to load
the approach.
5.
To activate the approach, turn the large FMS
knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE?’, then press the
ENT key.
Figure 2-60 Approach Transition
Figure 2-61 Select Approach Window
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 39
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-39
7/11/2005 4:29:01 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Select Arrival
Select Arrival allows the pilot to choose a published
standard terminal arrival route (STAR) for the destination
airport, or replace a current arrival with a new selection.
NOTE: The pilot may also select an approach, an
arrival and a departure by pressing the MENU
key.
To select an arrival for a direct-to or flight
plan destination airport:
1. From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Select
Arrival’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available arrivals for the
destination airport.
3. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired arrival,
then press the ENT key. A window appears
listing the available transitions for the arrival.
4. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition, then press the ENT key.
NOTE: This runway window is not displayed for
every arrival. ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway
field, indicating that the arrival procedure applies
to all runways. For airports with parallel runways,
‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway designation to indicate that the arrival procedure applies
to both runways.
5.
PFD.indd 40
Figure 2-63 Arrival Transition
Figure 2-64 Arrival Runway
A window may appear listing runways for the
arrival. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
runway, then press the ENT key. With ‘LOAD?’
highlighted, press the ENT key.
When adding an arrival to an active flight plan, the pilot may need to remove a duplicate destination waypoint
from the flight plan list.
2-40
Figure 2-62 Arrival
Figure 2-65 Select Arrival Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:29:06 PM
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
Select Departure
Select Departure allows the pilot to choose a published
standard instrument departure (SID) for the departure airport, or replace the current departure with a new selection.
When using a direct-to, the G1000 uses the nearest airport
as a reference when displaying available departures.
NOTE: The pilot may also select an approach, an
arrival and a departure by pressing the MENU
key.
To select a departure for the departure
airport:
1. From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Select
Departure’, then press the ENT key. A window
appears listing the available departures for the
departure airport.
3. Turn the FMS knob to select the desired departure, then press the ENT key.
NOTE: This runway window is not displayed for
every departure. ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway
field, indicating that the departure procedure
applies to all runways. For airports with parallel
runways, ‘B’ may appear at the end of the runway
designation to indicate that the departure procedure applies to both runways.
4.
5.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 41
Activate Approach
Activate Approach allows the pilot to activate the approach when ready to begin navigating the approach
course (cleared for the approach).
To activate the approach for a direct-to or
flight plan destination airport:
1.
From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Activate
Approach’, then press the ENT key.
Activate Vector-To-Final
Activate Vector-To-Final allows the pilot to activate the
final course segment of the approach. This option assumes
that the pilot will receive vectors from ATC to the final approach fix (FAF) and provides guidance to intercept the
final course, before reaching the FAF.
To activate the approach with vectors to
final:
1.
From an active flight plan, press the PROC key
to display the Procedures options window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Activate VectorTo-Final’, then press the ENT key.
A window may appear listing runways for the
departure. Turn the FMS knob to select the
desired runway, then press the ENT key. The
transition window is now displayed.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition, then press the ENT key. With ‘LOAD?’
highlighted, press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-41
7/11/2005 4:29:06 PM
REVERSIONARY MODE
2.7 REVERSIONARY MODE
The PFD is designed to enter a reversionary (backup)
mode based on automatic fault monitoring and detection internal switching. Reversionary mode can also be
activated by manually pressing a dedicated DISPLAY
BACKUP button at the bottom of the Audio Panel (refer
to Audio Panel section). In reversionary mode, the CDUs
are re-configured to present the PFD symbology together
with the engine parameters (engine parameters are incorporated on the left side of the display).
Transition for the pilot is straightforward since PFD parameters are presented in the same format as that prior to
the re-configuration. In the event of a display failure, the
pilot loses one NAV, one COM and GPS as listed below:
• PFD failure – NAV1, COM1 and GPS1 are lost.
• MFD failure – NAV2, COM2 and GPS2 are lost.
NOTE: Refer to the System Overview section for
additional information regarding reversionary
mode.
Figure 2-66 PFD Reversionary Mode
2-42
PFD.indd 42
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:29:12 PM
WARNINGS,
CAUTIONS & ALERTS
2.8 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS & ALERTS
ALERTS WINDOW
Alerts appear in the Alerts window in the lower right
corner of the PFD. The term “Alerts” is an all encompassing term that includes advisories, cautions and warnings.
This window allows system alerts to be displayed simultaneously. The Alerts window is enabled and disabled by
pressing the ALERTS softkey.
Figure 2-67 Alerts Window
• WARNING – A flashing “WARNING” softkey
annunciation and an aural tone (single chime
every 2 seconds) are used to alert the pilot of any
warnings. The aural tone and flashing “WARNING” annunciator continue until acknowledged
by the pilot. Pressing the WARNING softkey
silences the aural tone and stops the annunciator
from flashing.
• CAUTION – A flashing “CAUTION” softkey
annunciation and a single aural tone (one chime)
are used to alert the pilot of any cautions. The
flashing “CAUTION” annunciator continues to
flash until acknowledged by the pilot. Pressing
the CAUTION softkey stops the annunciator from
flashing.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
PFD.indd 43
• ADVISORY – A flashing “ADVISORY” softkey
annunciation (no aural tone) is used to alert the
pilot of any message advisories. The flashing
“ADVISORY” annunciator continues to flash until
acknowledged by the pilot. Pressing the ADVISORY softkey stops the annunciator from flashing.
ANNUNCIATION WINDOW
The Annunciation window appears to the right of the
Vertical Speed Indicator when a WARNING or CAUTION
alert is issued. Warning alerts are displayed in red and
caution alerts are displayed in yellow. When new alerts
appear, they are displayed with a separate white line at
the top of the Annunciation window, regardless of priority.
Once they are acknowledged, they are sequenced based
on priority.
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to the Annunciations and
Alerts section.
Figure 2-68 Annunciation Windows
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
2-43
7/11/2005 4:29:14 PM
PFD.indd 44
7/11/2005 4:29:14 PM
DESCRIPTION
SECTION 3 NAV/COM
The G1000 NAV/COM interface includes:
3.1 OVERVIEW
The G1000 NAV/COM frequency controls and windows are located in the top corners of the Primary Flight
Display (PFD) and Multi Function Display (MFD). The
NAV controls, windows and fields are located on the left
side. The COM controls, windows and fields are on the
right, as shown in the figure below.
NAV
Controls
NAV Frequency Window
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windows and fields
Radio selection
Tuning box
Frequency Transfer Arrow
Radio status indications
Controls
COM Frequency Window
COM
Controls
Figure 3-1 G1000 NAV/COM Interface (PFD)
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-1
7/6/2005 2:11:54 PM
DESCRIPTION
WINDOWS AND FIELDS
RADIO SELECTION
The NAV and COM Frequency windows are located
at the top of the display on either side of the Navigation
Status bar on both the PFD and the MFD.
Frequencies in the active window are displayed in either green or white.
• The NAV Frequency window is displayed to the left
of the Navigation Status Bar.
• The COM Frequency window is displayed to the
right of the Navigation Status Bar.
Each radio frequency window is composed of two
fields, a standby field and an active field.
• In the NAV Frequency window, the active frequency
is on the right side, the standby frequency is on the
left.
• In the COM Frequency window, the active frequency
is on the left side, the standby frequency is on the
right.
Standby NAV
Frequency Field
Tuning Box
3-2
190-00617-00_03A.indd 2
Selected NAV
Radio
Active NAV
Frequency Field
• An active COM frequency is displayed in green indicating that the COM radio is selected on the audio
panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC keys). White
numbers indicate that the radio is not selected.
• An active NAV frequency is displayed in green
indicating the NAV radio is selected for navigation
on the HSI. NAV radio selection is made with the
PFD CDI softkey.
• NAV1 selected: a single green arrow with ‘VOR1’ or
‘LOC1’ displayed on the HSI.
• NAV2 selected: a double green arrow with ‘VOR2’
or ‘LOC2’ displayed on the HSI.
• Both active NAV frequencies displayed in white
indicate that GPS is in use.
Navigation Status Bar
Selected COM
Radio
Figure 3-2 Frequency Fields
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
Active COM
Frequency Field
Standby COM
Frequency Field
Tuning Box
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 2:11:55 PM
DESCRIPTION
CONTROLS
The COM controls:
The NAV Frequency window is controlled by knobs
and keys on the left, the COM Frequency window by
knobs and keys on the right.
• VOL/PUSH SQ knob
– Turn to adjust the COM radio volume.
– Press to turn automatic squelch ON and OFF.
The NAV controls:
• VOL/PUSH ID knob
– Turn to adjust the NAV radio volume level.
– Press to turn the Morse code ID ON and OFF.
• Frequency Transfer key
– Press to transfer the NAV frequencies between
the active and standby fields.
• Dual NAV tuning knob
– Turn to tune a NAV frequency in the NAV
tuning box (large knob for MHz; small knob
for kHz).
– Press to transfer the NAV tuning box between
the NAV1 and NAV2 radios.
• Frequency Transfer key
– Press to transfer the COM frequencies between
the active and standby fields.
– Press and hold for two seconds to tune the
emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) in the
active COM field.
• Dual COM tuning knob
– Turn to tune a COM frequency in the COM
tuning box (large knob for MHz; small knob
for kHz).
– Press to transfer the COM tuning box between
the COM1 and COM2 radios.
NAV Controls
COM Controls
VOL/PUSH
ID Knob
VOL/PUSH
SQ Knob
Frequency Transfer Keys
Dual NAV
Knob
Dual COM
Knob
• Turn to tune desired
frequencies.
• Press to change tuning box
positions.
Figure 3-3 NAV/COM Controls
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 3
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-3
7/6/2005 2:11:55 PM
DESCRIPTION
TUNING BOX
A light blue tuning box is displayed around the radio
standby frequency window, on both the PFD and MFD.
Pressing the small COM or NAV knob transfers the tuning box back and forth between the two windows.
Frequencies located in the standby window are displayed in either white or gray.
Pushing the small COM knob switches the
tuning box from one COM radio to the other.
Figure 3-5 Switching COM Radios
• The standby frequency appearing in the tuning box
is white.
• The other standby frequency is gray.
Pushing the small NAV knob switches the tuning box from one NAV radio to the other.
Frequency Transfer Arrow
Figure 3-6 Switching NAV Radios
Tuning Box
Figure 3-4 Frequency Transfer Arrow and Tuning Box
SWITCHING BETWEEN RADIOS
MANUALLY TUNING A FREQUENCY
Pressing the small COM or NAV knob transfers the
tuning box between the radio frequency windows.
The dual COM and dual NAV frequency knobs are
used for manual COM and NAV radio tuning. The frequencies are tuned in the standby field.
When a different COM transceiver is selected on the
audio panel, the COM frequency tuning box highlights
the frequency on both the PFD and MFD.
When a different NAV radio is selected on the HSI, the
NAV frequency tuning box highlights the frequency on
the PFD and MFD. The NAV frequency tuning box does
not change when GPS mode is selected.
3-4
190-00617-00_03A.indd 4
• The MHz frequency digits are tuned with the large
COM and NAV knobs.
• The kHz frequency digits are tuned with the small
COM and NAV knobs.
Turning the knobs clockwise increases frequency.
Turning the knobs counterclockwise decreases frequency.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 2:11:56 PM
DESCRIPTION
RADIO INDICATORS
• RX – During COM signal reception, a white RX
appears by the active COM frequency.
• TX – During COM transmission, a white TX appears
by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency Transfer Arrow.
Figure 3-9 COM and NAV Volume Levels
FREQUENCY TRANSFER ARROW
Figure 3-7 COM Radio Status Indications
• ID – When the Morse code identifier is ON for a
NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the
active NAV frequency.
The Frequency Transfer Arrow is displayed between
the COM and NAV active and standby frequencies for
the active radio. Pressing the Frequency Transfer key
toggles the frequencies. Pressing the small COM or NAV
knob transfers the frequency tuning box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow between the radios.
NOTE: When a COM signal is received or
transmitted, the Frequency Transfer Arrow is
replaced by a white RX or TX indication.
The Morse code identifier is ON for the
GHM VOR.
Figure 3-8 ID Indication
VOLUME
Pressing the COM Frequency Transfer
key toggles the COM frequencies.
Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100%
using the VOL/PUSH SQ knob for COM or VOL/PUSH
ID knob for NAV. Turning the knob clockwise increases
volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the
standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for
two seconds after the change.
Pressing the NAV Frequency Transfer
key toggles the NAV frequencies.
Figure 3-10 Transferring COM and NAV Frequencies
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 5
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-5
7/6/2005 2:11:56 PM
OPERATION – COM
3.2 COM OPERATION
SELECTING A COM RADIO
FREQUENCY SPACING
The desired COM radio is selected by pressing the
COM MIC keys on the audio panel. When the COM MIC
key is annunciated, the associated active COM frequency
is displayed in green in the COM Frequency window.
The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25 kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33 kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration.
Top section of the
audio panel
COM channel spacing is configured through the MFD
on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page group.
This COM radio is selected
on the audio panel.
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
Automatic squelch quiets unwanted static noise when
no audio signal is received, while still providing reasonable sensitivity to weak COM signals. To unsquelch the
audio, press the VOL/PUSH SQ knob.
When automatic squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard
over the speaker and phones and an RX indication appears on the display.
Figure 3-12 Selecting a COM Radio
NOTE: Refer to the Audio Panel section for more
details on transceiver selection.
Figure 3-11 Overriding Automatic Squelch
To return to automatic squelch, press the VOL/PUSH
SQ knob again.
3-6
190-00617-00_03A.indd 6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 2:11:57 PM
OPERATION – COM
EMERGENCY FREQUENCY (121.500 MHZ)
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency
frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in the
radio in which the tuning failure occurred.
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer
key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the
active COM radio (the one with the transfer arrow).
Figure 3-13 COM Tuning Failure
NOTE: In case of a dual display failure, the COM
radios are automatically tuned to the emergency
frequency (121.500 MHz).
Press for two seconds to load 121.5 MHz.
Figure 3-14 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the COM1 or COM2 push-to-talk (PTT) switch becomes stuck, the COM transmitter times out after 35 seconds of continuous transmitting. An alert appears on the
PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
Figure 3-15 Stuck Microphone Alert
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 7
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-7
7/6/2005 2:11:57 PM
OPERATION – NAV
3.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION FOR NAVIGATION
FREQUENCY RANGE
The desired NAV radio is selected for navigation by
pressing the CDI softkey located on the PFD. The three
navigation modes that can be selected are:
The G1000 NAV radios receive in the VOR/ILS frequency range of 108.00 to 117.95 MHz with 50 kHz
spacing. The NAV Frequency window displays the following information:
• NAV1 and NAV2 active and standby frequencies
• NAV1 and NAV2 identifier indication (if the Morse
code identifier is received by the system).
• Color-coded indication of the selected NAV radio
• Morse code identifier status
MORSE CODE IDENTIFIER
Press the VOL/PUSH ID knob to turn the Morse code
identifier ON and OFF. When the identifier is ON, a
white ID indication appears to the left of the active NAV
frequency, and the Morse code is heard on the NAV audio.
The VOR/LOC Morse code identifier is displayed next to
the active NAV frequency.
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a single
green arrow (shown) labeled either ‘VOR1’ or
‘LOC1’ is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1
frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a double
green arrow (not shown) labeled either ‘VOR2’ or
‘LOC2’ is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2
frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS mode is selected, a single magenta
arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither
NAV radio is selected.
NOTE: In GPS mode, both active NAV frequencies
are displayed in white.
When the identifier is OFF, the ID indication disappears and the Morse code is off.
NAV audio is available with the ID filtered out for
listening to HIWAS and FSS transmissions on VOR stations.
NAV2 radio is selected on the
audio panel. The Morse code
identifier for the GHM VOR
can be heard.
The NAV radio is
selected by the CDI
softkey.
NAV section
of the audio
panel
Figure 3-17 Morse Code Identifier Audio
Figure 3-18 Selecting a NAV Radio
3-8
190-00617-00_03A.indd 8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 2:11:58 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
3.4 FREQUENCY AUTO-TUNING
The G1000 system offers multiple auto-tuning capabilities. The PFD allows auto-tuning of COM frequencies
associated with the nearest airports. The MFD provides
auto-tuning of both COM and NAV frequencies from
Waypoint and Nearest Pages. In addition, the primary
NAV frequency is entered automatically in the NAV window during approach loading or approach activation.
AUTO-TUNING ON THE PFD
COM frequencies for the nearest airports may be
viewed and automatically loaded from the Nearest Airports window on the PFD.
To auto-tune a COM frequency for a nearby
airport:
1.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the frequency windows in the following ways:
Press the NRST softkey to open the Nearest
Airports window, which displays the list of
airport identifiers and COM frequencies.
2.
• By pressing the ENT key when the frequency is highlighted on the appropriate page (PFD and MFD).
Rotate the FMS knob to highlight the desired
COM frequency.
3.
Press the ENT key to load the COM frequency
into the COM tuning box.
• When loading or activating an approach (PFD and
MFD).
Rotate the FMS knob to scroll through a list of frequencies.
The desired frequency is entered in the standby frequency tuning box. Pressing the Frequency Transfer key
moves this frequency into the active field.
Press the ENT key to load
a highlighted frequency
into the frequency window.
Rotate the FMS
knob to scroll
through a list of
frequencies.
Figure 3-19 Loading Frequencies
Pressing the NRST softkey opens
the Nearest Airports window
Figure 3-20 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 9
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-9
7/6/2005 2:11:58 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
AUTO-TUNING ON THE MFD
WPT – Airport Information Page
Frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
The Airport Information Page displays runway information and a list of frequencies for the selected airport
identifier as well as departure, arrival and approach information.
• WPT – Airport Information
• WPT – VOR Information
To display the entire list of frequencies for
an airport:
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest VOR
1.
On the Airport Information Page, press the
INFO softkey to display runway and frequency
information for a specific airport.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the selection
cursor in the window.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired airport
identifier and press the ENT key. A list of all
available frequencies for the selected airport
appears.
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies
Figure 3-21 MFD Page Group Icon
NOTE: In NAV mode, during any VOR/ILS
approach activation, the NAV frequency is automatically loaded into the standby field of the
selected NAV radio.
NOTE: In GPS mode, during any VOR/ILS
approach activation, the appropriate NAV frequency is automatically loaded into the active
field of NAV1.
Figure 3-22 WPT – Airport Information Page (INFO)
3-10
190-00617-00_03A.indd 10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 2:11:58 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
To load a COM frequency into the COM tuning
box:
To load the primary approach NAV frequency
into the NAV tuning box:
1.
When the list of frequencies for the selected
airport is displayed, highlight the desired frequency by turning the large FMS knob.
1
On the Airport Information Page, press the APR
softkey to display approach information for a
specific airport.
2.
Press the ENT key.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the selection
cursor in the window.
NOTE: The runway Pilot Controlled Lighting
(PCL) frequency (located in the Runways box of
the INFO portion of the Airport Information Page)
may also be highlighted with the FMS knob and
loaded into the COM tuning box by pressing the
ENT key.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
primary NAV frequency located in the Primary
Frequency box.
4.
Press the ENT key.
Figure 3-23 WPT – Airport Information Page (APR)
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 11
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-11
7/6/2005 2:11:59 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
WPT – VOR Information Page
The VOR Information Page displays information specific to individual VORs, including the airport that is nearest to the VOR.
To load a VOR frequency into the NAV
window:
1.
On the VOR Information Page, press the
FMS knob to activate the VOR Information
window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob as needed to select the
desired VOR and press the ENT key to validate
the selection.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the VOR
frequency and press the ENT key to load this
frequency into the tuning box of the NAV
Frequency window.
NOTE: If the MENU key is pressed when on the
VOR Information Page, the ‘View Recent VOR
List’ menu option is displayed for quick access to
recently used VORs. If no VOR frequencies have
been tuned, this menu option is “grayed out”
and not available.
Figure 3-24 WPT – VOR Information Page
3-12
190-00617-00_03A.indd 12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 2:11:59 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
NRST – Nearest Airports Page
The Nearest Airports Page displays a list of the nearest
airports as well as related runway, frequency and approach
information. On this page, any frequency associated with
the selected airport can be loaded into the NAV or COM
Frequency window.
To display the entire list of frequencies for
a nearby airport and load a frequency from
that list:
1.
On the Nearest Airports Page, press the FMS
knob to activate the selection cursor in the
Nearest Airports window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list
of nearest airport identifiers until the desired
airport is highlighted.
3.
Press the FREQ softkey to activate the selection
cursor in the Frequencies box.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list of
frequencies for the selected airport.
5.
When the desired frequency is highlighted,
press the ENT key to load this frequency into
the tuning box of the appropriate Frequency
window (NAV or COM).
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 13
Figure 3-25 NRST – Nearest Airport Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-13
7/6/2005 2:12:00 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
NRST – Nearest VOR Page
The Nearest VOR Page displays a list of the nearest
VORs together with related information, including the
VOR frequency.
To load a VOR frequency into the NAV
window:
1.
On the Nearest VOR Page, press the FMS knob
to activate the Nearest VOR window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to scroll through the list
of nearest VORs until the desired VOR is highlighted.
3.
Press the FREQ softkey to activate the selection
cursor in the Frequency box and press the ENT
key to load the frequency into the tuning box
of the NAV Frequency window.
Figure 3-26 NRST – Nearest VOR Page
3-14
190-00617-00_03A.indd 14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 2:12:00 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page
The Nearest Frequencies Page displays a list of nearest
ARTCC, FSS and WX frequencies. For frequency selection, the cursor can be activated on the ARTCC, FSS, or
WX windows by using the ARTCC, FSS and WX softkeys.
To view a nearest ARTCC frequency and load
it into the standby frequency field:
1.
Press the ARTCC softkey to activate the selection cursor in the Nearest ARTCC window.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to scroll through the
list of ARTCC names, then the large FMS knob
to highlight the desired ARTCC frequency.
3.
Press the ENT key to load the frequency into
the COM tuning box.
To view a nearest WX frequency and load it
into the standby frequency field:
1.
Press the WX softkey to activate the selection
cursor in the Nearest WX window.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight the desired WX
frequency.
3.
Press the ENT key to load the desired WX frequency into the tuning box.
NOTE: The Nearest ARTCC window contains a
numbered list of ARTCC names as well as bearing and distance information to the transmitting
antenna.
To view a nearest FSS frequency and load it
into the standby frequency field:
1.
Press the FSS softkey to activate the selection
cursor in the Nearest FSS window.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to scroll through the
list of FSS names, then the large FMS knob to
highlight the desired FSS frequency.
3.
Figure 3-27 NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page
Press the ENT key to load the desired FSS
frequency into the COM or NAV tuning box.
NOTE: The Nearest FSS window contains a list
of FSS names, bearing and distance information
to the transmitting antenna.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 15
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-15
7/6/2005 2:12:00 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
AUTO-TUNING ON APPROACH ACTIVATION (NAV
FREQUENCIES)
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the
NAV Frequency window on approach activation, regardless of the display being used.
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned
upon loading an approach.
To auto-tune a NAV frequency, if the desired
approach is not already loaded:
1.
Press the PROC key to open the Procedures
window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘SELECT APPROACH’ menu option and press
the ENT key.
3.
Use both the FMS knob and the ENT key as
needed to select the desired airport, VOR/ILS
approach and transition.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight either the
‘LOAD?’ or ‘ACTIVATE?’ prompt and press the
ENT key. The primary NAV frequency for the
activated approach is loaded into the standby
field of the selected NAV radio.
Figure 3-28 Selecting an Approach
Figure 3-29 Loading an Approach
3-16
190-00617-00_03A.indd 16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 2:12:01 PM
OPERATION – AUTO-TUNING
To auto-tune a NAV frequency if the desired
approach is already loaded:
1.
Press the PROC key to open the Procedures
window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ menu option and press
the ENT key. The approach primary NAV frequency is automatically loaded into the standby
field of the selected NAV radio.
NOTE: If the system is in GPS mode when a
VOR/ILS approach is loaded or activated, the
approach primary NAV frequency is automatically
loaded into the active field of NAV1.
NOTE: Before loading or activating an approach,
the primary NAV frequency may be loaded into
the NAV tuning box by highlighting the frequency
in the Select Approach window turning the FMS
knob, and pressing the ENT key.
NOTE: The NAV frequency is also automatically
loaded upon vector-to-final activation, if the NAV
frequency is not already loaded in the selected
NAV radio.
Figure 3-30 Activating an Approach
NOTE: When a VOR/ILS approach has been
activated in GPS mode, and the ILS CDI Capture
option is set to AUTO, the system switches to NAV
mode as the final approach course is intercepted
(within 15 nm from the FAF). See the Multi Function Display section for details.
NOTE: An approach can also be activated with
the MENU key when the Flight Plan window is
open.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_03A.indd 17
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
3-17
7/6/2005 2:12:01 PM
190-00617-00_03A.indd 18
7/6/2005 2:12:01 PM
TRANSPONDER DESCRIPTION
SECTION 4 TRANSPONDER
4.1 OVERVIEW
When the CODE softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear in the softkey bar (Figure 4-3):
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP, BACK. The digits
8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the BKSP
softkey backs up code selection to the previous digit.
The GTX 33 transponder is integrated into the G1000
system, offering Mode A, Mode C and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. This section provides a description of the transponder operation and information on
Mode S capability.
Pressing the BACK softkey during Code Selection reverts to the MODE Selection softkeys (Figure 4-2). Pressing the BACK softkey during Mode Selection reverts to
the Top-level softkeys (Figure 4-1).
The transponder controls are located on the G1000
Primary Flight Display (PFD) on the lower portion of the
screen (see figures below).
NOTE: After 45 seconds of transponder softkey
inactivity, the system reverts back to the Top-level
softkeys (Figure 4-1).
TRANSPONDER SOFTKEYS
TRANSPONDER STATUS BAR
The transponder function spans three levels of softkeys; the Top-level, the Mode Selection and the Code Selection softkeys.
The Transponder Status Bar is located to the left of the
System Time box and contains, a four-digit code field, a
mode field and a reply status indicator. In Standby mode,
both the code field and the mode field appear in white. In
all other modes, these fields appear in green.
When the Top-level XPDR softkey is pressed, the following softkeys appear in the softkey bar (Figure 4-2):
STBY, ON, ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
Transponder Status Bar
Figure 4-1 Top-level Softkeys
Pressing XPDR
displays the Mode
Selection softkeys
Pressing BACK
displays the Toplevel softkeys
Figure 4-2 Mode Selection Softkeys
Pressing CODE
displays the Code
Selection softkeys
Pressing BACK
displays the Mode
Selection softkeys
Figure 4-3 Code Selection Softkeys
190-00617-00 Rev. A
XPDR_00617-00_0A.indd 1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
4-1
7/12/2005 8:00:54 AM
TRANSPONDER DESCRIPTION
MODE S FEATURES
The GTX 33 transponder is equipped with selective
addressing or Mode Select (Mode S), capability. Mode S
functions include the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to
exchange information between aircraft and various ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID reporting
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
• Acquisition squitter
Flight ID Reporting – The G1000 transponder reports aircraft identification as either the aircraft registration or a FLT ID (Flight Identification). The system is
configured for either option by an authorized Garmin
service center.
If configured for Flight ID entry, the pilot must enter
the appropriate flight ID on the PFD. After the correct
Flight ID is entered, the aircraft identification reported in
response to ATC radar interrogations is properly correlated with the associated call sign for voice communication.
The flight ID is not to exceed seven (7) characters. No
space is needed when entering Flight ID. When a Flight
ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it
upon completion of Flight ID entry. (See ICAO documents 8168, 4444 and 8585 for further details).
Acquisition Squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short
squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the
presence of interrogations.
The purpose of acquisition squitter is to enable Mode S
ground stations and Traffic Collision Avoidance System
(TCAS) equipped aircraft to recognize the presence of
Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)
Mode S provides a data link for Traffic Information
Service (TIS). TIS is a ground-based service that sends
out location, direction, altitude and climb/descent information relative to all transponder-equipped aircraft within
a radius of 55 miles from select sites.
For aircraft not equipped with TCAS or TAS, TIS provides a graphic display of traffic information. TIS displays
up to eight (8) traffic targets within 7.5 nautical miles
from 3,000 feet below to 3,500 feet above your aircraft.
TIS data is updated approximately once every five (5) seconds.
NOTE: TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in Visual Meteorological Conditions (VMC).
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder
are invisible to TIS.
If the Flight ID is set to ‘SAME AS TAIL’ no entry is
required. In this configuration, the transponder then reports the aircraft registration number to ATC.
4-2
XPDR_00617-00_0A.indd 2
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:00:54 AM
OPERATION
4.2 OPERATION
Standby Mode (Manual)
MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude
modes) or manual (Standby, ON and Altitude modes).
The STBY, ON and ALT softkeys can be accessed by
pressing the XPDR softkey.
The Standby mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY softkey. In Standby mode, the transponder
does not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be
entered. If the Standby mode is selected, a white STBY
indication appears in the mode field of the Transponder
Status Bar.
Ground Mode (Automatic)
Ground mode is automatically selected when the
aircraft is on the ground. A green GND indication appears in the mode field of the Transponder Status Bar. In
Ground mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A
and Mode C replies, but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
Figure 4-4 Ground Mode
Figure 4-5 Standby Mode
NOTE: In Standby mode, the IDENT function is
inhibited.
Manual ON Mode
The ON mode can be selected at any time by pressing
the ON softkey. ON mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON
mode, a green ON indication appears in the mode field of
the Transponder Status Bar.
NOTE: Ground mode can be overridden by pressing any one of the Mode Selection softkeys.
Figure 4-6 ON Mode
190-00617-00 Rev. A
XPDR_00617-00_0A.indd 3
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
4-3
7/12/2005 8:00:54 AM
OPERATION
Altitude Mode (Automatic or Manual)
CODE SELECTION
Altitude mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT softkey.
Entering a Code
If Altitude mode is selected, a green ALT indication is
displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Status Bar,
and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure altitude information.
Figure 4-7 Altitude Mode
Reply Status
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations,
an R indication appears momentarily in the reply status
field of the Transponder Status Bar.
Figure 4-8 Reply Indication
A total of 4,096 discrete identification codes can be
selected with the Code Selection softkeys.
To enter a transponder code:
1.
Press the XPDR softkey to display the transponder Mode Selection softkeys.
2.
Press the CODE softkey to display the transponder Code Selection softkeys, for digit entry.
3.
Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the
code field. When entering the code, the next
key in sequence must be pressed within 10
seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored
to the previous code. Five seconds after the
fourth digit has been entered, the transponder
code becomes active.
Figure 4-9 Entering a Code
NOTE: While entering a code, press the BKSP
(backspace) softkey to back up and change code
digits.
4-4
XPDR_00617-00_0A.indd 4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:00:56 AM
OPERATION
VFR Code
IDENT FUNCTION
The VFR code can be entered either manually, each
digit at a time, or by pressing the XPDR softkey, then the
VFR softkey. When the VFR softkey is pressed, the preprogrammed VFR code is automatically displayed in the
code field of the Transponder Status Bar.
Pressing the IDENT softkey sends an ID indication to
Air Traffic Control (ATC). The ID return distinguishes
your transponder from all others on the air traffic controller’s radar screen.
Pressing the VFR softkey again restores the previous
identification code.
NOTE: The pre-programmed VFR code is set at
the factory to 1200.
The IDENT softkey appears in all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT softkey is pressed, a green
IDENT indication is displayed in the mode field of the
Transponder Status Bar for a duration of 18 seconds.
Important Codes
Figure 4-10 IDENT Indication
Following is a list of important codes:
• 1200 – VFR code in the U.S. (refer to ICAO standards for VFR codes in other countries).
• 7000 – VFR code commonly used in Europe (refer
to ICAO standards).
• 7500 – Hijack code.
• 7600 – Loss of communication code.
• 7700 – Emergency code.
• 7777 – Military interceptor operations code
(NEVER SQUAWK THIS CODE).
• 0000 – Code for military use in the U.S.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
XPDR_00617-00_0A.indd 5
When the IDENT softkey is pressed while in Mode or
Code Selection, the system reverts to the Top-level softkeys.
NOTE: In Standby mode, the IDENT softkey is
inoperative.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
4-5
7/12/2005 8:00:57 AM
XPDR_00617-00_0A.indd 6
7/12/2005 8:00:57 AM
DESCRIPTION
SECTION 5 AUDIO PANEL
5.1 OVERVIEW
This section describes the Garmin GMA 1347 audio
panel and its operating instructions.
The Garmin GMA 1347 is an audio control panel and
marker beacon system. Pressing the audio panel keys
controls audio selection of COM, NAV and intercom. LED
annunciators indicate when a key function is selected.
The audio panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) with electronic cabin noise de-emphasis. Separate knobs control intercom audio level for the pilot and
copilot/passenger. The intercom provides four selectable
modes of isolation (All, Crew, Pilot, Copilot).
A cabin speaker is available for listening to selected aircraft radios. MASQ (Master Avionics Squelch) processing
reduces ambient noise from the avionics inputs.
Each microphone input has an automatic squelch
threshold. Manual squelch is available by pressing the
MAN SQ key.
The audio panel provides a digital recorder that can
play back up to two and a half minutes of COM audio.
Recording is automatic when a COM signal is received.
Playback is controlled by pressing the PLAY key. Playback can be stopped by pressing the MKR/MUTE key.
The unit controls marker beacon receiver audio and
features marker beacon audio muting.
As part of the G1000 Integrated Cockpit System, the
GMA 1347 also controls the display reversionary mode.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_05A.indd 1
WARNING: When the GMA 1347 Audio panel is
turned OFF or is inoperative, certain autopilots
are affected. No warning tone is supplied when
the autopilot disengages and the middle marker
sense signal is not supplied.
The audio panel features three (3) major groups of
keys as shown in Figure 5-1:
• Communication keys
• Navigation keys
• Intercom system (ICS) keys
Each key is labeled to indicate the name of the function. The triangular annunciator above each key indicates
when the key function is selected.
The knobs at the bottom of the unit control ICS volume and squelch threshold levels. The small knob adjusts
the volume/squelch level for the pilot. The large knob
adjusts the volume/squelch level for the copilot/passenger.
The red DISPLAY BACKUP button below the dual volume/squelch knob controls reversionary mode selection.
TRANSCEIVERS
The audio panel handles two separate transceivers:
• COM1 MIC
• COM2 MIC
NOTE: A push-to-talk (PTT) switch must be
pressed to transmit on the selected radio.
The audio panel accepts up to four (4) microphone
inputs, providing two (2) crew and two (2) passenger intercom stations in the aircraft.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
5-1
7/6/2005 3:16:31 PM
DESCRIPTION
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
The audio panel can accommodate up to four (4) headsets, pilot, copilot and up to two (2) passengers. Stereo
headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the
right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the audio panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears. If
a monaural headset is used at one of the other positions,
any other listener using a stereo headset hears audio in the
left ear only, unless their headset has a mono/stereo switch
that is set to mono.
UNMUTED/UNSWITCHED INPUTS
The unit provides four (4) unmuted/unswitched inputs that are always present on the headsets or speaker.
These inputs are the following aural warnings:
•
•
•
•
ALTITUDE WARNING
UNSWITCHED 1
UNSWITCHED 2
UNSWITCHED 3
5-2
190-00617-00_05A.indd 2
• Transceiver audio selector keys
(COM1, COM2)
• Transmitter (audio/mic) selection keys
(COM1 MIC, COM2 MIC)
• Passenger address key
(PA)
• Speaker key
(SPKR)
• Marker beacon receiver audio select/mute key
(MKR/MUTE)
• Marker beacon receiver high sensitivity key
(HI SENS)
• Aircraft radio audio selector keys
(NAV1, NAV2)
• Intercom manual squelch key
(MAN SQ)
• Digital recording playback key
(PLAY)
• Intercom system (ICS) isolation keys
(PILOT, COPLT)
• Volume/squelch knob
(VOL/SQ)
• Reversionary mode button
(DISPLAY BACKUP)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 3:16:31 PM
DESCRIPTION
Transmitters
Transceiver Audio
Disabled on
Tiger Aircraft
Speaker
Passenger Address
Marker Beacon Signal Sensitivity
Marker Beacon/Mute
Navigation Radio Audio
Navigation Radio Audio,
Not Available on
Tiger Aircraft
Manual Squelch
Digital Recording Playback
ICS Isolation
VOL/SQ
SQ Annunciation
VOL Annunciation
Reversionary Mode Control
Figure 5-1 Front Panel Controls
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_05A.indd 3
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
5-3
7/6/2005 3:16:32 PM
OPERATION
5.2 OPERATION
POWER-UP AND FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
Power-up
The audio panel performs a self-test during power-up.
All panel annunciator lights illuminate for approximately
two (2) seconds. Once the self-test is completed, the settings are restored to the ones in use before the unit was
last turned off.
Disabled on
Tiger aircraft
Fail-safe Operation
Figure 5-2 Transceivers
A fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly to COM1 in case power is interrupted
or the unit is turned off. In this case, audio is not available
on the speaker.
SELECTING AND DESELECTING KEYS
Pressing a key activates and deactivates the function,
turning the triangular annunciator light on and off.
LIGHTING
Key annunciators and backlighting are controlled automatically by the G1000 Control Display Unit (CDU).
TRANSCEIVER KEYS
The following four (4) transceiver keys appear at the
top of the audio panel front panel: COM1 MIC, COM2
MIC, COM1 and COM2. COM audio can be selected
by pressing either the desired COM key or by pressing a
COM MIC key.
5-4
190-00617-00_05A.indd 4
COM MIC Keys
Pressing the COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC key selects
the COM radio as the active transceiver. The receiver
audio key, COM1, COM2 is also selected. The COM
frequency is highlighted in green in the active frequency
field of the PFD and MFD.
Only one microphone source can be selected at a time.
If COM2 MIC is pressed when COM1 MIC is active, the
unit switches to COM2.
COM Keys
Pressing the COM1 or COM2 receiver key selects the
COM radio as an active receiver source. Any combination of radios can be selected separately or simultaneously
regardless of the active transceiver selection. The active
COM radio is always heard through the headsets or on the
speaker, if selected.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 3:16:33 PM
OPERATION
Transmitting
PA FUNCTION
When a transmitter is keyed, the active transceiver
MIC key annunciator blinks approximately once per second. A white TX indication appears next to the active
COM frequency on both the PFD and the MFD during
transmission.
A passenger address function is provided by pressing
the PA key. Push-to-talk (PTT) must be used to deliver PA
announcements over the headsets.
NOTE: Audio level of the COM radio(s) is controlled by the COM volume controls located on
both the PFD and MFD (see the VHF NAV/COM
section).
OPTIONAL COM MUTING
SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker.
Pressing the SPKR key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT switch
is keyed.
The speaker volume is adjustable above and below a
nominal value. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for details.
COM muting on receive and COM muting on transmit
options can be disabled if desired. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for details.
COM Muting on Receive
When COM muting on receive is enabled, all secondary COM audio is muted during detection of received primary COM audio.
NOTE: If COM muting on receive option is
enabled, only primary COM radio reception is
recorded by the digital clearance recorder.
COM Muting on Transmit
When COM muting on transmit is enabled, all secondary COM audio is muted during transmission over the
primary COM radio.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_05A.indd 5
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
5-5
7/6/2005 3:16:33 PM
OPERATION
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
Description and Operation
The audio panel marker beacon is used as part of the
ILS system. The marker beacon receiver is always ON and
receives at 75 MHz. The audio panel provides a marker
audio muting capability.
The receiver detects the three (3) marker tones, outer,
middle and inner, and illuminates the appropriate marker beacon indicators. The marker indicators are located
to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD (Figure 5-4). The
outer marker frequency is 400 Hz with a blue indicator,
the middle marker frequency is 1300Hz with an amber
indicator and the inner marker frequency is 3000 Hz with
a white indicator. Refer to Table 5-1 for a summary of the
marker beacon signal characteristics.
When the MKR/MUTE key is selected, the annunciator light illuminates and the audio signal can be heard
over the speaker or headsets during marker reception.
When the MKR/MUTE key is annunciated and a marker beacon tone is received, pressing the MKR/MUTE key
mutes the audio but does not affect the annunciators. The
audio returns when the next marker signal is received. If
the MKR/MUTE key is pressed during signal reception,
while marker beacon audio is muted, marker audio and
the MKR/MUTE key annunciator light are turned off.
5-6
190-00617-00_05A.indd 6
NOTE: The marker beacon receiver indicators
operate independently of the marker beacon
audio and cannot be turned off.
The marker beacon audio output level is adjustable by
a Garmin-authorized service center.
NOTE: The GMA 1347 is capable of driving
external marker beacon lamps.
Marker Beacon Signal Sensitivity
The HI SENS key can be pressed for increased marker
beacon signal sensitivity. The HI SENS function is used
to receive an earlier indication of nearing a marker during
an approach.
Figure 5-3 Marker Beacon
MARKER BEACON VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
The level of marker beacon receiver audio can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center, if desired.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 3:16:33 PM
OPERATION
Beacon
Outer Marker
Audio Frequency
400 Hz
Audio Keying
———
Middle Marker
1,300 Hz
•—•—
Airway/Inner Marker
3,000 Hz
••••
Rate
2 dashes per second
95 dot-dash combinations
per minute
6 dots per second
Lamp Color
Blue
Amber
White
Table 5-1 Marker Beacon Signal Characteristics
Inner Marker
Middle Marker
Outer Marker
Figure 5-4 Marker Beacon Signal Indicator Lights on the PFD
NAVIGATION RADIOS
Pressing NAV1 or NAV2 selects and deselects the radio
source and the annunciator (Figure 5-5). Selected audio
can be heard over the headset and the speakers. All radio
keys can be selected individually or together.
Disabled on
Tiger aircraft
When no further navigation radio audio is heard, the
amount of background noise is reduced by the Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ) feature.
Figure 5-5 Navigation Radios
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_05A.indd 7
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
5-7
7/6/2005 3:16:34 PM
OPERATION
INTERCOM SYSTEM (ICS) ISOLATION
CREW Mode
The intercom system (ICS) provides four (4) isolation
modes: ALL, PILOT, COPILOT and CREW. The desired
mode can be selected or deselected using the PILOT and
COPLT keys.
CREW mode is selected when both the PILOT and
COPLT keys are annunciated. In CREW mode, both the
pilot and copilot can hear the selected radios and communicate with each other, while the passengers are isolated
but can communicate with each other.
The four (4) possible ICS isolation states are summarized in the table below.
PILOT Mode
PILOT isolation is selected when only the PILOT key
is annunciated. In PILOT mode, the pilot can hear the
selected radios, and the copilot and passengers can communicate with each other.
ALL Mode
ALL mode is selected when the PILOT and the
COPLT keys are not annunciated. In ALL mode, everyone hears the selected radios and is able to communicate
with everyone else.
COPILOT Mode
COPILOT isolation is selected when only the COPLT
key is annunciated. In COPILOT mode, the copilot is
isolated from everyone else. The pilot and passengers
can hear the selected radios and communicate with each
other.
Input
PILOT Key Press
COPLT Key Press
PILOT
ALL
CREW
Figure 5-6 ICS Isolation Keys
Current ICS Isolation State
COPILOT
CREW
CREW
COPILOT
ALL
PILOT
ALL
PILOT
COPILOT
Table 5-2 ICS Isolation Mode Transitions
5-8
190-00617-00_05A.indd 8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 3:16:35 PM
OPERATION
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH CONTROL
The MAN SQ key and VOL/SQ knob control the volume and squelch of the intercom. The MAN SQ key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch
setting. The VOL/SQ knob controls volume or manual
squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
When the MAN SQ annunciator is not lit (auto-squelch
is on), the VOL/SQ knob controls only the volume.
When the MAN SQ annunciator is lit (manual squelch),
the VOL/SQ knob controls both volume and squelch.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ key is not lit (autosquelch is active), pressing the VOL/SQ knob has
no effect on the VOL/SQ selection.
Intercom Manual Squelch Control
The intercom squelch function has the ability to quiet
the ambient cockpit noise when no person is talking. Each
microphone input has an automatic squelch threshold.
Manual squelch adjustment is also available if desired.
Pressing the MAN SQ key toggles between the automatic and manual squelch mode. When in manual
squelch, the MAN SQ annunciator is lit.
In manual squelch mode the VOL/SQ knob adjusts
either the volume or squelch threshold level.
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
Pressing the VOL/SQ knob toggles between volume
and squelch adjustment. The annunciator at the bottom
of the unit indicates which function the knob is controlling.
Pilot
Copilot
Volume
Squelch
Figure 5-7 Volume/Squelch Control
MASTER AVIONICS SQUELCH (MASQ)
Intercom Volume Control
The intercom volume is controlled with the VOL/SQ
knob. The small knob controls the pilot volume. The
large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume. Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning counterclockwise decreases volume. When squelch is automatic
(MAN SQ annunciator is not lit) and the VOL annunciator
at the bottom of the unit is lit, intercom volume may now
be adjusted.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
190-00617-00_05A.indd 9
In manual squelch mode, the small VOL/SQ knob
controls pilot squelch threshold. The large VOL/SQ knob
controls copilot/passenger squelch threshold. Turning
either knob clockwise increases squelch level, counterclockwise decreases squelch.
MASQ (Master Avionics Squelch) reduces ambient
noise from the aircraft radios. When no audio is detected,
MASQ processing further reduces the amount of background noise from the radios.
The Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ) threshold level
can be adjusted or disabled by a Garmin-authorized service center.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
5-9
7/6/2005 3:16:36 PM
OPERATION
DIGITAL CLEARANCE RECORDER WITH
PLAYBACK CAPABILITY
The audio panel contains a digital clearance recorder
that plays back up to 2.5 minutes of COM signal recording. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory
blocks. Audio from all of the selected COM radios are
recorded and can be played back. Anyone able to hear
the selected COM radios is able to hear the COM audio
playback.
Once the 2.5 minutes of recording time have been
reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored
memory blocks, starting from the oldest block. Powering
off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
During playback, the PLAY annunciator light blinks
approximately once per second. If a COM input signal is
detected during playback, playback is halted and the new
COM audio is recorded as the latest block.
NOTE: The recorder can be permanently disabled by a Garmin-authorized service center.
NOTE: If the COM muting on receive option
is enabled, only the primary COM radio audio
reception is recorded by the digital clearance
recorder.
REVERSIONARY MODE
The red DISPLAY BACKUP button selects the reversionary mode for all displays. Reversionary mode operation displays important flight and engine information on
both the PFD and MFD, in case of display failure.
Figure 5-8 Playback
The PLAY key controls the playback function.
• Pressing PLAY once plays back the latest recorded
memory block, then returns to normal operation.
• Pressing PLAY during playback of a memory block
halts the playback of this block and plays back the
preceding recorded block. The PLAY key can be
used to backtrack through the recorded memory
blocks to reach and play back any desired block.
Figure 5-9 Reversionary Mode Button
NOTE: Pressing the MKR/MUTE key during
playback halts playback and returns the recorder/
playback to normal operation.
5-10
190-00617-00_05A.indd 10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/6/2005 3:16:37 PM
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SECTION 6 ENGINE INDICATION
SYSTEM
6.1 INTRODUCTION
EIS INDICATORS
The EIS Pages consist of a round dial gauge, horizontal bar indicators, bar graphs (Lean Page only) and digital
readouts:
Round Dial Gauge
The G1000 Engine Indication System (EIS) is designed
to provide gauges, bar graphs and numeric readouts of
engine parameters. The EIS is displayed on the left side of
the MFD during normal operations.
The gauge is color-coded and has a white pointer. A
digital readout appears beneath the gauge and does not
change color.
Horizontal Bar Indicators
NOTE: Refer to the System Overview for information regarding reversionary mode.
The EIS contains three distinct pages, which are accessed by the ENGINE softkey:
• Engine Page – This is the default page, which
displays all critical engine, fuel and electrical
indicators.
• Lean Page – This page provides engine leaning
information and a user interface to perform engine
leaning.
• System Page – This page provides a digital
readout for the critical engine, fuel and electrical
indicators.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
EIS.indd 1
These indicators are color-coded and have triangular
pointers. The pointers appear in white, representing areas
of normal operation. The pointer color changes to yellow
or red upon exceeding areas of normal operation. The
green band is indicative of normal operations.
Bar Graphs (Lean Page Only)
Each bar graph is numbered and represents a cylinder.
The graphs appear white (when a cylinder is selected that
graph changes to cyan), representing areas of normal operation. The color changes to yellow or red upon exceeding areas of normal operation.
Digital Readouts
These readouts appear as white text on a black background, representing areas of normal operation. The color
changes to black text on a yellow background (caution) or
white text on a red background (warning) upon exceeding
areas of normal operation.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
6-1
7/11/2005 5:05:42 PM
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.2 ENGINE PAGE
OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
Atop all three pages is a round dial gauge and digital
readout for revolutions per minute (RPM). Beneath those
gauges are horizontal bar indicators for fuel pressure, cylinder head temperature (CHT), oil temperature, oil pressure, alternator amperage, bus voltage and fuel quantity.
Refer to Figure 6-1 on the following page.
TACHOMETER
The Tachometer displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (RPM).
• White – Below normal flight operating range.
• Green – Normal flight operating range.
• Red – Propeller overspeed.
FUEL PRESSURE INDICATOR
The Fuel Pressure indicator displays current fuel pressure.
• Green – Normal fuel pressure.
• Red – Abnormal fuel pressure.
The CHT (Cylinder Head Temperature) indicator displays the temperature of the hottest cylinder. The number
of the hottest cylinder appears in the triangular pointer.
6-2
EIS.indd 2
• Green – Normal
• Yellow – Caution
• Red – Warning
OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
The Oil Pressure indicator displays the pressure of the
oil supplied to the engine.
• Green – Normal
• Yellow – Caution (low and high)
• Red – Warning (minimum and maximum)
AMMETER
The Ammeter displays the alternator load in amperes.
The Ammeter ranges from 0 to 80.
• Green – Normal
• Yellow – Caution
• Red – Warning
VOLTMETER
CHT INDICATOR
• Green – Normal
• Yellow – Caution
• Red – Warning
The Oil Temperature indicator displays the engine oil
temperature.
The Voltmeter displays the primary bus voltage.
• Green – Normal
• Yellow – Caution
• Red – Warning
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:05:42 PM
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FUEL QTY GAL INDICATOR
The Fuel Quantity indicator displays the quantity of
fuel in the tanks, in gallons. Two (2) triangular pointers
labeled L (left) and R (right) indicate the number of gallons in each fuel tank.
Tachometer
• Green – Normal
• Yellow – Caution
• Red – Warning
The indicator ranges from 0 to 25 gallons with tick
marks at ¼, ½ and ¾ tank. The Fuel Quantity Indicator
only displays to approximately 22 gallons per side when
full.
Fuel Pressure
Indicator
Cylinder Head
Temperature
Indicator
Oil
Temperature
Indicator
Oil Pressure
Indicator
Ammeter
Voltmeter
Fuel Quantity
Indicator
Figure 6-1 ENGINE Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
EIS.indd 3
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
6-3
7/11/2005 5:05:43 PM
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.3 LEAN PAGE
ASSIST
The Lean Page is accessible by pressing the LEAN
softkey. Beneath the tachometer are bar graphs and numeric readouts for exhaust gas temperature (EGT), temperature from peak and cylinder head temperature (CHT)
in degrees Fahrenheit (Refer to Figure 6-2 on the following page). By default, the numeric readouts of the EGT
and CHT are associated with the hottest cylinder and are
graphically indicated in cyan (light blue). Color coding
for the EGT and CHT bar graphs is listed below:
• Cyan (light blue) – Selected Cylinder (EGT and
CHT)
• White – Normal (EGT and CHT)
• Yellow – Caution (CHT only)
• Red – Warning (CHT only)
The ASSIST softkey can be utilized to assist in the
leaning process. When a cylinder EGT peaks, its peak is
represented by a hollow bar on the EGT bar graph. The
EGT readout for the peaked cylinder, indicated in cyan
(light blue), appears directly beneath the bar graph. The
system automatically switches to the first peak obtained
and displays the temperature deviation from peak in degrees Fahrenheit below the EGT readout.
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in
the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
The ASSIST softkey is available by pressing the LEAN
softkey.
CYLINDER SELECT
To select the Assist function:
The CYL SLCT softkey can be utilized to obtain information about a particular cylinder. The CYL SLCT
softkey becomes disabled when:
1.
From the Lean Page, press the ASSIST softkey
to identify the peak.
• a particular cylinder turns yellow or red until the
temperature decreases and returns to normal,
which is indicated by white on the bar graph
• the ASSIST softkey is pressed
The CYL SLCT softkey is available by pressing the
LEAN softkey.
To monitor the desired cylinder(s):
1.
6-4
EIS.indd 4
From the Lean Page, press the CYL SLCT softkey
to cycle through each cylinder and view the EGT
and CHT.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:05:43 PM
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Tachometer
Hollow Bar
Representing
Peak
Exhaust Gas
Temperature
Bar Graph
EGT Readout
For Selected
Cylinder
Temperature
Deviation
From Peak
Cylinder Head
Temperature
Bar Graph
CHT Readout
For Selected
Cylinder
Figure 6-2 LEAN Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
EIS.indd 5
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
6-5
7/11/2005 5:05:45 PM
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
6.4 SYSTEM PAGE
The System Page, shown in Figure 6-3, is accessible by
pressing the SYSTEM softkey. Beneath the tachometer
are numeric readouts for oil temperature, oil pressure,
voltage, amperes and fuel pressure.
Tachometer
Located at the bottom of the page is a numeric readout
for total time in service, which is displayed in hours.
• TTL TIME IN SVC – Displays the total flight
hours and is activated when the aircraft becomes
airborne.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for limitations.
Oil
Temperature
Oil
Pressure
Voltage
Amperage
Fuel Pressure
Total Time
in Service
Figure 6-3 SYSTEM Page
6-6
EIS.indd 6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 5:05:46 PM
INTRODUCTION
SECTION 7 MULTI FUNCTION
DISPLAY OPERATION
This G1000 Pilot’s Guide describes the operation of the Multi Function Display (MFD) installed in
Tiger AG-5B aircraft.
7.1 DESCRIPTION
The display portion of the G1000 Integrated Cockpit
System installed in Tiger AG-5B aircraft consists of two
10.4-inch liquid crystal displays (LCDs). During normal
operation, the right display is configured as the Multi
Function Display (MFD).
7.2 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
This MFD section only covers the baseline configuration
of the G1000. Descriptions and procedures relating to the
following options for the Tiger AG-5B are covered in the
G1000 Optional Equipment Pilot’s Guide:
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather
Mapping Sensor
• GDL 69/69A XM® Radio System
7.3 MFD POWER-UP
Powering up the MFD is part of the system power up
procedure. See the G1000 System Overview Pilot’s Guide
for details.
SPLASH SCREEN INFORMATION
The MFD splash screen displays general system
information such as software version and database
versions to the pilot when the G1000 system powers
up. To acknowledge the splash screen information and
proceed to the Navigation Map Page press the ENT key or
the right most softkey twice.
NOTE: Screen images in this section are subject
to change and may not reflect the most current
G1000 system software.
Figure 7-1 MFD Splash Screen
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-1
7/12/2005 8:02:48 AM
INTRODUCTION
7.4 MFD BACKLIGHTING
See the Primary Flight Display Pilot’s Guide for
instructions on adjusting MFD backlighting.
7.5 MFD SOFTKEYS
The MFD softkeys are located below the display screen
and provide control over flight management functions
including GPS Navigation and flight planning. Figure 7-3
shows an MFD flowchart identifying what functions are
available via the softkey labels.
The MFD softkeys perform the following functions:
ENGINE – Pressing the ENGINE softkey makes
available the LEAN and SYSTEM softkeys which
in turn access the Lean Page and the System Page,
respectively.
MAP – pressing the MAP softkey enables the following softkeys:
TRAFFIC – pressing the TRAFFIC softkey
displays/removes Mode S Traffic on the
Navigation Map.
TOPO – pressing the TOPO softkey displays
or removes topographic information on the
Navigation Map.
TERRAIN – pressing the TERRAIN softkey
displays/removes terrain information on
the Navigation Map.
BACK – pressing the BACK softkey displays
the ENGINE and MAP top level softkeys.
DCLTR (declutter) – pressing the DCLTR softkey
removes map information in three levels.
CHKLIST (checklist) – pressing the CHKLIST
softkey displays the Checklist Page.
7-2
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 2
7.6 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
(OPTIONAL)
The G1000 Multi Function Display installed in the
Tiger AG-5B provides optional checklists which allow a
pilot to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground
and during each phase of flight.
NOTE: The checklist information described in this
section is not intended to replace the checklist
information described in the Tiger AG-5B Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) and the Pilot Safety
and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content
of the checklists. User-defined checklists are created by the aircraft manufacturer. Additionally,
modifications or updates to the checklists are
coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit the checklists.
DISPLAYING THE CHECKLIST PAGE
The splash screen displays the current checklist file
that is installed for the Tiger AG-5B aircraft. If no checklist
is present, then the Splash Screen displays the text
“CHECKLIST FILE NOT PRESENT” and the CHKLIST
softkey is greyed out.
To select the Checklist Page:
1. From any page, press the CHKLIST softkey.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:02:48 AM
INTRODUCTION
SELECTING A PROCEDURE GROUP
Depending on the specific airframe, there are a certain
number of groups of procedures with their respective
checklists available to the pilot.
To select a procedure group:
1. Press the CHKLIST softkey.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘GROUP’
field.
3. Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
procedure and press the ENT key.
SELECTING A CHECKLIST WITHIN THE
PROCEDURE GROUP
1. Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘Checklist’
field.
2. Turn the large or small FMS knob to select the
desired checklist and press the ENT key.
SELECTING A CHECKLIST ITEM
Two methods are available to select a checklist item: (1)
pressing the ENT key; or (2) pressing the DONE softkey.
(1) Pressing the ENT key:
With the desired checklist displayed, turn the large
or small FMS knob to move up and down the checklist
and highlight an item with a hollow white rectangle. The
default color for non-selected checklist items is blue and
once the item is highlighted, the color turns white. To
select a checklist item that is highlighted, press the ENT
key. The selected item turns green in color again for ease
of identification, and then a check mark is placed in the
box next to the item. As an item is selected, the next item
is automatically highlighted for selection.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 3
(2) Pressing the DONE Softkey: Pressing the DONE
softkey produces the same results as pressing the ENT
key.
NOTE: All warnings are displayed in yellow for
ease of identification.
REMOVING THE CHECK MARK FROM A
CHECKLIST ITEM
Press the CLR key to remove a check mark from an
item.
ADVANCING TO THE NEXT CHECKLIST
Once the last item in a checklist is selected, the ‘GO
TO THE NEXT CHECKLIST?’ text is highlighted. Press
the ENT key to advance to the next checklist displayed.
ONE-BUTTON ACCESS TO EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES
The EMERGENCY softkey is available at all times when
the checklist page is displayed. Press the EMERGENCY
softkey at any time to immediately access the emergency
procedures.
EXITING THE CHECKLIST PAGE
The EXIT softkey is available as long as the Checklist
Page is displayed. Press the EXIT softkey or momentarily
hold down the CLR key at anytime to exit the Checklist
Page and return to the last page that was displayed before
the Checklist Page was selected.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-3
7/12/2005 8:02:48 AM
INTRODUCTION
Checklist Group
Checklist Number
Checklist Page
Indicator
Checklist Page
Softkeys
Figure 7-2 Checklist Page (typical)
Emergency
Softkey
7-4
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:02:55 AM
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE
DCLTR
MAP
CHKLIST
(optional)
Press the BACK softkey on this level to
return to the top softkey level
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
DCLTR-1
BACK
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
TRAFFIC
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
Press to return to the
top softkey level
TERRAIN
TOPO
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
BACK
BACK
Press the ENGINE or BACK softkey on any level to
return to the default page level
ENGINE
LEAN
SYSTEM
CYL SLCT
ASSIST
BACK
The DONE softkey changes to UNDO when the checklist
item is already checked
ENGINE
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
CLR
ENGINE
MAP
DCLTR
CHKLIST
Figure 7-3 MFD Softkeys
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 5
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-5
7/12/2005 8:02:59 AM
INTRODUCTION
7.7 MFD PAGE GROUPS
To select a specific page group:
The MFD displays GPS/Navigation flight information
in four main page groups:
• Map (MAP):
Navigation Map Page
Traffic Map Page
Terrain Proximity Page
• Waypoint (WPT) :
Airport Information Page
Intersection Information Page
NDB Information Page
VOR Information Page
User Waypoint Information Page
• Auxiliary (AUX):
Trip Planning Page
Utility Page
GPS Status Page
System Setup Page
System Status Page
• Nearest (NRST):
Nearest Airports Page
Nearest Intersections Page
Nearest NDB Page
Nearest VOR Page
Nearest User Waypoints Page
Nearest Frequencies Page
Neatest Airspaces Page
7-6
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 6
1.
Turn the large FMS knob until the desired page
group is selected.
Active Page group is
highlighted
Currently
selected page is
highlighted
Figure 7-4 Page Group Window
To select a different page within the group:
1.
Turn the small right FMS knob. As the knob is
turned, the bottom right corner of each page
indicates the page group that is currently being
displayed (e.g., MAP or NRST, etc.), the number
of pages available within that group (indicated
by rectangle icons) and the placement of the
current page within that group (indicated by a
solid cyan rectangle icon). The page group and
active page title window are displayed below
the status bar.
Page Group
Active Page Title
Figure 7-5 Page Title Window
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:00 AM
INTRODUCTION
7.8 WORKING WITH MENUS
Much of the operation of the G1000 MFD is
accomplished using a menu interface. The G1000 has
a bezel-mounted dedicated menu key (MENU) when
pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the pilot to access additional features
or make settings changes which specifically relate to the
currently displayed page. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select,
and review options. Some menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’
when there are no options for the page selected.
The main keys which are used in association with all
page group operations are listed below:
• CLR – erases information or cancels an entry.
Press and hold CLR to immediately display the
Navigation Map Page, regardless of the page
currently displayed.
• ENT – accepts a menu selection or data entry.
Approves an operation or completes data entry.
Also confirms information.
• BACK – resets the MFD softkeys to their default
settings (ENGINE, MAP, DCLTR, MODE, VIEW,
etc).
• DCLTR – removes information from the moving
map in a progressive manner with each key-press.
• MENU – displays a context-sensitive list of
options that allows access to additional features or
that allows the pilot to change the settings which
relate to the currently displayed page.
NOTE: Data is entered using the large and small
FMS knob. Practice with them to become efficient at entering data. This will greatly reduce
the amount time spent operating the MFD in
flight.
If there are more options than can be displayed turn
the small or large FMS knob to scroll through the list to
identify them. In all cases, once the menu is displayed the
small or large FMS knob is turned to highlight an item
and the ENT key is pressed to select that item or the CLR
key removes the menu and cancels the operation. Pressing the softkeys does not display a menu or submenu.
Figure 7-6 Menu with Options
Figure 7-7 Menu with No Options
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 7
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-7
7/12/2005 8:03:02 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
7.9 NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
WARNING: Use of the Navigation Map Page for
pilotage navigation is prohibited. The Navigation
Map is intended only to enhance situational
awareness. Navigation is to be conducted
using only current charts, data, and authorized
navigation facilities.
The Navigation Map Page is the first page in the map
page group and provides the pilot with the following
GPS/Navigation display capability:
• Map display showing airports, navaids, airspaces,
land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders,
etc.) with names (labels)
• Map pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name and other
pertinent information)
• TIS Traffic Display
• Obstacle Display
• Map Zoom Range Legend
• Wind Direction and Speed
• Heading Indication
• Aircraft icon representing present position
• Icons for enabled map features
• Track Vector
• Topography Scale
• Fuel Range Ring
• Topography Data
• Terrain Proximity Data
Map Orientation
Airspace Boundries
Interstate
Highways
Own Aircraft
Course Line
Terrain Scale
Map Scale
Legend
Page Groups
Figure 7-8 Navigation Map Page
(not all features shown)
7-8
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:07 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
To select the Navigation Map Page:
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the Map Page
group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Navigation Map Page. The page group name and page
title is displayed below the navigation status
bar; MAP – NAVIGATION MAP. In addition to
turning the large and small FMS knobs, the
Navigation Map Page can be selected from any
page by pressing and momentarily holding the
CLR (DFLT MAP) key.
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE OPERATIONS
The following Navigation Map Page operations can be
performed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Changing the Map Orientation
Selecting a Map Range
Using the Auto Zoom Feature
Identifying Aviation Map Data
Decluttering the Map
Panning the Map
Displaying Topographic Information on the Navigation Map Page
Displaying Terrain Information on the Navigation
Map Page
Displaying Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
MFD Navigation Status Window
Navigation Map Page Options Menu
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 9
CHANGING THE MAP ORIENTATION
See the map setup section of this MFD Pilot’s Guide for
instructions on how to change the map orientation.
SELECTING A MAP RANGE
The Navigation Map Page can be set to 23 different
range settings from 500 feet to 2000 nautical miles. The
current range is indicated in the lower right corner of the
Navigation Map Page and represents the top-to-bottom
distance covered by the map. To change the map range
turn the joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in, turn it
clockwise to zoom out.
USING THE AUTO ZOOM FEATURE
The autozoom feature automatically adjusts the map
from an enroute range of 2000 nm through each lower
range, stopping at a range of 1.5 nm as the aircraft
approaches the destination waypoint. See the Map Setup
section in this MFD Pilot’s Guide for instructions on
enabling/disabling the autozoom feature.
Map Range
Indicator
Figure 7-9 Map Range
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-9
7/12/2005 8:03:08 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
IDENTIFYING AVIATION MAP DATA
The following aviation data is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page:
Airport Symbols:
• Non-towered airports (purple in color).
• Towered airports (blue in color).
• Non-serviced airports (displayed as solid circle
icons). See Appendix F for symbology definitions.
• Serviced airports (displayed as circles with protruding tick marks pointing to the top, bottom,
left, and right portions of the screen).
Classification:
• Unclassified airports (displayed with a question
mark “?” character centered within the airport
symbol).
• Restricted airports (displayed with the letter “R”
centered within the airport symbol).
• Hard surface public airports (displayed with the
airports longest runway oriented according to
the direction in which it runs centered within the
airport symbol).
• Heliports (displayed with the letter “H” centered
within the heliport symbol).
• Soft surface public airports (displayed with a
hollow circle in the center of the airport symbol).
Airspace:
The Navigation Map Page displays airspace as one of
the following colors:
• Blue:
ICAO control area
Class B, Alert area
Caution area, Danger area, Prohibited area
Restricted area, Training area
Unknown area, Warning area
Terminal Zone Airspace (ATZ), Class D
7-10
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 10
• Purple:
Class C
ICAO terminal control area
Terminal radar service area (TRSA)
Mode C area
Military operations area (MOA)
Mode C
Class A
Class E
Line Style:
The Navigation Map Page displays airspace as one of
the following line styles:
• Solid line:
Class C
ICAO control area
ICAO terminal control area
Class B, Terminal radar service area
Mode C, Class A
• Dashed line:
Mode C tower area
Class D, Class E
• Consecutive parallel lines forming a
boundary defining the airspace:
Military operations area (MOA)
Warning area, Alert area, Caution area
Danger area, Prohibited area
Restricted area, Training area
Unknown area, Terminal Zone Airspace (ATZ)
NOTE: See Appendix F for a complete description of the aviation map symbology used on the
Navigation Map Page.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:08 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
DECLUTTERING THE MAP
The Navigation Map Page can be quickly decluttered
by repeatedly pressing the DCLTR softkey until the desired
detail is displayed. The declutter level label is displayed
above the DCLTR softkey. Note that during an instrument
approach, automatic decluttering takes place.
Table 7-1 lists the features that are turned off at each
declutter level.
Map Features always
displayed
Flight plan route lines
Flight plan route waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography data
Terrain Proximity data
Map Borders
Bearing Line
Lightning Strike data (when
Stormscope installed)
Nexrad data
Traffic Symbols
Traffic Labels
NOTE: Some of the map features are automatically removed at certain zoom ranges due to the
map setup configuration for each map item.
NOTE: “SUA” listed in the table below stands
for Special Use Airspace. These are controlled
airspaces, military zones, etc.
No Declutter
Declutter ( –1)
Declutter (-2)
Declutter (-3)
All Map features
are visible
River/Lakes Names Only
User waypoints
Large Airports
Land/Country Text
Large City
Medium City
Small City
----------Freeways
National Highways
Latitude/Longitude Grid
VORs
NDBs
Intersections
SUA Group 0
SUA Group 1
SUA Group 2
Medium Airports
Small Airports
SUA Group 3
SUA Group 4
Runway Labels
Local Highways
Local Roads
Local Road Labels
Railroads
Major Political Boundaries
SUA Group 5
SUA Group 6
SUA Group 7
Obstacles
Table 7-1 Map Declutter Levels
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 11
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-11
7/12/2005 8:03:08 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
MAP PANNING
To pan the map:
Map panning moves the map beyond its current
limits without adjusting the map range. When the
panning function is selected by pushing in the joystick,
a panning arrow flashes on the map display. A window
also appears at the top of the map display showing the
latitude/longitude position of the pointer, the bearing and
distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position,
and the elevation of the land at the position of the pointer.
When the panning arrow crosses an airspace boundary,
the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is displayed at the top of the display. The information
includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
expressed in Mean Seal Level (MSL), and the floor in feet
MSL.
1.
Push in the joystick to display the panning
arrow.
2.
Push in and move the joystick in the general
direction of the desired destination to place
the panning arrow at the destination location. When the panning arrow is placed on an
object, the name of the object is highlighted
(even if the name wasn’t originally displayed
on the map). This feature applies to everything
displayed on the map except route lines. When
any map feature or object is selected on the
map display, features or objects are displayed
in the box located at the top of the display.
From here, the pilot can designate the waypoint
as the Direct-to destination. When the
panning arrow crosses an airspace boundary,
the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is displayed at the top of the display.
3.
To remove the panning arrow and return to
the present position, push in the joystick.
NOTE: The airspace boundary stays highlighted
for approximately four seconds before returning
to normal shading.
7-12
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:09 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Distance,
bearing
and elevation
Latitude and longitude
position of pointer
Panning
Arrow
Figure 7-10 Map Panning
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 13
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-13
7/12/2005 8:03:17 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
DISPLAYING TOPOGRAPHIC DATA ON THE
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
To display topographic data on the Navigation Map Page:
The Navigation Map Page displays various shades of
topography land colors representing the rise and fall of
land elevation similar to aviation sectional charts. The
Navigation Map Page can display a topographic scale
representing various key points of terrain elevation colors
with their associated elevation value labeled.
1.
Press the MAP softkey.
2.
Press the TOPO softkey. Topo data can also
be displayed on the Navigation Map Page by
using the ‘On/Off’ topo data map setup feature.
See the Navigation Map Page setup menu section.
On-screen map
maximum
elevation
On-screen map
minimum
elevation
Aircraft altitude
Maximum
Ground elevation
Minimum
Figure 7-11 Topography Range
7-14
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:18 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
NOTE: Press the TOPO softkey again to remove
topo data from the Navigation Map Page.
When topo data is removed from the page,
the Jeppesen Nav data is presented on a black
background.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN INFORMATION ON THE
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Terrain data can be displayed on the Navigation
Map Page by pressing the TERRAIN softkey. Terrain
symbology (mountain icons) appear next to the map
range in the bottom right corner of the page indicating
the presence of terrain data on the map. See the
Terrain Proximity Page section for a terrain color
interpretation chart.
To display terrain data on the Navigation
Map Page:
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
PAGE
Pressing the TRAFFIC softkey displays Traffic
Information Service (TIS) traffic on the Navigation Map
Page. TIS is a ground-based service providing relative
location of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C transponder
equipped aircraft within a specified service volume.
The TIS ground sensor uses real time track reports to
generate traffic notification. Surveillance data includes
all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage
volume. The G1000 displays up to eight traffic targets
within a 7.5 nautical mile radius, from 3,000 feet below to
3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft. See Appendix E
for a full description of TIS. A traffic symbol appears next
to the map range in the bottom right corner of the display
indicating the presence of traffic data on the map.
To display traffic on the Navigation Map
Page:
1.
Press the MAP softkey.
1.
Press the MAP softkey.
2.
Press the TERRAIN softkey. Press the TERRAIN
softkey again to remove terrain data from the
Navigation Map Page.
2.
Press the TRAFFIC softkey. Press the
TRAFFIC softkey again to remove traffic from the
Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: Traffic and terrain data can also be
displayed by using the ‘On/Off’ Navigation Map
Page option. See the Navigation Map Page setup
section for details.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 15
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-15
7/12/2005 8:03:18 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
MFD DATA BAR
MAP SETUP
The MFD Navigation Status Window displays four,
user-configurable fields which can display the following
data:
The first option is ‘Map Setup’ which is used to configure the Navigation Map Page including map orientation,
land data enable/disable, Jeppesen data enable/disable,
automatic zoom, airspace boundaries, and text size.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bearing to next waypoint (BRG)
Distance to next waypoint (DIS)
Desired track to next waypoint (DTK)
En-route safe altitude (ESA)
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Ground Speed (GS)
Maximum Safe Altitude (MSA)
Track angle error (TKE)
Track angle (TRK)
Vertical speed required (VSR)
Cross track error (XTK)
Currently selected MFD page title
MAP GROUP OPTIONS
Figure 7-12 MFD Data Bar (default)
NOTE: Instructions on changing a data field on
the MFD Data Bar is given in the System Setup
Section.
Figure 7-13 Map Group Setup Options
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE OPTIONS MENU
The Navigation Map Page can be customized using options listed in the Navigation Map Page menu. To display
the menu, press the MENU key (with the Navigation Map
Page displayed). Two options are available: Map Setup,
and Measure Bearing/Distance.
7-16
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:20 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Orientation
To change the map orientation:
There are four map orientation selections: North up,
Track up, DTK up, and HDG up.
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘ORIENTATION’ field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
orientation and press the ENT key.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
• North up fixes the top of the map to a north heading.
• Track up adjusts the top of the map display to the
current ground track.
• Desired Track Up (DTK up) fixes the top of the
map display to the desired course.
• Heading Up (HDG up) fixes the top of the map
display to the current aircraft heading.
NOTE: The Navigation Map Page orientation
default setting is ‘North Up’.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 17
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-17
7/12/2005 8:03:21 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Auto Zoom
Land Data
The automatic zoom feature automatically adjusts
the map range from 2000 nm through each lower
range, stopping at 1.5 nm as the aircraft approaches the
destination waypoint.
The Navigation Map Page can display background land
data (roads, lakes, borders, etc). The background land
data can also be removed from the display (turned off).
To enable/disable automatic zoom:
To enable/disable land data:
1.
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘AUTO
ZOOM’ field.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘LAND
DATA’ field.
5.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’
and press the ENT key.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’
and press the ENT key.
6.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
3.
4.
7-18
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:21 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Track Vector
Wind Vector
The Navigation Map Page can display a track vector as
a dashed cyan line segment with an arrowhead attached
to the end, extended to a predicted location in 60 seconds
along the current aircraft track. The track vector is useful
in minimizing track angle error.
The wind vector box is displayed in the upper right
corner of the Navigation Map Page and displays wind
direction and speed (in knots). Wind direction is
indicated by a 360 degree pointing arrow.
To enable/disable the track vector:
To enable/disable the wind vector box:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘WIND
VECTOR’ field.
5.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’. Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’. Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
6.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
1.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 19
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-19
7/12/2005 8:03:21 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Nav Range Ring
Topo Data
The Nav range ring shows the direction of travel
(ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range of
the Nav compass is determined by the map range, 125 feet
(500 feet map range) to 500 nm (2000 nm map range).
Topographic data can be enabled or disabled on the
Navigation Map Page using the ‘TOPO DATA’ setting. The
topo data range is the maximum map range that topo data
is displayed.
To enable/disable the Nav range ring:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
To enable/disable topo data and to select a
topo data range:
1.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘NAV
RANGE RING’ field.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TOPO
DATA’ field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected option.
The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
TOPO ranges are from Off to 2000 nm.
7.
To change the TOPO range setting, turn the
small FMS knob to display the range list.
8.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range and press the ENT key.
9.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’. Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
NOTE: When topographic data is removed from
the Navigation Map Page, all cartographic data
is automatically removed and the Jeppesen Nav
data is presented on a black background.
7-20
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:22 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Topo Range
Terrain Data
The topo range setting enables or disables the
topography range box located in the lower right corner of
the Navigation Map Page.
Terrain data can be enabled or disabled on the
Navigation Map Page using the ‘TERRAIN DATA’ setting.
A data range can also be selected. The data range is the
maximum map range that terrain data is displayed.
To enable/disable the topo range box:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
To enable/disable terrain data and to select
a terrain data range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TOPO
Range’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TERRAIN DATA’ field.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected option.
The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
TERRAIN ranges are from Off to 2000 nm.
7.
To change the TERRAIN range setting, turn the
small FMS knob to display the range list.
8.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range and press the ENT key.
9.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 21
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-21
7/12/2005 8:03:22 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
Obstacle Data
Fuel Range Ring (Fuel RNG) (RSV)
Obstacle data can be enabled or disabled on the
Navigation Map Page using the ‘OBSTACLE DATA’ setting.
A data range can also be selected. The data range is the
maximum map range that terrain data is displayed.
The Navigation Map Page can display a fuel range
ring which shows the flight distance that the aircraft has
remaining. A dashed green circle indicates the transition
range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the
range of all fuel, including the reserve fuel. If only reserve
fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow
circle.
To enable/disable obstacle data and to
select a terrain data range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
To enable/disable the fuel range ring and to
select a fuel range time:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
2.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘OBSTACLE DATA’ field.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Map’
group and press the ENT key.
4.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected option.
The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
OBSTACLE ranges are from Off to 50 nm.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘FUEL
RNG (RSV)’ field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
7.
To change the OBSTACLE range setting, turn
the small FMS knob to display the range list.
6.
8.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range and press the ENT key.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected option.
The flashing cursor highlights the fuel reserve
time field. The time indicated is the time the
aircraft can fly with remaining fuel on board.
9.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page
7.
To change the reserve fuel time, turn either
the large or small FMS knob to enter a time
(00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default
setting is 00:45 minutes. Press the ENT key.
8.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
7-22
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:22 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
TRAFFIC GROUP
The display of traffic information on the Navigation
Map Page closely resembles TCAS display symbology.
Traffic is only displayed on the Navigation Map Page if
aircraft heading data is available. If heading is not
available, traffic advisories are displayed as non-bearing
banners on the Navigation Map Page.
To enable/disable traffic data on the Navigation Map Page:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Traffic’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘On’ or
‘Off’.
5.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
The ‘Traffic’ mode selects which traffic is displayed (all
traffic, traffic and proximity advisories, or traffic advisories
only). The traffic symbol is the symbol used to depict the
type of traffic:
• Traffic Advisories (TA) – Yellow
• Proximity Advisories (PA) – White
• Other – White
Figure 7-14 Traffic Group Options
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 23
Proximity Advisories (PAs) are displayed as solid white
Tigers. PAs are defined as traffic within the 4.0 nm range,
within ± 1200 ft. of altitude separation, and are not traffic
advisories (TAs).
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-23
7/12/2005 8:03:23 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
To select a traffic mode:
To select a traffic symbol zoom range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Traffic’
group Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Traffic’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TRAFFIC MODE’ field.
4.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
option.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘TRAFFIC SMBL’ field. Traffic symbol zoom
ranges are from Off to 300 nm.
5.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
option.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
6.
7.
7-24
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:23 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
The traffic label displays the altitude separation above
or below the symbol and the vertical speed sense arrow to
the right of the symbol.
To select a traffic label zoom range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Traffic’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘TRAFFIC LBL’ field. Traffic label zoom ranges
are from Off to 300 nm.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
option.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
AVIATION GROUP OPTIONS
• Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)the active flight plan waypoint label size sets the size at
which the active flight plan names appear on the display
(none, small, medium, and large). The zoom range sets
the maximum range at which active flight plan waypoints
appear on the display (off - 2000 nm).
• Large, Medium, and Small Airports (LARGE APT,
MEDIUM APT, SMALL APT) - The airport label size sets
the size at which the large, medium, or small airport
names size appear on the display. The zoom range sets
the maximum range at which the airports appear on the
display:
• Large: off - 500 nm
• Medium: off - 300 nm
• Small: off - 100 nm
• Intersection, Non-Directional Beacon, and VOR
Waypoints (INT WAYPOINT, NDB WAYPOINT, VOR
WAYPOINT) - The INT, NDB, and VOR label size sets the
maximum range at which the navaids names appear on
the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at
which the navaids appear on the display:
• INT: off - 30 nm
• NDB: off - 30 nm
• VOR: off - 300 nm
• Active Flight Plan (ACTIVE FPL)- the active flight
plan zoom range sets the maximum range at which the
active flight plan magenta line is displayed on the display
(off - 2000 nm).
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 25
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-25
7/12/2005 8:03:24 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
• Airspace Boundaries (CLASS B/TMA, CLASS C/TCA,
and CLASS D) - The airspace zoom range sets the maximum
range at which the three classes of airspace appear on the
display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at which
the airspace boundaries appear on the display:
• CLASS B: off - 500 nm
• CLASS C: off - 500 nm
• CLASS D: off - 300 nm
• “Other” Airspace Boundaries (RESTRICTED, MOA
(Military), OTHER AIRSPACE, and TFR (temporary flight
restrictions)- the other airspace boundary zoom range sets
the maximum range at which restricted, MOA, and other
(training, caution, danger, warning and alert areas) airspace boundaries are displayed
•
•
•
•
RESTRICTED: off - 500 nm
MOA (MILITARY): off - 500 nm
OTHER AIRSPACE: off - 500 nm
TFR; (only present when GDL 69 is installed): off
- 2000 nm
To select an aviation group item range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Aviation’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Figure 7-15 Aviation Group Options
7-26
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 26
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:25 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
To select an aviation group item text size:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Aviation’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘ACTIVE FPL’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
text size.
6.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected text
size.
7.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
LAND GROUP OPTIONS
• Highways, Roads, and Railroads (FREEWAY, LOCAL
HWY, LOCAL ROAD, RAILROAD) - The highway and
road zoom range sets the maximum range at which highways, roads, and railroads appear on the display:
•
•
•
•
•
FREEWAY: off - 800 nm
NATIONAL HWY: off - 80 nm
LOCAL HWY: off - 30 nm
LOCAL ROAD: off - 15 nm
RAILROAD: off - 30 nm
• Cities and Towns (LARGE CITY, MEDIUM CITY,
SMALL CITY) - The cities and town label size sets the
maximum range at which city and town names appear on
the display. The zoom range sets the maximum range at
which cities and towns appear on the display:
• LARGE CITY (approximate populations greater
than 200,000): off - 1500 nm
• MEDIUM CITY (approximate populations greater
than 50,000): off - 200 nm
• SMALL CITY (approximate populations greater
than 5,000): off - 50 nm
• Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON) - the LAT/LON label
size sets the size at which latitude/longitude labels appear
on the display (none, small, medium, and large). The
zoom range sets the maximum range at which LAT/LON
waypoints appear on the display (off - 2000 nm).
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 27
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-27
7/12/2005 8:03:26 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
• States and Provinces, Rivers and Lakes, and
User Waypoints (STATE/PROV, RIVER/LAKE, USER
WAYPOINT) - the label range sets the maximum range
at which the three categories appear on the display. The
zoom range sets the maximum range at which the three
categories appear on the display:
• STATE/PROV: off - 1500 nm
• RIVER/LAKE off - 500 nm
• USER WAYPOINT: off - 300 nm
To select a land group item range:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Land’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
range. Press the ENT key to accept the selected
option.
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
To select a land group item text size:
Figure 7-16 Land Group Options
7-28
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 28
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Page Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the ‘Land’
group. Press the ENT key. The cursor flashes
on the ‘LAT/LON’ field.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
option.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
text size. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected option
6.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:28 AM
NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
MEASURE BEARING/DISTANCE
The second map setup option is ‘Measure Bearing/
Distance’ which provides a quick and easy method for
determining the bearing and distance between any two
points on the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: Pressing the ENT key at any location with
the ‘Measure’ option enabled allows bearing and
distance from the newly selected position to be
acquired.
To measure bearing and distance between
two points:
1.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to highlight the
‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field and press
the ENT key. An on-screen reference pointer
is displayed on the map display at the aircraft’s
present position.
3.
Move the joystick to place the reference
pointer at the desired location. The bearing
and distance is displayed at the top of the map
display. Elevation at the current position is also
displayed.
4.
To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option,
push in the joystick or select ‘Stop Measuring’
from the page menu options.
Press the MENU key (with the Navigation Map
Page displayed).
Bearing,
Distance, and
Elevation
Information
Pointer
Latitude and
Longitude
Reference
Pointer
Figure 7-17 Measuring Bearing and Distance
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 29
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-29
7/12/2005 8:03:34 AM
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
7.10 TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
CAUTION: Use of the Traffic Map to maneuver
the airplane to avoid traffic is prohibited. The
Traffic Information System (TIS) is intended
for advisory use only. TIS is intended only to
help the pilot to visually locate traffic. It is the
responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver
to avoid traffic.
The Traffic Map Page is the second page in the Map
Group and displays the following information:
• Current aircraft location, surrounding Traffic
Information System (TIS) traffic, and range marking rings.
• The current traffic mode (OPERATE, STANDBY).
• A traffic alert message (FAILED, DATA FAILED,
NO DATA, UNAVAILABLE)
• Traffic display banner (AGE 00:, TRFC COAST,
TA OFF Range, TRFC RMVD, TRFC FAIL, NO
TRFC DATA, TRFC UNAVAIL, TRAFFIC)
To select the Traffic Map Page:
1.
Select the MAP group of pages. Turn the small
FMS knob to the right to select the Traffic Map
Page.
Traffic Mode
Map Range
Traffic, Out of
Range
Own Aircraft
Proximate,
Known Altitude
Traffic
Figure 7-18 Traffic Map Page
7-30
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 30
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:37 AM
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
TIS SYMBOLOGY
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE OPERATIONS
TIS traffic is displayed on the Traffic Map Page
according to TCAS symbology. A Traffic Advisory (TA)
symbol is displayed as a solid yellow circle (or half circle
on the outer range ring if the traffic is outside the range
of the dedicated traffic page). All other traffic is displayed
as a hollow white Tiger. Altitude deviation from the user’s
aircraft altitude is displayed above the target symbol if
they are above own aircraft altitude, and below the symbol
if they are below own aircraft altitude. Altitude trend is
displayed as an up arrow (+500 ft/min), down arrow (500 ft/min), or no symbol if less than 500 ft/min rate in
either direction. Other symbols:
• Other Traffic – this symbol represents traffic
detected within the selected display range that
does not generate a TA.
• Traffic Advisory (TA) – this symbol is generated
when traffic meets the advisory criteria described
previously.
• Traffic Ground Track is indicated on the Traffic
Map Page by a “target track vector”. The track
vector line is projected from the traffic advisory
symbol and is drawn at any angle necessary to
represent the current track of the traffic advisory
data.
Power-Up Test
The TIS interface performs an automatic test during
power-up. If the system passes the power-up test, the
standby screen is displayed on the Traffic Map Page. If the
system passes the power-up test, and the aircraft is
airborne, traffic is displayed on the Traffic Page in the
operating mode.
If the system fails the power up test, the ‘NO DATA’,
‘DATA FAILED’, or ‘FAILED’ message is displayed.
Contact your Tiger service center or Garmin dealer
for corrective action if the ‘DATA FAILED’, or ‘FAILED’
message is displayed. The ‘FAILED’ message indicates
the GTX 33 transponder has failed. The ‘DATA FAILED’
message indicates data is being received from the GTX 33
but a failure was detected in the data stream. The ‘NO
DATA’ message indicates that data is not being received
from the GTX 33.
Changing the Map Range
To change the map range:
1.
Turn the joystick clockwise to zoom out, or turn
the joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in. Map
ranges are 2 nm, 6 nm, and 12 nm.
NOTE: Traffic Information Service (TIS) is not
available in all areas.
NOTE: See Appendix F for traffic symbol descriptions.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 31
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-31
7/12/2005 8:03:37 AM
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
Operating Mode
To switch between operating modes:
Once the aircraft is airborne (determined by system
configuration at the time of installation) the system
switches from standby mode to operating mode. The
G1000 displays ‘OPERATE’ in the upper left hand corner
of the display and begins to display traffic on the Traffic
or Map Page. The TIS Traffic Advisory (TA) should
alert the crew to use additional vigilance to identify the
intruding aircraft. Any time the traffic symbol becomes
a yellow circle or a voice warning is announced, conduct
a visual search for the intruder. Maintain visual contact
to ensure safe operation.
1.
Press the MODE softkey.
2.
Press the STBY or ON softkey to switch between
modes. ‘STANDBY’ or ‘OPERATE’ is displayed
in the status box located in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page OR:
3.
Press the MENU key. The page menu is
displayed with ‘Standby Mode’ or ‘Operate
Mode’ highlighted. Press the ENT key on the
desired selection.
Once the aircraft is on the ground (determined by
system configuration at the time of installation) the
system switches from operating mode to standby mode. The
Traffic Map Page displays ‘STANDBY’.
• STANDBY – when the Traffic Map Page displays
‘STANDBY’ in the status box located in the upper
left corner of the Traffic Map Page, the TIS system
is in standby mode and cannot display traffic data.
• OPERATE – when the Traffic Map Page displays
‘OPERATE’ in the status box located in the left
corner of the Traffic Map Page, the TIS system
is in operational mode and available to display
traffic on the Traffic or Map Page.
The pilot can switch between the standby (STBY) and
operate (ON) modes of operation to manually override
automatic operation using the page menu or softkeys.
7-32
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 32
TIS Audio Alert
A TIS audio alert is generated whenever the number
of TAs on the Traffic Map Page display increases from one
scan to the next. The limiting to TAs only reduces the
amount of “nuisance” alerting due to proximate aircraft.
For example, when the first TA is displayed, the pilot is
alerted audibly. So long as a single TA aircraft remains on
the TIS display, no further audio alert is generated. If a
second (or more) TA aircraft appear on the display, a new
audio alert is sounded. If the number of TAs on the TIS
display decreases and then increases, a new audio alert is
sounded. The TIS audio alert is also generated whenever
TIS service becomes unavailable. The volume of the audio alert (including the choice between a male or female
voice) is configured during installation. The following
TIS audio alerts are available:
• “Traffic” - TIS traffic alert is received.
• “Traffic Not Available” - TIS service is not available
or out of range.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:38 AM
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
TIS Traffic Status
The MFD indicates the following TIS traffic status to
the pilot.
Traffic Banner
• AGE - if traffic data is not refreshed within 6
seconds, an age indicator (i.e., ‘AGE 00:06’) is
displayed in the lower left corner of the display
(when displaying traffic). After another 6
seconds, if data is still not received, the traffic
is removed from the display. The pilot should
be aware that the quality of displayed traffic is
reduced in this condition.
• TRFC COAST - the ‘TRFC COAST’ (traffic
coasting) banner located above the AGE timer
indicates that displayed traffic is held even though
the data is stale. The pilot should be aware that
the quality of displayed traffic is reduced in this
condition.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 33
• TRFC RMVD - the ‘TRFC RMVD’ banner indicates
that traffic has been removed from the display due
to the age of the data being too old to “coast” (for
the time period of 12-60 seconds from the last
receipt of a TIS message). The pilot should be
aware that traffic may be present but not shown.
• TA OFF - the ‘TA OFF’ scale banner displayed in
the lower left corner of the display indicates that
a traffic advisory is outside the selected display
range. The traffic advisory off range banner is
removed when the traffic advisory is within the
selected display range.
• TRAFFIC - on the PFD, when the system receives
a traffic advisory a flashing ‘TRAFFIC’ alert is
displayed in the upper left hand portion of the
display. The PFD inset map also automatically
displays traffic data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-33
7/12/2005 8:03:38 AM
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
7.11 TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
CAUTION: Use of Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance is prohibited.
The Terrain Proximity Map is intended only to
enhance situational awareness. It is the pilot’s
responsibility to provide terrain avoidance at all
times.
The Terrain Proximity Page displays the following:
• Current aircraft location
• Range marking rings (25 nm, 25/50 nm, 50/100
nm, and 100/200 nm)
• Heading Box (North Up, Track Up, DTK Up,
HDG Up). Heading on the Terrain Proximity Page
displays ‘HDG Up’ map data unless there is no
valid heading
• Terrain
• Terrain Range - Indicates the terrain elevation in
colors relative to the aircraft altitude (Figure 7-20)
• Obstacles
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the
aircraft latitude is greater than 75 degrees north
or 60 degrees south.
Page Orientation
Obstacles
Range Marking Ring
Current Aircraft
Location
Terrain Range
View Selection
Figure 7-19 Terrain Proximity Page
7-34
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 34
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:41 AM
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE OPERATIONS
There are two terrain/obstacle viewing options available
(relative to the position of the aircraft), a radar-like ARC
(120°) display and a 360° default display.
To change the map range on the Terrain
Proximity Page:
1.
To change the viewing mode between 360°
and ARC:
1.
Select the Terrain Proximity Page
2.
Press the VIEW softkey. Press the ARC
softkey.
3.
To return to the 360 degree viewing display
press the 360 softkey OR:
4.
Press the MENU key. The page menu is
displayed with ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’
highlighted. Press the ENT key on the desired
selection.
Turn the joystick clockwise zoom out or turn
the joystick counter-clockwise zoom in. Map
ranges are 25 nm, 25/50 nm, 50/100 nm, and
100/200 nm.
Aircraft Altitude
100' Threshold
1000' AGL
Figure 7-20 Terrain Scale
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 35
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-35
7/12/2005 8:03:44 AM
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
DISPLAYING OBSTACLE DATA
Navigation Map Display Conditions
The Terrain Proximity Page displays obstacle data
with heights greater than 200 feet Above Ground Level
(AGL) located at their geographical position location throughout the world. Obstacles are displayed
in three levels. The G1000 will adjust colors on the
Terrain Proximity Page automatically as the aircraft
altitude changes. The display color patterns are as
follows:
• SAFE
• CAUTION
• WARNING
GRAY-Safe
Obstacle data is displayed in gray when the
obstacle height (MSL) is greater than 1000 feet below
the current aircraft altitude.
The Map Setup Page Menu has ‘OBSTACLE’ and
‘TERRAIN feature On/Off options. The Terrain Proximity
Page displays or does not display obstacles on the Navigation Map Page based on the selection of each as summarized in the table below:
TERRAIN
FEATURE
OBSTACLE
FEATURE
TERRAIN
PROXIMITY PAGE
OFF
OFF
NO OBSTACLES
DISPLAYED
OFF
ON
SAFE, CAUTION, AND
WARNING OBSTACLES
DISPLAYED
ON
OFF
CAUTION AND
WARNING OBSTACLES
DISPLAYED
ON
ON
SAFE, CAUTION, AND
WARNING OBSTACLES
DISPLAYED
YELLOW-Caution
Obstacle data is displayed in yellow when the
obstacle height is 100 feet below MSL the current
aircraft altitude to 1000 feet below the current aircraft
altitude.
RED-Critical
Obstacle data is displayed in red when the obstacle
height is at or above 100 feet Mean Sea Level (MSL)
below the current aircraft altitude.
Obstacle Shapes
Note: Obstacles are only displayed at certain map
zoom ranges, on certain map fields, and will only
be displayed if an obstacle database is loaded
on the SD card.
Note: The table above is only for the Navigation
Map Page. The Terrain Proximity Page always
shows ONLY caution and warning obstacles.
Obstacle shapes and defining criteria are found in
Appendix F.
7-36
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 36
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:44 AM
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
7.12 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
To select a Direct-to destination:
The “Direct-to” function provides a quick method
of setting a course to a destination waypoint. Once a
Direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-topoint course line from the present position to the selected
Direct-to destination. If the course change is greater than
30 degrees, a course extension is offset from the present
position to allow a standard rate turn to intercept the
Direct-to course line. Note that the CDI (HSI) needle will
not be immediately centered in this case. Direct-to course
guidance is provided until the Direct-to is cancelled or
replaced by a new destination, and the navigation data is
displayed on the Navigation Map Page
Identifier
Facility Name
City
Symbol
Flight Plan Field
Nearest Airport
Map Orientation
1.
Press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to page
is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to enter the first letter
of the destination waypoint identifier. The
destination waypoint may be an airport, VOR,
NDB, intersection or user waypoint, as long as
it is in the database or stored in memory as a
user waypoint. Turn the large FMS knob to the
right to move the cursor to the next character
position.
3.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to spell out the rest of
the waypoint identifier.
4.
Press the ENT key to confirm the identifier. The
‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
5.
Press the ENT key to activate a Direct-to course
to the selected destination.
If navigating to a waypoint and the aircraft moves off
course, the Direct-to feature can be used to re-center the
CDI (HSI) needle and proceed to the same waypoint.
To re-center the CDI (HSI) needle to the
same destination waypoint:
Map of the
Selected
Waypoint
1.
Map Range
Bearing
Distance
Region
Latitude/
Longitude
Direct-to
Course
Activate Field
Press the Direct-to key, followed by pressing the ENT key twice. NOTE: If navigating
an approach with the missed approach point
(MAP) as the current destination, re-centering
the CDI (HSI) needle with the Direct-to key
cancels the approach.
Figure 7-21 Direct-to Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 37
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-37
7/12/2005 8:03:47 AM
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION OPERATIONS
Selecting a Direct-to Waypoint
In addition to selecting a Direct-to waypoint using
an identifier, a Direct-to waypoint can be selected in the
following ways:
• by facility or city name
• from the active flight plan
• from the nearest airports list
• from a waypoint field, waypoint page, or map
highlight shortcut
To select a Direct-to destination by facility
name or city:
1.
Press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to Page is
displayed with the waypoint identifier field
highlighted.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the facility
or city name field.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knob to enter
the facility or city location of the desired
waypoint.
Selecting a Direct-to Destination by Facility or
City Name
In addition to selecting a destination by identifier, the
Direct-to Page also allows the selection of airports, VORs
and NDBs by facility or city name. If duplicate entries
exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries
can be viewed by continuing to turn the small FMS knob
during the selection process.
7-38
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 38
NOTE: the “Spell N Find” feature selects the first
entry in the database based on the characters
that have been entered to that point.
4.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to scroll
through any additional database listings for
the selected facility name or city. The small
FMS knob can be used to scroll backwards if
the desired waypoint was passed up.
5.
Press the ENT key to confirm the selected
waypoint, and ENT again to activate a Directto.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:48 AM
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
Selecting a Direct-to Destination from the
Active Flight Plan
Any waypoint contained in the flight plan may be
selected as a Direct-to destination from the Direct-to
Waypoint Page when navigating an active flight plan.
To select a Direct-to destination from the
active flight plan:
1.
Press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to Waypoint
Page is displayed with the waypoint identifier
field highlighted.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the flight
plan ‘FPL’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
showing all waypoints in the active flight
plan.
4.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to scroll
through the list and highlight the desired
waypoint.
5.
Press the ENT key to confirm the selected
waypoint, and ENT again to activate a Directto.
Figure 7-22 Flight Plan Waypoint Direct-to
Figure 7-23 Manual Course Direct-to
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 39
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-39
7/12/2005 8:03:53 AM
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
Selecting the Nearest Airport as a Direct-to
Destination
The Direct-to Page always displays the nearest airports
(from the present position) on the NRST field.
To select a nearby airport as a Direct-to
destination:
1.
Press the Direct-to key. The Direct-to Page is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the nearest airport field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
showing up to nine nearby airports.
4.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to scroll
through the list and highlight the desired airport.
5.
Press the ENT key to confirm the selected
waypoint, and ENT again to activate a Directto.
• The waypoint displayed on the VOR waypoint
page.
• The waypoint displayed on the NDB waypoint
page.
• The waypoint displayed on the intersection
waypoint page.
• The waypoint displayed on the user waypoint
page.
Shortcuts
Shortcuts are available when using the Direct-to key,
allowing the pilot to bypass the use of the small and large
FMS knobs. Any time a waypoint field is highlighted
and then the Direct-to key is pressed, the highlighted
waypoint will be the direct-to waypoint.
The following are “candidates” for Direct-to
waypoints:
Figure 7-24 Nearest Airport Direct-to
• The highlighted waypoint when map panning
with the MFD map panning pointer.
• The highlighted waypoint identifier field on any
page.
• The airport waypoint page airport when on
the airport information, arrival, departure, or
approach pages.
7-40
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 40
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:55 AM
DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION
Canceling Direct-to Navigation
Specifying a Course to a Waypoint
Once a Direct-to is activated, the G1000 provides
navigation guidance to the selected destination until the
Direct-to is either replaced with a new Direct-to or flight
plan, or cancelled, or if the unit is turned off.
During a Direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle
course to the selected destination. The course to the
destination, using the course field on the Direct-to Page
can be manually defined.
To cancel a Direct-to:
To manually define the Direct-to course:
1.
Press the Direct-to key to display the Direct-to
Page.
2.
Press the MENU key to display the Direct-to
options menu.
3.
With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press
the ENT key. If a flight plan is still active, the
G1000 resumes navigating the flight plan
along the closest leg.
1.
Press the Direct-to key.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
the destination waypoint.
3.
Press the ENT key to confirm the selected
waypoint, then turn the large FMS knob to
highlight the course field.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
the desired course and press the ENT key.
5.
Press the ENT key again to begin navigation
using the selected destination and course.
Figure 7-25 Canceling Direct-to Navigation
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 41
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-41
7/12/2005 8:03:56 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
7.13 FLIGHT PLANS
The data fields are user-selectable and can be changed
to display the following:
The G1000 can create up to 99 different flight plans
with up to 31 waypoints in each flight plan. The flight
plan (FPL) page group consists of three pages:
• Active Flight Plan
• Flight Plan Catalog
• Vertical Navigation
The Flight Plan Pages are used to create, edit and copy
flight plans. The Vertical Navigation Page is used to create
a three-dimensional profile which guides the aircraft to a
final (target) altitude at a specified location.
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE
The Active Flight Plan Page provides information
and editing functions for the flight plan currently in
use for navigation. Once a Direct-to or flight plan has
been activated, the Active Flight Plan Page shows the
following:
• Each waypoint for the flight plan (or a single
waypoint for a Direct-to), along with the desired
track (DTK) and distance of each leg (DIS).
• Active leg information with enroute safe altitude
(ESA) for the specified leg.
• Active FPL information with enroute safe altitude
(ESA)
• Flight plan information showing remaining leg
and remaining total distance, and enroute safe
altitude for the entire route.
7-42
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 42
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cumulative Distance (CUM)
Distance (DIS)
Desired Track (DTK)
Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE OPTIONS
The following options are available for the Flight Plan
Page:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Activate Leg
Store Flight Plan
Invert Flight Plan
Delete Flight Plan
Load Departure
Load Arrival
Load Approach
Remove Arrival
Remove Departure
Remove Approach
Closest Point of FPL
Change Fields
Restore Defaults
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:03:57 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Departure Airport
Identifier
Destination
Airport
Identifier
Active Leg
Active Leg
Information
Estimated Safe
Altitude
Flight Plan
Information
Flight Plan
Page Group
Figure 7-26 Active Flight Plan Page
Figure 7-27 New Flight Plan
Active Flight
Plan Page
Create a New Flight Plan
‘Create New Flight Plan’ creates a new flight plan.
To create a new flight plan:
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 43
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan
Catalog Page options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Create
New Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
4.
A blank flight plan page appears for the first
empty storage location. Turn the small and
large FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the
departure waypoint and press the ENT key.
5.
Repeat step number 4 to enter the identifier
for each additional flight plan waypoint.
6.
Once all waypoints have been entered, press
the FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan
Catalog Page.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-43
7/12/2005 8:04:02 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
To edit a flight plan:
Activate Leg
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the ENT key.
To activate a flight plan along a specific
leg:
4.
To add a waypoint to the flight plan: Turn the
large FMS knob to select the point where the
new waypoint is to be added. (If an existing
waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is
placed directly in front of this waypoint.) Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the new waypoint and press the
ENT key.
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the FMS
knob to activate the cursor and turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the desired destination
waypoint.
2.
Press the MENU key, select the ‘Activate Leg’
option from the page menu and press the ENT
key.
3.
A confirmation window is displayed. With
‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
5.
6.
7-44
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 44
To delete a waypoint from the flight plan: Turn
the large FMS knob to select the waypoint
to delete and press the CLR key to display a
remove waypoint confirmation window. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to remove
the waypoint. To cancel, turn the large FMS
knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
key.
Once all changes have been made, press the
FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog
Page.
Activate Leg selects the highlighted leg as the “active
leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently used for
navigation guidance).
NOTE: The leg can also be activated by pressing
the ACT LEG softkey.
Figure 7-28 Activate Flight Plan Leg Confirmation
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:02 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Store Flight Plan
To store an existing flight plan:
Whenever an approach, departure or arrival is loaded
into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along
with a header line describing the instrument procedure
the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the
flight plan remains active (unless an instrument procedure
is activated) which may be done when the procedure is
loaded or at a later time. Flight plans can also be stored
with an approach, departure or arrival. The active flight
plan is erased when the system is turned off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated.
1.
From the Flight Plan Page, press the FMS knob
to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Page options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Store
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key. The flight
plan is stored in the next available position in
the flight plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog
Page.
4.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to
store the flight plan.
When storing flight plans with an approach, departure
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from
the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically
updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure or arrival procedure
is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
flight plan and an alert is displayed.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 45
Figure 7-29 Store Flight Plan Confirmation
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-45
7/12/2005 8:04:03 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Invert Flight Plan
Delete a Waypoint
‘Invert Fight Plan’ reverses the active flight plan. After
traveling along a flight plan, the route can be reversed for
navigation guidance back to the original departure point.
To invert and (activate) an existing flight
plan:
1.
From the Flight Plan Page, press the FMS knob
to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Page options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Invert
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key. The original flight plan remains intact in its flight plan
catalog storage location.
4.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to
invert the flight plan.
To delete a waypoint from an existing flight
plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the ENT key.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the waypoint
to delete and press the CLR key to display a
‘REMOVE WAYPOINT’ confirmation window.
5.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to
remove the waypoint. To cancel the delete
request, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
6.
Once all changes have been made, press the
FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan Page.
Figure 7-32 Remove Waypoint Confirmation
Figure 7-30 Invert Flight Plan
Figure 7-31 Invert Flight Plan Confirmation
7-46
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 46
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:05 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Load a Departure
‘Load Departure’ allows a published departure
procedure for the departure airport to be loaded into a
flight plan. It also replaces the current departure with a
new selection. When using a Direct-to, the G1000 uses
the nearest airport as a reference when displaying available
departures. A departure can also loaded using the PROC
key or by pressing the LD DP softkey.
To select a departure procedure for the
departure airport:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
2.
Highlight ‘Load Departure’ from the list and
press the ENT key.
3.
A window is displayed listing the available
departures for the departure airport. Turn
either the small or large FMS knob to select
the desired departure and press the ENT key.
4.
A window may appear listing runways for the
departure. Turn the small or large FMS knob to
select the desired runway and press the ENT
key. This window is not displayed for every
departure.
5.
A second window is displayed listing available transitions for the departure. Turn either
the small or large FMS knob to highlight the
desired transition waypoint and press the ENT
key.
6.
With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
The departure flight plan is displayed as part
of the overall flight plan and is placed in front
of the enroute flight plan.
Figure 7-33 Loading Departure Options
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 47
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-47
7/12/2005 8:04:07 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Load an Arrival
‘Load Arrival’ allows a published standard terminal
arrival route (STAR) for the destination airport to be
loaded into a flight plan. It also replaces the current arrival
with a new selection. An arrival can also be loaded using
the PROC key or by pressing the LD STAR softkey.
To select an arrival for a Direct-to or flight
plan destination airport:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
2.
Highlight the ‘Load Arrival’ option and press
the ENT key.
3.
A window is displayed listing the available
arrivals for the destination airport. Turn either
the small or large FMS knob to select the
desired arrival and press the ENT key.
4.
A second window is displayed listing available
transitions for the arrival. Turn either the small
or large FMS knob to highlight the desired
transition waypoint and press the ENT key.
5.
A third window is displayed listing available
arrival runways. Turn either the small or large
FMS knob to highlight the desired runway and
press the ENT key.
6.
7-48
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 48
Figure 7-34 Selecting an Arrival
With ‘LOAD’ highlighted, press the ENT key.
The arrival flight plan is displayed as part of
the overall flight plan and is placed after the
enroute flight plan.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:10 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Load an Approach
‘Load Approach’ allows for the selection of a published
instrument approach for the destination airport. It also
replaces the current approach with a new selection. In
many cases, it is more convenient to select approaches using the PROC key, or by pressing the LD APR softkey.
This allows for the original flight plan to continue
navigating until cleared for the approach, but keeps the
approach available for quick activation when needed.
‘Activate’ adds the approach to the flight plan and begins
navigating the approach course.
To select an approach for a Direct-to or
flight plan destination airport:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
2.
Highlight the ‘Load Approach’ option and press
the ENT key.
3.
A window is displayed listing the available
approaches for the destination airport. Turn
either the small or large FMS knob to highlight
the desired approach and press the ENT key.
4.
A second window is displayed listing available transitions for the approach. Turn either
the small or large FMS knob to highlight the
desired transition waypoint and press the ENT
key. (The vectors option assumes the pilot will
receive vectors to the final course segment
of the approach and will provide navigation
guidance to intercept this final course.)
5.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 49
Figure 7-35 Flight Plan with Loaded Approach
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Load?
or Activate?’ and press the ENT key. ‘Load’
adds the approach to the flight plan without
immediately using the approach for navigation
guidance.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-49
7/12/2005 8:04:12 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Remove a Departure, Arrival, or Approach
• ‘Remove Departure’ deletes the current DP from
the active flight plan.
• ‘Remove Arrival’ deletes the current STAR from
the active flight plan.
• ‘Remove Approach’ deletes the currently selected
approach from the active flight plan.
To remove an approach, arrival or departure from the active flight plan:
Closest Point of Flight Plan Feature
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and
closest distance at which a flight plan passes from a
reference waypoint. It can also be used to create a new
user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest
to a chosen reference waypoint.
To determine the closest point along the
active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan Page
options.
2.
2.
Select the ‘Remove Approach’, ‘Remove Arrival’
or ‘Remove Departure’ option and press the
ENT key.
Select the ‘Closest Point of FPL’ option from
the Active Flight Plan Page options and press
the ENT key.
3.
3.
A confirmation window is displayed listing the
procedure the pilot is about to remove. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key. To cancel
the remove request, turn the large FMS knob
to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
A window is displayed with the reference
waypoint field highlighted. Turn the small and
large FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the
reference waypoint and press the ENT key.
4.
The G1000 displays the location, lat/lon, bearing (BRG), and distance (DIST) to the closest
point along the flight plan from the selected
reference waypoint. To create a user waypoint
at this location and add it to the flight plan,
highlight ‘LOAD’ and press the ENT key. The
name for the new user waypoint is derived from
the identifier of the reference waypoint.
Figure 7-36 Removing an Approach
7-50
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 50
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:14 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Change Fields
Shortcuts
‘Change Fields’ allows for the default fields of DTK
(distance) and DIS (distance) to be changed to one of the
following:
A number of shortcuts are available to save time when
using the Active Flight Plan Page. These shortcuts speed
the process of removing approaches, departures and
arrivals, and aid in selecting a specific flight plan leg for
navigation guidance.
On the preceding page, options to remove approaches,
departures and arrivals were introduced. This process
may also be completed using the CLR key, as described
below.
•
•
•
•
•
•
CUM (cumulative distance)
DIS (distance)
DTK (desired track)
ESA (estimated safe altitude)
ETA (estimated time of arrival)
ETE (estimated time enroute)
To change either the DTK or the DIS field:
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the MENU key to display the Active Flight
Plan Page options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Change
Fields’ and press the ENT key.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘DIS’
or the ‘DTK’ field.
4.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
display a list of options.
5.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
select the desired item and press the ENT key.
Press the FMS knob to remove the cursor.
To remove an approach, departure or
arrival using the CLR key:
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the small FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the title
for the approach, departure or arrival you wish
to delete. Titles appear in white directly above
the procedure’s waypoints.
Press the CLR key to display a confirmation
window. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT
key to remove the selected procedure.
This same process may also be used to remove
individual waypoints from the active flight plan.
3.
Restore Defaults
To remove a waypoint using the CLR key:
Restore Defaults returns the ‘DTK’ and ‘DIS’ fields to
‘DTK’ and ‘DIS’.
1.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the small FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
With the Active Flight Plan Page displayed,
press the MENU key to display the Active Flight
Plan Page options window.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the identifier for the waypoint you wish to delete.
3.
Press the CLR key to display a confirmation
window.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Restore
Defaults’ and press the ENT key.
4.
With “OK” highlighted, press ENT to remove
the selected waypoint.
To restore the DTK and DIS fields on the
Active Flight Plan Page:
1.
2.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 51
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-51
7/12/2005 8:04:14 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG PAGE
FLIGHT PLAN CATALOG PAGE OPERATIONS
The Flight Plan Catalog Page is the second flight planning
page and provides flight planning information and editing
capability. Once a Direct-to or flight plan has been
activated, the Active Flight Plan catalog Page displays the
following:
The following operations can be performed from the
Flight Plan Catalog Page:
• Number of flight plans in memory.
• Flight Plan List.
• Flight Plan information box containing departure,
destination, total distance, and estimated safe
altitude information.
To display the Flight Plan Catalog Page:
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
1.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Activate a Flight Plan
Stop Navigating a Flight Plan
Invert and Activate a FPL
Create a New Flight Plan
Copy a Flight Plan
Delete a Flight Plan
Delete All Flight Plans
Sort Flight Plans by Comment
Flight Plan Catalog Page Options
Edit a Flight Plan
Flight Plans
in Memory
Flight Plan List
Figure 7-38 Flight Plan Catalog Page Options
Flight Plan
Information
Figure 7-37 Flight Plan Catalog Page
7-52
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 52
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:17 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Activate a Flight Plan
Stop Navigating a Flight Plan
Once a flight plan is defined using the Flight Plan
Catalog Page it can be activated for navigation. Activating
the flight plan overwrites any previous information at that
location.
To activate (begin to navigate) an existing
flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Page options.
4.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Activate
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
5.
An ‘Activate stored flight plan?’ confirmation
window is displayed. With OK highlighted,
press the ENT key to activate the flight plan. To
cancel the flight plan activation, turn the large
FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT key.
To stop navigating a flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Page options.
4.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’ and press the ENT
key. A ‘Delete Flight Plan’ confirmation window
is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the
ENT key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the
flight plan deletion, turn the large FMS knob
to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
Figure 7-40 Delete Flight Plan Confirmation
Figure 7-39 Activate Stored Flight Plan Confirmation
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 53
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-53
7/12/2005 8:04:19 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Invert and Activate a Flight Plan
‘Invert & Activate FPL’ allows the active flight plan to
be inverted and activated for navigation.
To invert and activate a flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Page options.
4.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL’ and press the
ENT key.
5.
An ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’
confirmation window is displayed. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to inverts
and activate the flight plan. To cancel the
operation, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
7-54
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 54
Create a New Flight Plan
‘Create New Flight Plan’ creates a new flight plan.
To create a new flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan
Catalog Page options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Create
New Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
4.
A blank flight plan page is displayed for the
first empty storage location. Turn the small
and large FMS knobs to enter the identifier
of the departure waypoint and press the ENT
key.
5.
Repeat step number 4 to enter the identifier
for each additional flight plan waypoint.
6.
Once all waypoints have been entered, press
the FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan
Catalog Page.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:19 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Copy a Flight Plan
3.
‘Copy Flight Plan’ copies the active flight plan to a
Flight Plan Catalog location. The copy function is useful
for duplicating the active flight plan before making
changes.
To copy a flight plan to another flight plan
catalog location:
1.
2.
3.
A ‘Delete all waypoints in flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to delete the active
flight plan. To cancel, turn the large FMS knob
to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT key.
To delete a flight plan from the Flight Plan
Catalog Page:
From the Flight Plan Catalog press the FMS
knob to activate the cursor, turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the flight plan the pilot
wishes to copy, then press the MENU key to
display the Flight Plan Catalog Options.
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the
FMS knob to activate the cursor, turn the
large FMS knob to highlight the flight plan to
delete.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Copy
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
Press the MENU key to display the Flight Plan
Catalog options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
4.
A ‘Delete flight plan?’ confirmation window
is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the
ENT key to delete the flight plan. To cancel,
turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT key.
A ‘Copy to flight plan?’ confirmation window
is displayed. With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the
ENT key to copy the flight plan. To cancel, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT key
Delete a Flight Plan
‘Delete Flight Plan’ removes all waypoints from the
active flight plan. (Deleting a flight plan does not delete the
waypoints contained in the flight plan from the database
or user waypoint memory.) Once the pilot is finished with
a flight plan, it can easily be deleted from the Flight Plan
Catalog Page or the Active Flight Plan Page.
To delete a flight plan from the Active
Flight Plan Page:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU key to display the Active Flight Plan
options window.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete
Flight Plan’ and press the ENT key.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 55
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-55
7/12/2005 8:04:19 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Delete All Flight Plans
3.
‘Delete All’ removes all flight plans from memory at
one time.
To delete all flight plans:
1.
2.
From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the
MENU key to display the Flight Plan Catalog
Page options.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Delete
All’ and press the ENT key. A ‘Delete all flight
plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to
delete all flight plans. To cancel, turn the large
FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the
ENT key.
To edit a flight plan:
1.
Press the FPL key and turn the small FMS knob
to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired flight plan and press the ENT key.
4.
To add a waypoint to the flight plan: Turn the
large FMS knob to select the point where the
new waypoint is to be added. (If an existing
waypoint is highlighted, the new waypoint is
placed directly in front of this waypoint.) Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the new waypoint and press the
ENT key.
5.
To delete a waypoint from the flight plan: Turn
the large FMS knob to select the waypoint
to delete and press the CLR key to display a
remove waypoint confirmation window. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT key to remove
the waypoint. To cancel, turn the large FMS
knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
key.
6.
Once all changes have been made, press the
FMS knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog
Page.
Sort By Comment/Number
‘Sort List By Number/Sort List by Comment’ selects
between a Flight Plan Catalog Page sorted numerically by
the flight plan number or sorted alphanumerically based
upon the comment assigned to each flight plan. When
one option is selected, the other option is displayed on
the Flight Plan Catalog options window.
To sort the catalog listing by number or
comment:
1.
From the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the
MENU key to display the Flight Plan Catalog
Page options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Sort List
By Number’ or ‘Sort List By Comment’ and
press the ENT key. This will change flight plan
ordering.
7-56
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 56
A ‘Proceed?’ confirmation window is displayed.
With OK highlighted, press the ENT key to
change flight plan ordering. To cancel, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:20 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
Point-n-Shoot Flight Plan Creation Feature
4.
If the selected waypoint is not a Jeppesen
waypoint (Airport or Navaid) or user waypoint,
the G1000 creates a user waypoint (beginning
with ‘USR000’) at the point and inserts it into
the flight plan.
5.
The pilot can also create and insert a user
waypoint by pointing at a blank spot on the
nav map and pressing ‘LD WPT’. This creates
a user waypoint at the map cursor and inserts
it into the flight plan.
The “Point-n-Shoot” flight plan creation feature is activated using the Navigation Map Page and the Active Flight
Plan Page.
To create a Point-n-Shoot flight plan:
1.
Push the Joystick to turn the map cursor on.
2.
Select the Active Flight Plan Page and press
the FMS knob to highlight the list of waypoints.
Waypoints are inserted ABOVE the highlighted
row if the cursor is on. Waypoints are inserted
at the END of the flight plan if the cursor is
off.
3.
To insert waypoints, use the map cursor to
point at the desired waypoint (it will become
visually enhanced when it is properly pointed
to), and press the LD WPT softkey. Existing user
waypoints are inserted in the same manner.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 57
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-57
7/12/2005 8:04:20 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) PAGE
The Vertical Navigation Page allows the creation of a
three-dimensional profile which guides the aircraft from
it’s present position and altitude to a final (target) altitude
at a specified location. This is helpful when you like to
descend to a certain altitude near an airport or climb to
an altitude before reaching a route or Direct-to waypoint.
Once the profile is defined, message alerts and additional
data on the Navigation Map Page keep the pilot informed
of progress.
NOTE: An active flight plan or Direct-to must be
entered in order to utilize VNAV.
NOTE: To display terrain or topo data on the Vertical Navigation Map Page, press the MAP softkey.
Press the TOPO, TERRAIN, or LTNG softkey. Press
the same softkey to remove the displayed data
from the Vertical Navigation Page.
To create a vertical navigation profile:
1.
Select the Vertical Navigation Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
Figure 7-41 Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Page
7-58
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 58
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:26 AM
FLIGHT PLANS
3.
With the ‘TARGET ALTITUDE’ field highlighted,
turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
the target altitude and press the ENT key.
With the profile set, the vertical speed required (VSR)
is displayed. Expect the following to occur when using the
vertical navigation feature:
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Above
Wpt’ (AGL) or ‘MSL’, and press the ENT key.
‘Above Wpt’ uses the altitude of a destination
airport. ‘MSL’ lets you set a specific target altitude for any waypoint category: airport, VOR,
NDB, intersection or user waypoint.
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
a distance from the target reference waypoint
and press the ENT key. If the target altitude
should occur at the target reference waypoint,
enter a distance of zero.
At one minute prior to reaching the initial descent
point, the message ‘APPR VPROF - Approaching VNAV
Profile’ is displayed as a PFD alert. The descent (or climb)
angle also locks to prevent changes in speed from altering
the profile. If selected, the vertical speed required (VSR)
readout on the default NAV and map pages shows the
desired vertical speed to maintain the proper descent (or
climb) angle. At 500 feet above (or below, for a climb) the
target altitude, an ‘APPR TRG ALT’ - Approaching Target
Altitude” message is provided. The VSR readout on the
Navigation Map Page is blanked out at this point.
6.
Turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Before’ or
‘After’, and press the ENT key. This setting
designates whether the offset distance defines
a point before you reach the target reference
waypoint or after you reach the waypoint.
7.
When using a flight plan, the target reference waypoint itself can be specified from the
waypoints contained in the flight plan. By
default, the last waypoint in the flight plan
is selected. To select a different waypoint,
turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
waypoint and press the ENT key.
8.
The default profile utilizes a 400 foot-perminute descent rate. To change the rate, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘Target
Vertical Speed’ field and use the small and
large FMS knobs to enter a new rate. Press the
ENT key when finished.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 59
Figure 7-42 Approaching VNAV Profile Message (PFD)
Figure 7-43 Approaching Target Altitude Message (PFD)
VNAV Page Menu Options
The VNAV messages are not enabled until the ‘VNAV
Messages On?’ option is enabled from the VNAV Page
Menu Options. To display the page menu, press the
MENU key (with the VNAV Page displayed). The VNAV
Page Options Menu also allows the pilot to restore VNAV
page defaults.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-59
7/12/2005 8:04:30 AM
PROCEDURES
7.14 PROCEDURES
To select a departure:
1.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘Select Departure’ and press the ENT key.
2.
The ‘Departure Loading’ page is displayed with
the list of departure options for the departure
airport. Turn either the small or large FMS
knobs to enter the desired departure. Press
the ENT key.
3.
‘Load?’ is highlighted. Press the ENT key. The
departure becomes part of the flight plan.
ARRIVALS AND DEPARTURES
Based upon the active flight plan or Direct-to
destination, the Procedures Page provides direct access to
approaches, departures and arrivals. In either case, the
departure and destination airports must have associated
published procedures. The Procedures Page is displayed
by pressing the PROC key.
To select an arrival:
Figure 7-44 Procedures Page
NOTE: Pilots should be familiar with the section
of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM)
regarding the use of GPS.
7-60
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 60
1.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘Select Arrival’ and press the ENT key.
2.
The procedures page is displayed. Turn the
small and large FMS knobs to enter the desired
arrival.
3.
The cursor moves to the ‘TRANSITION’ field.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired transition waypoint and press the ENT
key. The approach vectors option assumes you
will receive vectors to the final course segment
of the approach and will provide navigation guidance relative to the final approach
course.
NOTE: Vector departures are not part of the
aviation database.
NOTE: The approach vectors option assumes
the pilot will receive vectors to the final course
segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance on the final approach segment
and extension only.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:32 AM
PROCEDURES
APPROACHES
The G1000 allows you to fly non-precision and
precision approaches to airports with published instrument
approach procedures. All available approaches are part of
the Jeppesen database stored internally in each PFD and
MFD.
The G1000 provides both lateral and vertical guidance
for ILS precision approaches on the PFD, and lateral
guidance for non-precision Localizer, GPS, and VOR and
ADF overlay approaches. GPS position information is
also provided on the mapping portion of the MFD and the
inset map window on the PFD for pilot reference only.
G1000 NAVIGATIONAL GUIDANCE FOR
APPROACHES
The G1000 supports all ARINC 424 leg types that have
associated waypoint fixes. The G1000 uses the following
leg types as part of the Jeppesen database:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AF - DME arc to a fix
CF – Course to a fix
DF – Direct to a fix
FA – Course from fix to an altitude
FC – Course from fix to distance
FD – Course from fix to DME distance
FM – Course from fix to manual termination
HA – Hold terminating at altitude
HF – Hold terminating at a fix
HM – Hold with manual termination
IF – Initial fix
PI – Procedure turn to course intercept
RF – Constant radius turn to fix
TF – Track between two fixes
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 61
Each of these legs is displayed on the active flight plan.
The G1000 does not support the following legs:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CA – Course to an altitude
CD – Course to a DME distance
CI – Course to an intercept
CR – Course to a radial
VA – Heading vector to an altitude
VD – Heading vector to DME distance
VI – Heading vector to an intercept
VM – Heading vector to manual termination
VR – Heading vector to a radial
NOTE: The G1000 does not provide steering guidance for hold legs and procedure turns (HA, HF,
HM and PI leg types). However, these legs are
drawn on the map and are shown in the flight
plan.
NOTE: The pilot is responsible for determining
database currency for approaches.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-61
7/12/2005 8:04:32 AM
PROCEDURES
SELECTING APPROACHES
3.
In order to select an approach, there must be an active
flight plan or direct-to which terminates at an airport with
a published approach.
To select an approach:
1.
Press the PROC key to display the Procedures
Page. Turn the large FMS knob to highlight
‘Select Approach’ and press the ENT key. The
approach procedure window appears.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
approach and press the ENT key. The transition
window appears.
NOTE: The approach vectors option assumes
the pilot will receive vectors to the final course
segment of the approach and will provide navigation guidance on the final approach segment
and extension only.
7-62
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 62
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired transition and press the ENT key. ‘LOAD?’ is now
highlighted. Press the ENT key. Activate the
approach once the approach clearance is
received.
NOTE: ‘LOAD?’ will add the procedure to the
flight plan without immediately using it for
navigation guidance. This allows you to continue
navigating the original flight plan, but keeps the
procedure available on the Active Flight Plan
Page for quick activation when needed. ‘Activate?’ overrides the enroute portion of the active
flight plan, proceeding directly to the approach
portion.
NOTE: You can also load an approach by pressing
the APR softkey.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:33 AM
PROCEDURES
Not all approaches in the database are approved for
GPS use. As you select an approach, a ‘GPS’ designation
to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures
will not have this designation, meaning the GPS receiver
can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only.
If the GPS receiver cannot be used for primary guidance,
you must use the appropriate receiver for the selected
approach (e.g., VOR or ILS). The final course segment of
ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the
Nav receiver to the proper frequency and selecting that
Nav receiver on the CDI.
Figure 7-45 Selecting an Approach Procedure
A selected approach can be activated or loaded.
Activating the approach also initiates automatic CDI
scaling transition as the approach progresses. In many
cases, it can be easiest to “Load” the full approach while
still some distance away, enroute to the destination airport.
Later, if vectored to final, use the following steps to select
‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ – which makes the inbound
course to the FAF waypoint active. Otherwise, activate
the full approach using the ‘Activate Approach?’ option.
Figure 7-46 Selecting an Approach Transition
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 63
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-63
7/12/2005 8:04:36 AM
PROCEDURES
To activate an approach procedure:
1.
With an approach loaded in the active flight
plan, press the PROC key to display the Procedures Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘Activate
Approach’.
3.
Press the ENT key.
CAUTION: The G1000 is designed to only
complement printed approach plates and vastly
improve situational awareness throughout the
approach. The approach must be flown as it
appears on the approach chart.
7-64
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 64
Figure 7-47 Activating an Approach Procedure
NOTE: Specific GPS approach examples are given
in the G1000 Pilot’s Guide Training Material.
They cane be used in conjunction with the G1000
PC training simulator software for practice in
learning what types of approaches the G1000
supports.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:36 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
7.15 WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
The Waypoint Page Group (WPT) provides information for the thousands of airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections, runways, frequencies and procedures stored on
the SD card. In addition, a user waypoint information
page displays information for up to 1,000 user-created
waypoints. The Waypoint Group consists of the following pages:
• Airport Information Page (INFO)
• Departure Information Page (DP)
• Arrival Information Page (STAR)
• Approach Information Page (APR)
• Intersection Information Page
• NDB Information Page
• VOR Information Page
• User Waypoint Information Page
PAGE SELECTION
The Airport Information Page can be selected by
pressing the INFO softkey or by the procedure given
below. The Departure, Arrival, and Approach pages must
be selected from the Airport Information Page using their
corresponding softkeys (DP, STAR, APR). To select any
remaining page:
1. From any page, press and hold the CLR key to select
the Navigation Map Page.
2. Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’ page
group. ‘WPT’ appears in the page group icon
located in the lower right corner of the display.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
‘WPT’ page.
Waypoint
Identifier
Airport
Runway
Information
Field
Airport
Frequency
Information
Field
Figure 7-48 Airport Information Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 65
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-65
7/12/2005 8:04:41 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
AIRPORT INFORMATION PAGE (INFO)
The Airport Information page shows the following
detailed information for the selected airport:
• Airport Information
• Runways
• Frequencies
Airports may be selected by identifier, facility name or
city location.
To enter a waypoint facility name or city
location:
1.
Select the Airport Information Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
Airport Information Page Operations
3.
To enter a waypoint identifier:
Turn the large FMS knob to select the facility
name or location (city) field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
character.
5.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the next
character field.
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the facility name or
location is selected, then press the ENT key.
7.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
1.
Select the desired ‘WPT’ page and press the
FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the first
character of the waypoint’s identifier.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the next
character field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
character.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the identifier is
selected, then press the ENT key.
6.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
7-66
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 66
Once the identifier, facility name or location is entered,
the airport information page displays information for the
selected airport. As you enter an identifier, facility name
or location, the “SpellNFind”™ feature scrolls through
the database, displaying those waypoints matching the
characters you have entered to that point. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility name or location,
additional entries may be viewed by continuing to turn
the small FMS knob during the selection process. If
duplicate entries exist for an entered identifier, a duplicate
waypoint page is displayed once you select the identifier
(by pressing the ENT key).
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:42 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
To select a facility name or city location,
where duplicate entries exist:
Facility Field
Location Field
1.
Select the desired facility name or location.
2.
As you spell the facility name or location, using
the small and large FMS knobs, the SpellNFind
feature selects the first entry in the database
based upon the characters you have entered
up to that point.
3.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to scroll
through any additional database listings for the
selected facility name or location. You can scroll
backwards with the small FMS knob if you scroll
past the desired facility name or location.
4.
Press the ENT key to select the desired facility
name or location.
5.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
To select a waypoint identifier from a list
of duplicates:
1.
Select the desired airport or navaid identifier.
2.
A duplicate waypoints window is displayed.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the desired
waypoint and press the ENT key.
3.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
Figure 7-49 Waypoint Facility or City Location
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 67
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-67
7/12/2005 8:04:44 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
Airport Runway Information Field
The Airport Runway Information field displays runway
designations, length, surface type and lighting for the
selected airport. A map image of the runway layout and
surrounding area is also displayed on the Airport Runway
Information Page. The map image range is displayed in
the lower left corner and is adjustable using the joystick.
For airports with multiple runways, information for each
runway is available.
To display information for each additional
runway:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor on
the Runway designation field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the next
runways for the selected airport.
4.
Continue turning the small FMS knob to select
the desired runway.
5.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
7-68
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 68
Rotate the joystick counterclockwise to select a lower
range and rotate it clockwise to select a higher range.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used
on the Airport Runway Information field:
• Type – Usage type: Public, Military or Private
• Surface – Runway surface types include: Hard,
Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown or Water
• Lighting – Runway lighting types include: No
Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown or Frequency (for pilot-controlled lighting)
Figure 7-50 Runway Information Field
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:45 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
AIRPORT FREQUENCY INFORMATION FIELD
The Airport Frequency Information Field displays radio
frequencies and frequency types for the selected airport, as
well as sector and altitude restrictions (where applicable).
If the selected airport has a localizer-based approach, the
localizer frequency is also listed on the Airport Frequency
Information Field. The Airport Frequency Information
Field may be used to quickly select and tune a COM or
NAV frequency.
To scroll through the frequency list and
tune to a desired frequency on the list:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to scroll
through the list, placing the cursor on the
desired frequency. If there are more frequencies in the list than can be displayed on the
screen, a scroll bar along the right-hand side
of the screen indicates where you are within
the list.
3.
Press the ENT key to place the selected frequency in the standby field of the ‘COM’ or
‘NAV’ window.
4.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
If a listed frequency has sector or altitude restrictions,
the frequency is preceded by an info designation.
To view usage restrictions for a frequency:
1.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to place the
cursor on the info designated frequency.
2.
Press the ENT key to display the restriction
information.
3.
To return to the Airport Frequency field, press
the ENT key.
Figure 7-51 Frequency Information Field
Some listed frequencies may include designations for
limited usage, as follows:
• ‘TX’ – transmit only RX - receive only
• ‘PT’ – part time frequency
• ‘i’ – additional information exists, press the ENT
key
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 69
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-69
7/12/2005 8:04:47 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
Airport Frequency Descriptions
AIRPORT INFORMATION PAGE OPTIONS
The Airport Frequency Information field uses the
following descriptions and abbreviations:
The following Airport Information Page
options are available by pressing the MENU key (with the
Airport Information Page displayed):
• Frequency — Communication frequencies which
may include restrictions:
• Approach
• Arrival
• Class B
• Class C
• CAT
• Departure
• TMA
• Terminal
• TRSA
Communication frequencies without restrictions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ATIS
ASOS
AWOS
Center
Clearance
Gate
Control
Ground
Helicopter
Multicom
Pre-taxi
Radar
Ramp
Other
Tower
Unicom
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Load Approach
View Departure Airport
View Destination Airport
View Recent Airport List
View Info
View Departure
View Arrival
View Approach
To select an option:
1.
Press the MENU key while on the Airport Information Page.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired
option.
3.
Press the ENT key to perform the selected option
operation.
Navigation Frequencies:
• ILS
• LOC
7-70
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 70
Figure 7-52 Airport Information Page Menu
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:51 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
DEPARTURE INFORMATION PAGE (DP)
The Departure Information Page shows the available
Departure Procedures (DPs; also referred to as SIDs)
for the selected airport. Where multiple runways or
transitions are associated with the departure procedure,
that information can also be displayed. A map image
provides a layout diagram for each departure, runway
and transition. To display the Departure Information Page
press the DP softkey.
To scroll through the available departures:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor on
the Departure procedure name field.
3.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to display a
window of available departures for the selected
airport. Continue turning the small FMS knob
to select the desired departure.
4.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
runway field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window of
available runways. Continue turning the small
FMS knob to select the desired runway.
6.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
Transitions field.
7.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning the
small or large FMS knob to select the desired
transition.
8.
Press the ENT key. To remove the flashing
cursor, press the FMS knob.
NOTE: ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway field,
indicating the departure procedure applies to all
runways. For airports with parallel runways, ‘B’
may appear at the end of the runway designation
to indicate the departure procedure applies to
both runways.
A departure can be loaded from the Departure Information Page.
To load a departure procedure from the
Departure Information Page:
1.
Select the desired departure, runway and transition using the steps described previously.
2.
Press MENU to display the Airport Departure
Page Options.
3.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to highlight
‘LOAD DEPARTURE’ and press the ENT key.
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. Press
the FPL key to return to the Airport Departure
Information Page.
Figure 7-53 Departure Page Menu
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 71
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-71
7/12/2005 8:04:53 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
ARRIVAL INFORMATION PAGE (STAR)
The Arrival Information Page shows the available
Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) procedures for the
selected airport. Where multiple transitions or runways
are associated with the arrival procedure, that information
may also be displayed. A map image provides a layout
diagram for each arrival, transition and runway. To
display the Airport Arrival Information Page press the
STAR softkey.
NOTE: ‘ALL’ may appear in the runway field,
indicating the arrival procedure applies to all
runways. For airports with parallel runways, ‘B’
may appear at the end of the runway designation
to indicate the arrival procedure applies to both
runways.
To scroll through the available arrivals:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor on
the ‘ARRIVAL’ procedure name field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available arrivals for the selected airport.
Continue turning the small or large FMS knob
to select the desired arrival.
4.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
‘TRANSITION’ field.
5.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning the
small or large FMS knob to select the desired
transition.
6.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
runway field.
7.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window of
available runways. Continue turning the small
or large knob to select the desired runway.
8.
Press the ENT key. To remove the flashing
cursor, press the FMS knob.
7-72
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 72
Figure 7-54 Arrival Page Menu
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:55 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
An arrival can be loaded from the Arrival Information
Page.
To load an arrival procedure from the
Arrival Information Page:
1.
Select the desired arrival, transition and runway
using the steps described previously.
2.
Press MENU to display the Arrival Information
Page Options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘LOAD
ARRIVAL’ and press the ENT key.
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. Press
FPL to return to the Airport Arrival information
Page.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 73
Loading an arrival procedure into the active flight plan
does NOT automatically alter the active flight plan leg or
Direct-to navigation. Once loaded, the arrival is simply
placed at the end of the flight plan. To manually transition
to a loaded arrival, see the procedure below (an alternative
method would be to remove the first occurrence of the
destination airport identifier).
To manually transition to a loaded arrival
procedure:
1.
From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the FMS
knob to activate the cursor and scroll down
through the list of loaded arrival waypoints.
2.
When the desired loaded arrival waypoint
is highlighted, press the Direct-to key, then
press ENT to highlight the ‘Activate’ prompt
(note that any loaded arrival waypoint may be
selected).
3.
Press ENT again to confirm activate
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-73
7/12/2005 8:04:55 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
APPROACH INFORMATION PAGE
5.
The Approach Information page shows the available
approach procedures for a selected airport. Where
multiple initial approach fixes (IAFs) and feeder routes are
available, that information may also be displayed. A map
image provides a layout diagram for each approach and
transition. To display the Airport Approach Information
Page press the APR softkey.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available transitions. Continue turning the
small or large FMS knob to select the desired
transition or select ‘VECTORS’ for guidance
only along the final course segment of the
approach. Press the ENT key. NOTE: the cursor
moves through the remaining fields but they
are not selectable.
6.
To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS
knob.
To scroll through the available approaches
and transitions:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to place the cursor on
the ‘APPROACH’ procedure name field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display a window
of available approaches for the selected airport.
Continue turning the small or large FMS knob
to select the desired approach.
4.
Press the ENT key. The cursor moves to the
transitions (TRANS) field.
7-74
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 74
NOTE: Not all approaches in the database
are approved for GPS use. As you select an
approach, a GPS designation to the right of the
procedure name indicates the procedure can be
flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures
do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver may be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. VOR approaches, for example,
must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to the
proper frequency and coupling the NAV receiver
to the HSI located on the PFD.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:04:55 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
An approach can be loaded from the Airport Information Page.
To load an approach from the Airport
Approach Information Page:
1.
Select the desired approach and transition.
2.
Press MENU to display the Approach Information Page Options.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘LOAD
APPROACH’ and press the ENT key.
4.
The Active Flight Plan Page is displayed. Press
the FPL key to return to the Airport Information
Approach Page.
5.
‘Load and Activate’ allows you to load the
selected approach into the active flight plan
and activate navigation guidance to the
approach transition.
NOTE: To load and activate an approach from
the Approach Information page, follow the steps
above, but select ‘Load and Activate’ in step
#3.
Figure 7-55 Approach Page Menu
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 75
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-75
7/12/2005 8:04:57 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
INTERSECTION INFORMATION PAGE
The Intersection Information Page displays the
following information for a selected intersection:
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection
Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR used to define the intersection.
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Intersection Identifier and Symbol
Name
General location
Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
• Nearest VOR/VORTAC/VOR/DME (identifier,
symbol, bearing, distance)
Intersection Name and
Symbol
General Location
Intersection
Lat/Lon
Nearest VOR;
identifier, symbol,
bearing,distance
Selected
Intersection
Figure 7-56 Intersection Information Page
7-76
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 76
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:03 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
Intersection Information Page Operations
To change the map range, turn the joystick to the
left to select a lower range, turn it to the right to select
a higher range. NOTE: Intersections can only be selected
by identifier.
To select the Intersection Information Page:
1.
From any page, press and momentarily hold
CLR to select the Navigation Map Page. You
may skip this step if you are already viewing
any of the Map Group pages.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’
page group. ‘WPT’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Intersection Information Page.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 77
To select an Intersection by using an Identifier:
1.
With the Intersection Information Page displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the identifier and press the ENT
key.
3.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-77
7/12/2005 8:05:03 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
NDB INFORMATION PAGE
The NDB Information Page displays the following
information for a selected Non-directional beacon:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
NDB Identifier and Symbol
Name
Closest city
General location
Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
• Magnetic Variation in degrees
• Frequency in kilohertz (kHz)
• Nearest airport (identifier, symbol, bearing, distance)
NDB Identifier
NDB Symbol
Name
Closest City
General Location
Magnetic
Variation
NDB Frequency
NDB Symbol
Nearest Airport;
identifier, symbol,
bearing,distance
Map of
Surrounding Area
Figure 7-57 NDB Information Page
7-78
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 78
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:09 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
NDB Information Page Operations
To select a NDB by using a Name:
The NDB Information Page allows the following
operations:
1.
With the NDB Information Page displayed,
press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knobs to highlight the name
field
3.
Turn the large and small FMS knobs to enter
a name and press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
• NDB selection by identifier
• NDB selection by name
• NDB selection by closest city
To change the map range, turn the joystick to the left to
select a lower range, turn it to the right to select a higher
range.
To select the NDB Information Page:
1.
2.
3.
To select a NDB by using the closest city:
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page. You may skip
this step if you are already viewing any of the
Map Group pages.
1.
With the NDB Information Page displayed,
press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knobs to highlight the closest city field
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’
page group. ‘WPT’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the large and small FMS knobs to enter
a city and press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the NDB
Information Page.
To select a NDB by using an Identifier:
1.
With the NDB Information Page displayed,
press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the identifier and press the ENT
key.
3.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 79
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-79
7/12/2005 8:05:10 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
NDB Information Page Options
The following NDB Information Page Options are
available by pressing the MENU key (with the NDB
Information Page displayed):
• ‘View Recent NDB List’ which allows you to view
the most recent NDB list.
To view the most recent NDB list:
1.
Select the NDB Information Page and press
MENU to display the NDB Information Page
Options. ‘View Recent NDB List’ is highlighted.
2.
Press the ENT key. Turn the small FMS knob
to select an NDB from the list and press the
ENTER key. The selected NDB is now the active
user NDB.
7-80
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 80
Figure 7-58 NDB Page Menu
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:11 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
VOR INFORMATION PAGE
The VOR Information Page displays the following information for a selected VOR:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Identifier and Symbol
Name
Closest city
General location
Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds), MGRS or UTM/UPS
• Magnetic Variation in degrees
• Frequency in megahertz (MHz)
• Nearest airport (identifier, symbol, bearing, distance)
VOR Identifier
VOR Symbol
Name
Closest City
Magnetic
Variation
General Location
VOR Type
Latitude/Longitude
VOR Frequency
VOR Symbol
Nearest Airport;
identifier, symbol,
bearing,distance
Map of
Surrounding Area
Figure 7-59 VOR Information Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 81
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-81
7/12/2005 8:05:16 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
VOR Information Page Operations
To select a VOR by using an Identifier:
The VOR information page allows the following
operations:
1.
With the VOR Information Page displayed, press
the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the identifier and press the ENT
key.
3.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
• VOR selection by identifier
• VOR selection by name
• VOR selection by closest city
The map range is adjustable by rotating the joystick.
To change the map range, rotate the joystick counterclockwise to select a lower range and rotate it clockwise to
select a higher range.
To select a VOR by using a Name:
1.
With the VOR Information Page displayed, press
the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page. You may skip
this step if you are already viewing any of the
Map Group pages.
2.
Turn the large FMS knobs to highlight the name
field
3.
Turn the large and small FMS knobs to enter a
name and press the ENT key.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’
page group. ‘WPT’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
To select the VOR Information Page:
1.
2.
3.
7-82
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 82
Turn the small FMS knob to select the VOR
Information Page.
To select a VOR by using the closest city:
1.
With the VOR Information Page displayed, press
the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn the large FMS knobs to highlight the closest city field
3.
Turn the large and small FMS knobs to enter
a city and press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:16 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
VOR Information Page Options
The following VOR Information Page Options are
available by pressing the MENU key (with the VOR
Information Page displayed):
• ‘View Recent VOR List’ which allows you to view
the most recent VOR list.
To view the most recent VOR list:
1.
Select the VOR Information Page and press
MENU to display the VOR Information Page
Options. ‘View Recent VOR List is highlighted’.
2.
Press the ENT key. Turn the small FMS knob to
select a VOR from the list and press the ENT
key. The selected VOR is now the active user
VOR.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 83
Figure 7-60 VOR Page Menu
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-83
7/12/2005 8:05:17 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
USER WAYPOINT INFORMATION PAGE
The G1000 allows the storage of up to 1,000 userdefined waypoints. The User Waypoint Information
Page displays the waypoint name (up to six characters
long), identifier and radial from two reference waypoints,
distance from one reference waypoint, along with the user
waypoints latitude/longitude position.
User Waypoint Name
User Waypoint Symbol
User Comment
General Location
Latitude/Longitude
User Waypoint Name
and Symbol
Reference Waypoints
User Waypoint List
Waypoint Statistics
Figure 7-61 User WPT Information Page
7-84
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 84
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:24 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
The following data is displayed on the User Waypoint
Information Page:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Identifier
Comment
General location
Latitude/longitude
A reference waypoint with identifier, radial, and
distance
• A second reference waypoint with identifier and
radial
• A list of all user waypoints
• Statistics of the number of user waypoint slots
used and available
User Waypoint Information Page Operations
The following operations can be performed from the
User Waypoint Information Page:
• Creating user waypoints (by current location,
entered latitude/longitude position, reference
waypoint specifications, or map pointer location).
• Modifying user waypoint information (by comment, latitude/longitude position, or reference
waypoint information)
• Renaming user waypoints
• Deleting user waypoints
To select the User Waypoint Information
Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘WPT’
page group. ‘WPT’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the User
Waypoint Information Page.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 85
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-85
7/12/2005 8:05:24 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints may be created from the User Waypoint
Information Page or the Navigation Map Page. To create a
new user waypoint from the User Waypoint Information
Page, enter its name (identifier) and position, or reference
another waypoint by radial and distance.
To create a new user waypoint by entering
its latitude/longitude position:
1.
2.
With the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The
present position is displayed in the information
box. The comment in the comment box is autogenerated based on the reference waypoint
usage. If the waypoint was defined with two
reference waypoints, then this comment would
be generated based on the radials (i.e. OJC354
/ ICT057).
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the position field in the information box.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
position coordinates for the new waypoint.
5.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected position.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
7-86
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 86
NOTE: The number of waypoints that are stored
in memory (USED WPTS) is shown at the bottom
of the User Waypoint Information Page.
To create a new user waypoint by referencing an existing waypoint:
1.
With the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The first
reference waypoint (REFERENCE WAYPOINT)
field is highlighted.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the identifier of the reference waypoint. The
reference waypoint can be an airport, VOR,
NDB, intersection or another user waypoint.
Press ENT to accept the selected identifier.
4.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
radial from the reference waypoint to the new
user waypoint. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected radial.
5.
The cursor moves to the distance (DIS) field.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the distance from the reference waypoint to
the new user waypoint. Press the ENT key to
accept the selected distance.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:24 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
Creating User Waypoints from the Navigation
Map Page
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the reference waypoint. The reference waypoint can be an airport, VOR, NDB,
intersection or another user waypoint. Press
the ENT key to accept the selected identifier.
6.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
radial from the reference waypoint to the new
user waypoint. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected radial.
7.
The cursor moves to the distance (DIS) field.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the distance from the reference waypoint to
the new user waypoint. Press the ENT key to
accept the selected distance.
8.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
The Navigation Map Page and panning target pointer
provide a quick means of saving your present position as
a user-defined waypoint.
To capture and save your present position
as a user waypoint:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, push
the joystick to activate the panning function.
The target pointer is displayed at your present
position.
2.
Press the ENT key to capture the pointers position and display the User Waypoint Information Page (only true when the pointer is not
currently highlighting a waypoint).
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select a
waypoint name.
4.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
name. The first reference waypoint field is
highlighted.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 87
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-87
7/12/2005 8:05:25 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
MODIFYING USER WAYPOINTS
To modify a user waypoint by changing
reference waypoint information:
To modify an existing waypoint, select that waypoint
on the User Waypoint Information Page and enter the new
position information directly over the old information.
1.
To modify a user waypoint by changing its
latitude/longitude position:
With the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The first
reference waypoint (REFERENCE WAYPOINT)
field is highlighted if you want to change the
reference waypoint. Otherwise, continue turning the large FMS knob to highlight the radial
(RAD) or distance (DIS) field, as desired.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to change
the identifier — if desired — of the reference
waypoint. The reference waypoint can be an
airport, VOR, NDB, intersection or another
user waypoint. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected identifier.
4.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Use
the small and large FMS knobs to change the
radial from the reference waypoint, if desired.
Press ENT to accept the selected radial.
5.
The cursor moves to the distance (DIS) field.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to change
the distance from the reference waypoint to
the new user waypoint, if desired. Press the
ENT key to accept the selected distance.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
1.
With the User Waypoint Information Page
displayed, press the FMS knob to activate the
cursor.
2.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The first
reference waypoint (REFERENCE WAYPOINT)
field is highlighted.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the position field in the Information Box.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the new position coordinates and press the
ENT key to accept the selected position.
5.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
7-88
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 88
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:25 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
USER WAYPOINT INFORMATION PAGE OPTIONS
The following User Waypoint Information Page
Options are available by pressing the MENU key (with the
User Waypoint Information Page displayed):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Delete All User Waypoints
View Recent User WPT List
Use Present Position
Auto Comment
Create New user Waypoint
Delete User Waypoint
Rename User Waypoint
‘Delete All User Waypoints’ allows you to delete all
user waypoints from memory.
To delete all user waypoints:
1.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press MENU to display the User Waypoint
Information Page Options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Delete All
User Waypoints’ and press the ENT key. A confirmation windows is displayed. Press the ENT
key to accept ‘YES’ or turn the large FMS knob
to highlight ‘NO’ and press the ENT key.
‘View Recent User WPT List’ allows you to view the
most recent user waypoint list.
To view the most recent user waypoint list:
1.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press MENU to display the User Waypoint
Information Page Options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘View Recent
User WPT List’ and press the ENT key. Turn
the small FMS knob to select a waypoint from
the list and press the ENT key. The selected
waypoint is now the active user waypoint.
Figure 7-62 User WPT Page Menu
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 89
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-89
7/12/2005 8:05:26 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
Use ‘Present Position’ when selected will move the
currently selected user waypoint to the present position
of the aircraft.
NOTE: The user waypoint is set to the airplane’s
position at the time when this option was
selected.
To move the currently selected user
waypoint to the present position of the
aircraft:
1.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press the MENU key to display the User
Waypoint Information Page options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Use Present
Position’ and press the ENT key.
3.
Highlight the position and press the ENT key.
‘Auto Comment’ when selected will overwrite the
currently selected user waypoints comment with an
automatically generated comment. The auto comment is
in the same format as comments that are generated for user
waypoints that have not specified a unique user waypoint
comment. The auto comment can be one of three styles:
7-90
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 90
• REF1BRG1 / DIS1 - if the user waypoint position
is defined by a reference 1 waypoint radial and
distance (this is generally the default case, but
the default case could also be the BLANK (c) case
if there are no reference waypoints near the user
waypoints position)
• REF1BRG1 / REF2BRG2 - if the user waypoint
position is defined by a reference 1 waypoint
radial and a reference 2 waypoint radial
• BLANK - if no reference waypoints are near the
user waypoints position
To overwrite the currently selected user
waypoints comment with an automatically
generated comment:
1.
Select the desired waypoint on the User
Waypoint Information Page and press MENU
to display the User Waypoint Information Page
options.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Auto Comment’ and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:27 AM
WAYPOINT PAGE GROUP
Create New Waypoint allows the pilot to create a new
user waypoint.
Delete User Waypoint allows the pilot to delete a user
waypoint.
To create a new waypoint:
To delete a user waypoint:
1.
From the User Waypoint Information Page,
press the MENU key to display the User
Waypoint Information Page Options or press
the NEW softkey.
1.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press MENU to display the User Waypoint
Information Page Options or press the DELETE
softkey.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight Create
New Waypoint and press the ENT key.
2.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a name for the new waypoint and press the
ENT key. The message ‘Are you sure you want
to create the new user waypoint’ is displayed.
Press ‘YES’ to create the new waypoint. The
present position is displayed in the information box. The first reference waypoint field is
highlighted
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Delete User
Waypoint’ and press the ENT key. The message
‘Would you like to delete the user waypoint’ is
displayed. Press ‘YES’ to delete the waypoint.
4.
5.
6.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 91
Rename User Waypoint allows the pilot to rename a
user waypoint.
To rename a user waypoint:
1.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the reference waypoint. The reference waypoint can be an airport, VOR, NDB,
intersection or another user waypoint. Press
the ENT key to accept the selected identifier.
Select the User Waypoint Information Page
and press MENU to display the User Waypoint
Information Page Options or press the RENAME
softkey.
2.
The cursor moves to the radial (RAD) field. Turn
the small and large FMS knobs to enter the
radial from the reference waypoint to the new
user waypoint. Press the ENT key to accept the
selected radial.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘Rename
User Waypoint’ and press the ENT key. The user
waypoint field is highlighted. Turn the small and
large FMS knobs to rename the user waypoint.
Press the ENT key.
3.
The message ‘Would you like to rename the
user waypoint’ is displayed. Press ‘YES’ to
rename the new user waypoint.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-91
7/12/2005 8:05:27 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
7.16 AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
To quickly select an Aux page:
The Auxiliary Page Group (AUX) provides detailed trip
planning information, satellite status, RAIM prediction,
system settings, LRU status and database information.
The AUX Group page names are as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
System Status
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘AUX’
page group.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
AUX Page.
TRIP PLANNING PAGE
The Trip Planning Page calculates trip statistics, fuel
statistics, and other statistics for a specified Direct-to,
point-to-point, or flight plan based on automatic or manual input of data.
Figure 7-63 Trip Planning Page
7-92
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 92
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:33 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
4.
For point-to-point planning, turn the
small and large FMS knobs to enter the
identifier of the from waypoint. Once
the waypoints identifier is entered, press
the ENT key to accept the waypoint. The
flashing cursor moves to the ‘to’ waypoint.
Again, turn the small and large FMS knobs to
enter the identifier of the ‘to’ waypoint and
press the ENT key to accept the waypoint.
OR,
5.
For flight plan leg planning, press the FPL
softkey and turn the small FMS knob to select
the desired flight plan (already stored in
memory), by number. Turn the large FMS knob
to highlight the ‘LEG’ field and turn the small
FMS knob to select the desired leg of the flight
plan, or select ‘CUM’ to apply trip planning
calculations to the entire flight plan.
6.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the departure time (DEP TIME) field.
7.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the departure time. Press the ENT key when
finished. (Departure time may be entered in
local or UTC time, depending upon unit settings).
Figure 7-64 Trip Planning Page Menu
Trip Planning
Trip planning allows you to view desired track (DTK),
distance (DIS), estimated time enroute (ETE), estimated
time of arrival (ETA), and enroute safe altitude (ESA)
for a Direct-to, point-to-point between two specified
waypoints, or for any programmed flight plan. This option
also displays the sunrise/sunset times for your destination
waypoint (for the selected departure date).
To perform trip planning operations:
1.
Select the AUX-TRIP PLANNING page.
2.
The current page mode is displayed at the
top of the page: ‘AUTOMATIC’ or ‘MANUAL’.
To change the page mode, press the AUTO or
MANUAL softkey.
3.
For Direct-to planning, press the WPTS softkey
and verify that the from waypoint field indicates P.POS (present position). If necessary,
go to the Page Menu and select ‘Set WPT to
Present Position’ to display P.POS. Press the
ENT key and the flashing cursor moves to the
‘to’ waypoint field. Turn the small and large
FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the ‘to’
waypoint and press the ENT key to accept the
waypoint. OR,
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 93
With all variables entered, the following information is
provided (not available at all times):
•
•
•
•
•
•
DTK — Desired track, or desired course
DIS — Distance
ETE — Estimated time en route
ESA — En-route safe altitude
ETA — Estimated time of arrival
Sunrise/Sunset times at the destination
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-93
7/12/2005 8:05:35 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Fuel Planning
5.
Using fuel flow (FF) and/or fuel totalizer data, the AUX
trip planning page displays current fuel conditions along
the active Direct-to or flight plan. You may also manually
enter fuel flow, ground speed (GS) and fuel on board
figures for planning purposes. Fuel planning figures can
be displayed for the currently active flight plan and Directto, or point-to-point navigation between two specified
waypoints and for any stored flight plan.
For flight plan leg fuel planning, press the
FPL softkey and turn the small FMS knob to
select the desired flight plan (already stored in
memory), by number. Turn the large FMS knob
to highlight the ‘LEG’ field and turn the small
FMS knob to select the desired leg of the flight
plan, or select ‘CUM’ to apply fuel planning
calculations to the entire flight plan.
6.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the fuel flow. Press the ENT key when finished.
Note that in automatic page mode, fuel flow is
provided by the system.
7.
The flashing cursor moves to the fuel on board
field. Turn the small and large FMS knobs to
modify the fuel on board. Press the ENT key
when finished. Note that in automatic mode
this is provided by the system.
8.
The flashing cursor moves to the calibrated
airspeed field. Turn the small and large FMS
knobs to enter an calibrated airspeed. Press
the ENT key when finished.
To perform fuel planning operations:
1.
Select the AUX-TRIP PLANNING page.
2.
The current page mode is displayed at the
top of the page: ‘AUTOMATIC’ or ‘MANUAL’.
To change the page mode, press the AUTO or
MANUAL softkey.
3.
For Direct-to planning, press the WPTS softkey
and verify that the from waypoint field indicates P.POS (present position). Press the
ENT key and the flashing cursor moves to the
‘to’ waypoint field. Turn the small and large
FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the ‘to’
waypoint and press the ENT key to accept the
waypoint. OR,
4.
7-94
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 94
For point-to-point fuel planning, turn the small
and large FMS knobs to enter the identifier
of the ‘from’ waypoint. Once the waypoints
identifier is entered, press the ENT key to accept
the waypoint. The flashing cursor moves to the
to waypoint. Again, turn the small and large
FMS knobs to enter the identifier of the ‘to’
waypoint and press the ENT key to accept the
waypoint. OR,
With all variables entered, the following information is
provided (all of the items are not available at all times):
•
•
•
•
•
•
Efficiency
Total Endurance
Remaining Fuel
Remaining Endurance
Fuel Required
Total Range
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:36 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Other Statistics
To calculate Density Altitude and True Airspeed
1.
Select ‘MANUAL’ page mode by pressing the
Manual softkey.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘IND
ALTITUDE’ field. Turn the small and large FMS
knobs to enter the altitude indicated on your
altimeter. Press the ENT key when finished.
3.
The flashing cursor moves to the ‘PRESSURE’
field. Turn the small and large FMS knobs to
enter the barometric pressure (altimeter setting). Press the ENT key when finished.
4.
The flashing cursor moves to the total air temperature (‘TAT’) field. ‘TAT’ is the temperature,
including the compressibility error heating of
speed, read on the outside air temperature
gauge located in the lower left corner of the
PFD. Turn the small and large FMS knobs to
enter the temperature. Press the ENT key when
finished.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 95
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-95
7/12/2005 8:05:36 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Utility Page
The Utility Page displays timers, trip statistics, and
scheduler information for flight planning purposes.
Figure 7-65 Utility Page
Figure 7-66 Utility Page Menu
7-96
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 96
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:42 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Utility Page Operations
To set the generic timer direction (up,
down):
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. The ‘GENERIC’ timer field
is highlighted.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the ‘UP/
DOWN’ window.
4.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select ‘UP’
or ‘DOWN’ and press the ENT key.
To start, stop, or reset the generic timer:
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the ‘START?’ Field.
3.
Press the ENT key to start, stop, or reset the
timer.
To set the generic timer value:
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the time field (hh/mm/ss).
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to set the
desired time and press the ENT key.
To set the departure timer starting criteria
(ground speed more then 30 knots, power
on):
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the ‘DEPARTURE TIME’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection
window.
4.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select either
PWR-ON or GS>30KT and press the ENT key.
To reset the flight timer:
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the MENU key. Turn either the small or
large FMS knob to select ‘Reset Flight Timer’.
3.
Press the ENT key.
To reset the departure timer:
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the MENU key. Turn either the small or
large FMS knob to select ‘Reset Departure
Time’.
3.
Press the ENT key.
To set the flight timer starting criteria
(ground speed more then 30 knots, power
on):
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the ‘FLIGHT’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the selection
window.
4.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select either
PWR-ON or GS>30KT and press the ENT key.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 97
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-97
7/12/2005 8:05:43 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
To enter a name:
Trip Statistics
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
Press the MENU key to display an options
window with the following reset options:
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS – Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer – Resets odometer readout
only
• Reset Maximum Speed – Resets maximum
speed readout only
• Reset All – Resets all trip statistics readouts
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the flight scheduler name field.
3.
Turn the small or large FMS knobs to enter the
desired name and press the ENT key.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
select the desired reset option and press the
ENT key.
To reset trip statistics readouts:
1.
2.
The scheduler feature displays reminder messages
(such as “Change oil”, “Switch fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”,
etc.). One-time, periodic, and event-based messages are
allowed. One-time messages appear once the timer expires
and reappear each time the G1000 is powered on, until
the message is deleted. Periodic messages automatically
reset to the original timer value, once the message is
displayed. Event-based messages do not use a timer, but
rather a specific date and time.
Name
Type (event, one time, periodic)
Date
Time
REM (remainder)
7-98
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 98
1.
Select the AUX UTILITY Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the scheduler type field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list. Turn the small or large FMS knobs to select
the desired type and press the ENT key.
To enter a time:
Scheduler
•
•
•
•
•
To enter a type (event, one time, periodic)
1.
Select the AUX Utility Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the scheduler time field.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the desired time and press the ENT key.
To enter a date:
1.
Select the AUX Utility Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the large FMS knob
to select the scheduler date field.
3.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the desired date and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:43 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
GPS STATUS PAGE
The GPS Status Page provides a visual reference of GPS
receiver functions:
Figure 7-67 GPS Status Page
Figure 7-68 GPS Status Page Menu
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 99
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-99
7/12/2005 8:05:48 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Satellite Status Page
• Satellite constellation displaying the following for
each satellite being tracked:
Azimuth
Elevation
PRN number
Tracking status
• A receiver tracking status display that displays the
following GPS sub-system status situations:
‘2D NAV’, when only 2-dimensional position is
available
‘3D NAV’, when 3-dimensional position is available
• Estimated position error
• Dilution of precision
• Horizontal uncertainty level
• GPS calculated position
• GPS calculated time of day
• GPS calculated altitude
• Ground Speed
• Track
7-100
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 100
The sky view display at the top left corner of the page
shows the satellites currently in view as well as their
respective positions. The outer circle of the sky view
represents the horizon (with north at the top of the circle);
the inner circle represents 45° above the horizon and the
center point shows the position directly overhead. Each
satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be
collected (hollow signal strength bar) before the satellite
may be used for navigation (solid signal strength bar).
Once the GPS receiver has determined your position, the
G1000 indicates your position, altitude, track and ground
speed. The GPS receiver status field also displays the
following messages under the appropriate conditions:
• Acquiring Sat - The GPS receiver is acquiring
satellites for navigation. In this mode, the receiver
uses satellite orbital data (collected continuously
from the satellites) and last known position to
determine the satellites that should be in view.
• 2D Navigation - The GPS receiver is in 2D navigation mode.
• 3D Navigation - The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and computes altitude using satellite
data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:49 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
The Satellite Status Page also indicates the accuracy
of the position fix, using Estimated Position Error (EPE)
and Dilution of Precision (DOP) figures. DOP measures
satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites
received and where they are relative to each other) on a
range from 0.0 to 9.9. The lowest numbers are the best
accuracy and the highest numbers are the worst. EPE uses
DOP and other factors to calculate a horizontal position
error, in feet or meters.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 101
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-101
7/12/2005 8:05:49 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
RAIM Prediction
“RAIM” is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous
Integrity Monitoring, a GPS receiver function that performs
a consistency check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures
that the available satellite geometry will allow the receiver
to calculate a position within a specified protection limit
(2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and en route, 1.0 NM for
terminal and 0.3 NM for non-precision approaches).
During oceanic, en-route, and terminal phases of flight,
RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches,
there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns you with
an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
available when crossing the FAF, the pilot must fly the
missed approach procedure.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether
RAIM will be available for a specified date and time.
If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final
approach course, the approach does not become active
— as indicated by an “Approach is not active” message,
and a “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message.
6.
Turn the small and large FMS knob to enter an
arrival date.
7.
The cursor highlights the ‘COMPUTE RAIM’
field. Press the ENT key to compute RAIM. The
following options are displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ if RAIM has not been
computed for the current waypoint, time, and
date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ if the RAIM
calculation is in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ if RAIM is predicted to
be available for the given combination of
waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ if RAIM is predicted
to be unavailable for the given combination of
waypoint, time, and date
NOTE: RAIM computations predict satellite
coverage within +/- 15 minutes of the specified
arrival date and time.
To predict RAIM availability:
1.
Select the GPS Status Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob. Turn the small and large
FMS knobs to select the ‘WAYPOINT’ field.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the
Waypoint Information Page.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the desired waypoint. Press the ENT key to
accept.
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
an arrival time and press the ENT key.
7-102
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 102
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:05:49 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal
strength bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with
the appropriate satellite number (01-32) underneath each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three
stages:
• No signal strength bars - the receiver is looking
for the satellites indicated.
• Hollow signal strength bars - the receiver has
found the satellites and is collecting data.
• Solid signal strength bars - the receiver has
collected the necessary data and the satellites are
ready for use.
• Checkered signal strength bars - the receiver has
excluded the satellite (FDE).
Figure 7-69 RAIM
GPS Signal Strength
The Satellite Status Page can be helpful in
troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor
satellite coverage or installation problems. Refer to this
page occasionally to monitor GPS receiver performance
and establish a normal pattern for system operation.
Should problems occur at a later date, it may be helpful to
have an established baseline from which to compare.
Figure 7-70 GPS Signal Strength
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 103
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-103
7/12/2005 8:05:57 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
To select the GPS receiver for which data is
displayed:
1.
Select the GPS Status Page.
2.
Press the GPS1 softkey for the display of information pertaining to GPS1 or press the GPS2
softkey for the display of information pertaining
to GPS2.
SYSTEM SETUP PAGE
The System Setup Page is the fourth AUX Page and
provides access (via a list of menu options) to manage the
following system parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Local or UTC time display
Units of measure settings (display units)
Position Formats
Map Datums
Airspace Alerts
Arrival Alert
Audio Alerts
MFD Data Bar Fields
GPS CDI Range Adjustments
COM Transceiver Channel Spacing.
Nearest Airport Parameters
Figure 7-71 System Setup Page
7-104
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 104
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:03 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Pilot Profiles
Creating a Profile
The Pilot Profile section of the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select, create, delete, and rename up to
a total of 25 profiles. Profiles can be created based on
Garmin Factory Defaults, Default Profile Settings, Current
System Settings, and Custom Profile Settings.
The Pilot Profile section of the system setup page displays the following data:
To create a Profile:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
CREATE field in the Pilot Profile box.
• The current active profile
• Number of profiles slots used
• Number of profile slots available
4.
Press the ENT key.
5.
Selecting the Active Profile
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
a profile name. Up to 16 letters and numbers
can be used.
6.
Once the profile name is entered, press the ENT
key.
7.
The cursor moves to the CURRENT SETTINGS
field. If you want the new pilot profile based
on the current system settings press the ENT
key.
8.
If you want the new pilot profile to be based
on other settings, turn the small FMS knob to
display the settings list.
9.
Turn the small or large FMS knobs to highlight
the desired settings and press the ENT key.
To select an active profile:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
ACTIVE field in the Pilot Profile box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the pilot
profile list.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knobs to highlight
the desired pilot profile.
6.
Press the ENT key. The G1000 loads and
displays the system settings for the selected
profile.
NOTE: Pilot profile names cannot start with a
blank as the first letter in the name
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 105
10. The cursor moves to the CREATE field. Press
the ENT key to create a profile. To cancel the
profile, turn the large FMS knob to highlight
the CANCEL field and press the ENT key. To
create and activate the profile turn the large
FMS knob to highlight the CREATE & ACTIVATE
field and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-105
7/12/2005 8:06:03 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Deleting a Profile
Renaming a Profile
To delete a profile:
To rename a profile:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
DELETE field in the Pilot Profile box.
3.
4.
Press the ENT key.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
RENAME field in the Pilot Profile box. Press
the ENT key.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knobs to select the
profile you want to delete and press the ENT
key.
4.
Turn the small or large FMS knobs to select
the profile you want to rename. Press the ENT
key.
6.
Turn the large FMS knob to select DELETE and
press the ENT key. You also have the option of
canceling the delete request by highlighting
CANCEL and pressing the ENT key.
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter
the new profile name. Press the ENT key.
6.
Turn the large FMS knob to select RENAME and
press the ENT key. You also have the option of
canceling the renaming request by highlighting
CANCEL and pressing the ENT key.
7-106
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 106
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:03 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Date/Time
Display Units
The Date/Time box provides settings for time format
(local or UTC; 12- or 24-hour) and time offset. The time
offset is used to define current local time. UTC (also called
“GMT” or “Zulu”) date and time are calculated directly
from the GPS satellites signals and cannot be changed. If
you prefer to use local time, simply designate the offset by
adding or subtracting the correct number of hours.
The Display Units section of the System Setup Page
allows you to configure the displayed data to standard or
metric units of measure. The Display Units section also
provides two magnetic variation (heading) options: True
and Auto. If ‘Auto’ is selected, all track, course and heading
information is corrected to the computed magnetic
variation. The “True” setting references all information to
true north.
The Date/Time section of the System Setup page displays the following data:
• The current date
• The current time
• The current time format (local 12hr, local 24hr,
UTC)
• The current time offset
To set the system time format:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TIME
FORMAT’ field in the Date/Time box.
4.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select the
desired system time format (local 12hr, local
24hr, UTC). Press the ENT key.
To set the current time offset:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘TIME
OFFSET’ field in the Date/Time box.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select
the time offset. Press the ENT key.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 107
The Display Units section of the System Setup Page
displays the following data:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Nav Angle
Magnetic variation
Distance and speed units
Altitude and vertical speed units
Barometric pressure units
Temperature units
Fuel and fuel flow units
The aviation database contains over 100 map datums
to adjust your position reading, making it conform to
specific paper charts. The default datum setting is WGS
84. If you are using a chart based on another datum, you
should set the G1000 to use the same datum. Using a map
datum that does not match the charts you are using can
result in significant differences in position information.
If you are using the paper charts for reference only, the
G1000 still provides correct navigation guidance to the
waypoints contained in the database, regardless of the datum selected.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-107
7/12/2005 8:06:04 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
The Display Units section of the System Setup Page
allows the following operations:
• To select a Nav Angle (auto, true)
• To select Distance and speed units (metric or
nautical)
• To select Altitude and vertical speed units (feet,
meters)
• To select Barometric pressure units (inches of
mercury, hecto pascals)
• To select Temperature units (Celsius, Fahrenheit)
• To select Fuel and fuel flow units (gallons, imperial gallons, kilograms, liters, pounds)
To change a Display Units setting:
Map Datums
The Map Datum section of the System Setup Page allows
selection of map datums to be used by the G1000 from a
list of datums available in the current aviation database
(See Appendix D for a list of available map datums).
NOTE: Per TSO C129a, the WGS-84 map datum should
be used in the United States. For use outside the U.S.,
select the geodetic datum required by that country.
To select a Map Datum:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ‘MAP DATUM’ field.
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the Map
Datum list.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ‘DISPLAY UNITS’ field.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to highlight
the new datum.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list for the selected item.
6.
Press the ENT key.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to highlight
the new selection.
6.
Press the ENT key.
7-108
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 108
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:04 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Airspace Alerts
The Airspace Alerts fields allow the pilot to turn the
controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or
off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest
Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted
on the Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the
warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or
near an airspace. An altitude buffer is also provided which
“expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace.
For example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and you are
more than 500 feet above or below an airspace, you will
not be notified with an alert message; if you are less than
500 feet above or below an airspace and projected to enter
it, you will be notified with an alert message. The default
setting is 200 feet.
The Airspace Alerts section of the System Setup Page
allows for the following operations:
• Selecting class B TMA airspace alert setting (on,
off)
• Selecting class C TCA airspace alert setting (on,
off)
• Class D (on, off)
• Selecting restricted airspace alert setting (on, off)
• Selecting MOA (on, off)
• Other airspace alert settings (on, off)
• Selecting altitude buffer distance setting
The Airspace Alerts section of the System Setup Page
displays the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Class B TMA airspace alert setting
Class C TCA airspace alert setting
Class D
Restricted airspace alert setting
MOA
Other airspace alert settings
Altitude buffer distance setting
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 109
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-109
7/12/2005 8:06:04 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
To turn an Airspace Alert on or off:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select ‘YES’
or ‘NO’ and press the ENT key.
To change the altitude buffer distance setting:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘ALTITUDE BUFFER’ field.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to select an
altitude buffer value and press the ENT key.
Arrival Alerts
An arrival alert, provided on the System Setup Page,
can be set to notify you with a message when you have
reached a user-defined distance to the final destination
(the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight
plan). Once you have reached the set distance (up to 99.9
units), an “Arrival at [waypoint]”message is displayed on
the PFD Navigation Status Bar.
7-110
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 110
The Arrival Alert section of the System Setup Page displays the following information:
• Arrival alert setting
• Trigger distance for arrival alerts
The Arrival Alerts section of the System Setup Page allows the following operations:
• Enabling and disabling of arrival alert
• Setting trigger distance for arrival alerts
To enable/disable an Arrival Alert:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ARRIVAL
ALERT On/Off field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select the
desired option and press the ENT key.
To change the Arrival Alert trigger distance
setting:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ARRIVAL ALERT distance field.
4.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter a
trigger distance and press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:05 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
Audio Alerts
The default settings are:
The Audio Alert section of the System Setup Page gives
you the option of selecting a male or female voice for audio alerts.
To change the audio alert voice:
•
•
•
•
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
To change an MFD Data Bar Field:
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired ‘VOICE’ field in the ‘AUDIO ALERT’
box.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired MFD data bar field.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list for the voice.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to highlight
male or female.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knobs to highlight
the new selection.
6.
Press the ENT key.
6.
Press the ENT key.
Field 1: Ground speed (GS)
Field 2: Distance to next waypoint (DIS)
Field 3: Estimated Time enroute (ETE)
Field 4: Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
MFD Data Bar Fields
The MFD Nav Data Bar Fields section of the System
Setup Page displays the current configuration of the Nav
data (MFD) bar fields. The Nav Data Bar Fields section of
the System Setup Page allows you to configure the four
Nav data bar fields to the following values:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Bearing (BRG)
Distance (DIS)
Desired Track (DTK)
En Route Safe Altitude (ESA)
Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
Estimated Time En Route (ETE)
Ground Speed (GS)
Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
Track Angle Error (TKE)
Track (TRK)
Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
Crosstrack Error (XTK)
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 111
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-111
7/12/2005 8:06:05 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
GPS CDI
To change the CDI range:
The CDI section of the System Setup Page allows you
to define the range for the on-screen course deviation
indicator. The range values represent full range deflection
for the CDI to either side. The default setting is ‘AUTO’.
At this setting, the CDI range is set to 5.0 nautical miles
during the “en-route” phase of flight. Within 30 nm of
your destination airport, the CDI range gradually ramps
down to 1.0 nm (terminal area). Likewise, leaving your
departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and
gradually ramps UP to 5 nm beyond 30 nm (from the
departure airport). During approach operations the CDI
range gradually ramps down even further, to 0.3 nm.
This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final
approach fix (FAF).
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘SELECTED’ field in the GPS CDI box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select the
desired value and press the ENT key.
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3
nm), the higher range settings are not selected during
ANY phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected,
the G1000 uses this for en-route and terminal phases
and ramp down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that
the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)
protection limits listed below follow the selected CDI
range, and corresponding flight phases.
The CDI Section of the System Setup page displays the
following data:
• Selected CDI range (auto, 5 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
• The current system CDI range (5 nm, 1 nm, 0.3
nm)
• The ILS CDI capture mode setting (auto, manual)
To change the ILS CDI capture setting:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the ‘ILS
CDI CAPTURE’ field in the GPS CDI box.
4.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select the
desired value and press the ENT key.
COM Configuration
COM Configuration allows you to select 8.33 kHz or
25.0 kHz COM frequency channel spacing.
NOTE: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency
channel spacing is not approved for use in the
United States. Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States.
The CDI Section of the System Setup page allows the
following operations:
• Setting the selected CDI range (auto, 5 nm, 1 nm,
0.3 nm)
• Setting the ILS CDI capture mode (auto, manual)
7-112
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 112
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:05 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
To change COM channel spacing:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
4.
To select Nearest airport surface matching
criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘CHANNEL SPACING’ field.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to select the
desired spacing and press the ENT key.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘RNWY
SURFACE’ field in the ‘NEAREST APT’ box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the options
list for the selected item.
5.
Turn the small or large FMS knob to highlight
the new selection (any, hard only, hard/soft,
water). Press the ENT key.
Nearest APT
Nearest Airport defines the minimum runway length
and surface type used when determining the nine nearest
airports to display on the Nearest Airport Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to
prevent airports with small runways, or runways that
are not of appropriate surface, from being displayed. The
default settings are ‘0 feet (or meters)’ for runway length
and “any” for runway surface type. The Nearest Airport
section of the System Setup page displays the following
data:
• Nearest airport surface matching criteria (any,
hard only, hard/soft, water)
• Nearest airport minimum length matching criteria
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 113
To select Nearest airport minimum runway
length matching criteria:
1.
Select the System Setup Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob momentarily, to activate
the flashing cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight ‘MIN
LENGTH’ field in the ‘NEAREST APT’ box.
4.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the length
field.
5.
Turn the small and large FMS knobs to enter a
runway length (zero to 99,999 feet).
6.
Press the ENT key.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-113
7/12/2005 8:06:06 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
SYSTEM STATUS PAGE
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information of all databases in the system is also
displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by a green check
mark and failed LRUs are indicated by a red X. The Pilot
should note the failed LRU and inform a Tiger service center or Garmin dealer.
Figure 7-72 System Status Page
7-114
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 114
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:11 AM
AUXILIARY PAGE GROUP
7.17 NEAREST PAGE GROUP
The nearest (NRST) page group is the fourth page
group which consists of the following pages:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User WPTS
Nearest Frequencies
Nearest Airspaces
To quickly select a NRST page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
NRST Page.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 115
Not all 25 nearest airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections
or user waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding
NRST page at one time. The Nearest Airports Page
displays detailed information for five nearest airports,
with a scroll bar along the right-hand side of the page
indicating the part of the list that is currently being viewed.
The Nearest Airspaces Page displays detailed information
for up to three special use or controlled airspace alerts.
The NRST pages for VORs, NDBs, intersections, and user
waypoints display nine waypoints at a time. The flashing
cursor and large FMS knob are used to scroll and view the
rest of the waypoints or airspaces in the list.
To scroll through the list of nearest airports, VORs, NDBs, intersections, user
waypoints or airspaces:
1.
Select the desired NRST page using the steps
outlined above.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to scroll through the
list. The scroll bar along the right-hand side of
the page indicates the part of the list that is
currently being viewed.
4.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-115
7/12/2005 8:06:11 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
NAVIGATING TO A NEAREST WAYPOINT
The NRST pages can be used in conjunction with the
Direct-to function to quickly set a course to a nearby
facility. This feature can be a real time saver compared to
retrieving information from the database using the WPT
pages. More importantly, it instantly provides navigation
to the nearest airport in case of an in-flight emergency.
To select a nearby airport, VOR, NDB,
intersection or user waypoint as a Direct-to
destination:
1.
Use the flashing cursor to scroll through a NRST
page list and highlight the desired nearest
waypoint.
2.
Press the Direct-to key to display the Direct-to
Page.
3.
Press the ENT key to accept the selected
waypoints identifier and press the ENT key a
second time (with ‘Activate?’ highlighted) to
begin navigating to the selected waypoint.
Airport Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance
Airport Name, Closest
City, Elevation
Runway Information
Airport COM
frequencies
Approaches
Nearest
Airport
Figure 7-73 Nearest Airports Page
7-116
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 116
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:18 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
Direct To Page
Figure 7-74 Direct-to from Nearest Airports Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 117
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-117
7/12/2005 8:06:23 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
Nearest Airports Page
The Nearest Airports Page displays the following information for a selected airport:
• Map of surrounding area
• Airport Identifier, Symbol, Bearing, Distance (up
to 25 airports within 200 nm of current position)
• Name
• Closest city
• Elevation
• Runway information
• Airport COM frequencies
• Approaches
To select a nearest airport from the Nearest
Airports Page:
1.
Press the APT softkey located at the bottom
of the display. The first airport in the nearest
airports list is highlighted.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
desired airport. The remaining information
on the Nearest Airports Page pertains to the
selected airport.
To select a runway from the Nearest
Airports Page:
1.
Press the RNWY softkey located at the bottom
of the display.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the desired
runway.
To select the Nearest Airports Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
Airports Page.
Figure 7-75 APT, RNWY, FREQ, and APR Softkeys
7-118
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 118
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:24 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
The Nearest Airports Page can be used to quickly tune
the COM transceiver to a nearby airport. The selected
frequency is placed in the standby field of the COM
window and activated using the COM Frequency Toggle
Key.
To quickly tune the COM transceiver to a
nearby airport frequency:
1.
Press the FREQ softkey located at the bottom
of the display.
2.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to select
the desired frequency.
3.
Press the ENT key. The selected frequency is
placed in the standby frequency tuning box.
4.
Press the Com Frequency Toggle key to place
the frequency in the active field.
To select and load an approach from the
Nearest Airports Page:
1.
Select the desired nearest airport.
2.
Press the APR softkey located at the bottom
of the display. The ‘LD APR’ (load approach)
softkey becomes available.
3.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
select the desired approach. Press the LD APR
softkey.
4.
The Approach Loading Page is displayed with
the transitions field highlighted. Turn either the
small or large FMS knob to select the desired
transition.
5.
Press the ENT key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is
highlighted. Press the ENT key to load the
approach.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 119
6.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight the
‘ACTIVATE’ field. Press the ENT key to activate
the approach. ‘Load’ adds the approach to
the flight plan without immediately using the
approach for navigation guidance. This allows
for the original flight plan to continue navigating until cleared for the approach, but keeps
the approach available for quick activation
when needed. ‘Activate’ adds the approach
to the flight plan and begins navigating the
approach course.
NOTE: If the approach is not approved for
GPS, a ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ messages is
displayed with ‘YES’ highlighted. Press the ENT
key to acknowledge the message. Turn the large
FMS knob to select ‘NO’ and press the ENT key
to return to the Approach Loading Page
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-119
7/12/2005 8:06:24 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
NEAREST INTERSECTIONS PAGE
The Nearest Intersections Page displays the following
information for a selected intersection:
• Map of surrounding area
• Intersection identifier, Symbol, Bearing, Distance
(within 200 nm of current position)
• Lat/Lon (latitiude/longitude)
• Reference VOR Information consisting of:
• VOR Name
• Symbol
• Frequency
• Bearing
• Distance
Intersection
Identifier, Symbol,
Bearing, Distance
Latitude and
Longitude
VOR Name,
Symbol, Frequency, Bearing,
Distance
Nearest
Intersection
Symbol
Figure 7-76 Nearest Intersections Page
7-120
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 120
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:30 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
To select the Nearest Intersections Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
Intersections Page.
To select a nearest intersection from the
Nearest Intersections Page:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob and
press the ENT key to select the desired intersection. The remaining information on the Nearest intersection Page pertains to the selected
intersection
NEAREST NDB PAGE
The Nearest NDB Page displays the following
information for a selected NDB:
• Map of surrounding area
• NDB Identifier, Symbol, Bearing, Distance (within
200 nm of current position)
• NDB Name
• Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds)
• Frequency
Nearest
NDB Map
Symbology
NDB Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance
NDB Name
NDB Location
Latitude and
Longitude
Frequency
Figure 7-77 Nearest NDB Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 121
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-121
7/12/2005 8:06:36 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
NEAREST VOR PAGE
To select the Nearest NDB Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
NDB Page.
To select an NDB from the Nearest NDB
Page:
1.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
2.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob and
press the ENT key to select the desired NDB.
The remaining information on the Nearest NDB
Page pertains to the selected NDB.
The VOR Information Page displays the following
information for a selected VOR:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Identifier, Symbol, Bearing, Distance
Name
Closest city
VOR Type
Latitude/longitude (degrees/minutes or degrees/
minutes/seconds)
• Magnetic Variation in degrees
• Frequency in megahertz (MHz)
VOR Identifier,
Symbol, Bearing,
Distance
Nearest
VOR Map
Symbology
VOR Name
VOR Type and
Magnetic Deviation
VOR Location
Latitude and
Longitude
VOR Frequency
Figure 7-78 Nearest VOR Page
7-122
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 122
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:43 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
To select the Nearest VOR Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
VOR Page.
The remaining information on the Nearest VOR Page
pertains to the selected VOR.
To select and load a VOR frequency from
the Nearest VOR Page:
1.
Select the Nearest VOR Page. There are two
methods that can be used to select and load
a VOR frequency:
•
Method 1: Press the FREQ softkey to highlight
the VOR frequency for the selected VOR. Press
the ENT key. The selected VOR frequency is
placed in the NAV standby frequency field.
•
Method 2: Press the MENU key. Select the
Select Frequency Window option and press
the ENT key. Press the ENT key again when
the frequency field is highlighted to place the
selected VOR frequency in the NAV standby
field.
To select a nearest VOR from the Nearest
VOR Page:
1.
Select the Nearest VOR Page. There are two
methods that can be used to select a VOR:
•
Method 1: Press the VOR softkey and turn either
the small or large FMS knob, or press the ENT
key to select a VOR.
•
Method 2: Press the MENU key. Select the
Select VOR Window option and press the ENT
key. Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
select a VOR.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 123
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-123
7/12/2005 8:06:43 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
NEAREST USER WAYPOINT PAGE
To select the Nearest User Waypoint Page:
The Nearest User Waypoint Page displays the following
information for a selected User Waypoint:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
User Waypoint Page.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Map of surrounding area
Identifier
Symbol
Bearing and Distance
Latitude/longitude
A reference waypoint with identifier, bearing, and
distance
• Waypoint Comment
• A second reference waypoint with identifier and
bearing
Nearest User Waypoint
Identifier, Symbol,
Bearing, Distance
Nearest
User
Waypoint
Reference
Waypoint
Information
Reference
Waypoint,
Bearing, and
Distance
Figure 7-79 Nearest User Waypoints Page
7-124
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 124
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:49 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
To select a Nearest User Waypoint from the
Nearest User Waypoint Page:
1.
Select the Nearest User Waypoint Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob and turn either the small
or large FMS knob and press the ENT key to
select a Nearest User Waypoint.
3.
The remaining information on the Nearest User
Waypoint Page pertains to the selected Nearest
User Waypoint.
NEAREST FREQUENCIES PAGE
The Nearest Frequencies Page displays the facility name,
bearing to and distance to the five nearest ARTCC and
FSS points of communication (within 200 nautical miles
of the present position). For each ARTCC and FSS listed,
the Nearest Frequencies Page also indicates the frequency
and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver
to the facility frequency. The selected frequency is placed
in the standby field of the COM window and activated
using the COM Frequency Toggle key. In addition to the
ARTCC and FSS information, the Nearest Frequencies
Page includes the weather frequencies for the selected
ARTCC or FSS.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 125
To select the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the NRST
page group. NRST is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
Frequencies Page.
To select a Nearest ARTCC from the Nearest
Frequencies Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
2.
Press the ARTCC softkey and turn the small FMS
knob to select a Nearest ARTCC.
To select and load the Nearest ARTCC Frequency from the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
2.
Press the ARTCC softkey and turn the large FMS
knob to select the center frequency. Press the
ENT key to load the center frequency into the
COM frequency standby field.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-125
7/12/2005 8:06:50 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
To select a Nearest FSS from the Nearest
Frequencies Page:
To select and load the Nearest Weather Frequency from the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
2.
Press the FSS softkey and turn the small FMS
knob to select a Nearest FSS.
2.
Press the WX softkey and turn either the large
or small FMS knob to select a Weather Frequency. Press the ENT key to load the weather
frequency into the ‘COM’ frequency standby
field.
To select and load the Nearest FSS Frequency from the Nearest Frequencies Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Frequencies Page.
2.
Press the FSS softkey and turn the large FMS
knob to select the ‘FSS’ frequency field. Press
the ENT key to load the ‘FSS’ frequency into
the ‘COM’ frequency standby field.
7-126
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 126
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:50 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
NEAREST AIRSPACES PAGE
To select the Nearest Airspaces Page:
The Nearest Airspaces Page displays the following
information for a maximum of 20 controlled or special
use airspaces:
1.
From any page, press and hold the CLR key to
select the Navigation Map Page.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the ‘NRST’
page group. ‘NRST’ is displayed in the page
group icon located in the lower right corner
of the display.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Nearest
Airspaces Page.
• Map of surrounding area
• Airspace Alerts Box displaying Airspace Name,
Status, and Time to Entry
• Airspace and Agency
• Vertical Limits (floor/ceiling)
• Airspace Frequencies
Airspace Alerts
Box
Airspace and
Agency
Vertical Limits
Airspace
Frequencies
Figure 7-80 Nearest Airspaces Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 127
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-127
7/12/2005 8:06:55 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
Airspace Alerts Box
The Airspace Alerts Box displays the Airspace Name,
Status, and Time to Entry. The status and time to entry (if
applicable) is based on the following conditions:
• If the projected course will take the aircraft inside
an airspace within the next ten minutes, the status
field shows the airspace as ‘Ahead’.
• If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an
airspace and the current course will take the
aircraft inside, the status field shows the airspace
as ‘Ahead < 2 nm’.
• If the aircraft is within two nautical miles of an
airspace and the current course will not take the
aircraft inside, the status field shows ‘Within
2 nm’.
• If the aircraft has entered an airspace, the status
field shows ‘Inside’.
NOTE The airspace alerts are based on threedimensional data (latitude, longitude and
altitude) to avoid nuisance alerts. The alert
boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectored to provide complete information on any
nearby airspace. Once the described conditions
exists, the status and time of entry is shown if
the airspace alert messages are enabled on the
System Setup Page (Auxiliary Page Group).
7-128
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 128
By selecting any airspace name listed on the Nearest
Airspaces Page, additional details are provided —
including controlling agency, communication frequencies
and floor/ceiling limits.
To view additional details for an airspace
listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page:
1.
Select the Nearest Airspace Page.
2.
Press the FMS knob to activate the cursor.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to scroll through the
list, highlighting the desired airspace.
4.
Press the ALERTS softkey and turn either the
small or large FMS knob to select the desired
airspace.
5.
The remaining information on the Nearest Airspaces Page pertains to the selected airspace
name.
6.
Press the FMS knob to remove the flashing
cursor.
To view and quickly load the frequency for
a controlling agency:
1.
Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2.
Press the FREQ softkey and turn either the
small or large FMS knob to select the desired
frequency. Press the ENT key to load the
frequency into the ‘COM’ frequency standby
field
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:06:56 AM
NEAREST PAGE GROUP
Airspaces
The Nearest Airspaces Page displays – and airspace
messages are provided for the following airspace types:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Alert
Caution
Class B
Class C
TCA
Danger
MOA
Prohibited
Restricted
TMA
Training
TRSA
Unspecified
Warning
190-00617-00 Rev. A
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 129
The Nearest Airspaces Page also displays the floor and
ceiling limits of the airspace. The following are examples
of what may appear as vertical limits for an airspace:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5,000 ft. msl (5,000 feet mean sea level)
5,000 ft. agl (5,000 feet above ground level)
MSL (at mean sea level)
Notam (see Notice to Airmen)
Unknown
Unlimited
See Chart
Surface
All airspace messages, except for prohibited areas, may
be turned on or off from the System Setup Page in the
Auxiliary Page Group. An altitude buffer is also provided
on the System Setup Page to provide an extra margin of
safety above/below the published limits.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
7-129
7/12/2005 8:06:56 AM
MFD_00617-00_0A.indd 130
7/12/2005 8:06:56 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
SECTION 8 ANNUNCIATIONS &
ALERTS
8.1 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: The Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement (POHS) takes precedence over any conflicting information found in this document.
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts to the pilot
using a combination of the following items:
assumes a new label consistent with the alert level
(WARNING, CAUTION, or ADVISORY). By pressing the softkey annunciation, the pilot acknowledges
awareness of the alert. If alerts are still present, the
ALERTS label is displayed in reverse video (white
background with black text). The pilot can press
the ALERTS softkey a second time to view alert text
messages.
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’
appears in a window when a failure is detected in
the LRU providing the information to the window.
See the G1000 System Annunciations section for
more information.
• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation
window displays abbreviated annunciation text.
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 system issues
Text is colored based on alert levels described in
audio alert tones when specific system conditions
the Alert Level Definitions section. The Annunciaare met. See the Alert Level Definitions section for
tion window is located to the right of the Altitude
more information.
and Vertical Speed windows on the display. All
Tiger AG-5B annunciations can be displayed in the
annunciations window simultaneously. A white
horizontal line separates the annunciations that are
acknowledged from the annunciations that are not
yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations
System
are displayed towards the top of the window. Lower Annunciation
Red ‘X’
priority annunciations are displayed towards the
bottom of the window.
Annunciation
Window
• Alerts Window: The Alerts window displays alert
text messages. Up to 64 prioritized alert messages
can be displayed in the Alerts window. Pressing the
ALERTS softkey displays the Alerts window. Pressing the ALERTS softkey a second time removes the
Alerts window from the display. When the alerts
window is displayed, the pilot can use the large
FMS knob to scroll through the alert message list.
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the
ALERTS softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation to accompany an alert. The ALERTS softkey
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Annun_Alerts.indd 1
Alerts Window
ALERTS Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 8-1 G1000 Alerting System
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
8-1
7/7/2005 8:53:44 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
8.2 ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
The G1000 Alerting System, as installed in the Tiger
AG-5B, uses four alert levels:
• WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate
pilot attention. A warning alert is accompanied
by an annunciation in the Annunciation window
along with a continuous aural tone. Warning alert
text is RED. A warning alert is also accompanied
by a flashing WARNING softkey annunciation,
as shown in Figure 9-2. Pressing the WARNING
softkey acknowledges the presence of the warning
alert and stops the aural tone. Pressing the ALERTS
softkey displays the related alert message in the
Alerts window.
• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may
require pilot intervention. A caution alert is accompanied by an annunciation in the Annunciation
window along with a single aural tone. Caution alert
text is YELLOW. A caution alert is also accompanied
by a flashing CAUTION softkey annunciation, as
shown in Figure 9-3. Pressing the CAUTION softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert.
Pressing the ALERTS softkey displays the related
alert message in the Alerts window.
• ANNUNCIATION ADVISORY: This level of
alert provides general information to the pilot.
An annunciation advisory alert is accompanied
by an annunciation in the Annunciation window.
Annunciation advisory alert text is WHITE. An
annunciation advisory alert is also accompanied
by a flashing ADVISORY softkey annunciation,
as shown in Figure 9-4. Pressing the ADVISORY
softkey acknowledges the presence of the message
advisory alert and displays the alert message in the
Alerts window.
8-2
Annun_Alerts.indd 2
• MESSAGE ADVISORY: Message advisory alerts are
different from annunciation advisory alerts in that
they do not appear in the Annunciation window.
A message advisory alert is only accompanied by
a flashing ADVISORY softkey annunciation, as
shown in Figure 9.2.3. The majority of G1000 alerts
are message advisories and are listed in the G1000
System Message Advisories section.
Figure 8-2 WARNING Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 8-3 CAUTION Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 8-4 ADVISORY Softkey
Annunciation
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:53:44 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
8.3 AG-5B AIRCRAFT ALERTS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the
Tiger AG-5B. See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement (POHS) for recommended pilot actions.
WARNING ALERTS
Annunciation Window Text
OIL PRES LO
FUEL PRES LO
FUEL PRES HI
ALTERNATOR
STARTER ENGD
Alerts Window Message
Oil pressure is below 25 psi.
Fuel pressure is below 1.0 psi.
Fuel pressure is greater than 8 psi.
Alternator failed. Battery is only electrical source.
Starter is engaged.
Audio Alert
Continuous Aural Tone
Continuous Aural Tone
Continuous Aural Tone
Continuous Aural Tone
Continuous Aural Tone
CAUTION ALERTS
Annunciation Window Text
L FUEL LOW
R FUEL LOW
LOW VOLTS
LOW BATTERY
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Annun_Alerts.indd 3
Alerts Window Message
Left fuel quantity is low.
Right fuel quantity is low.
Primary bus voltage is below 24 Volts
Emergency battery voltage is low.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
Audio Alert
Single Aural Tone
Single Aural Tone
Single Aural Tone
Single Aural Tone
8-3
7/7/2005 8:53:44 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
MESSAGE ADVISORY ALERTS
Alerts Window Message
PFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the PFD is inoperative.
MFD FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the MFD is inoperative.
GIA FAN FAIL – The cooling fan for the GIAs is inoperative.
Audio Alert
None
None
None
VOICE ALERTS
The following voice alerts can be configured for ‘Male’
or ‘Female’ gender by using the AUX System Setup Page
on the MFD. The volume level can be adjusted by an
authorized Garmin service center.
Voice Alert
“Traffic”
“Traffic Not
Available”
Alert Trigger
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is
issued.
Played when the traffic system fails or cannot communicate.
NOTE: Voice alerts are provided to the G1000 by
the GIA 63 #1. Should this unit fail, audio and
voice alerts are no longer available.
8-4
Annun_Alerts.indd 4
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:53:45 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
8.4 G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is
typically displayed on windows associated with the failed
data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the Tiger AG-5B Pilot’s Operating
Handbook for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
System Annunciation
NOTE: Upon power-up of the G1000 system,
certain windows remain invalid as G1000
equipment begins to initialize. All windows
should be operational within one minute of
power-up. If any window continues to remain
flagged, the G1000 system should be serviced
by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
Comment
Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the AHRS.
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from the air data computer.
Display system is not receiving altitude input from the air data computer.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Annun_Alerts.indd 5
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
8-5
7/7/2005 8:53:50 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
System Annunciation
Comment
Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the air data computer.
Display system is not receiving valid heading input from the AHRS.
Display system is not receiving valid OAT information from the air data
computer.
Display system is not receiving valid true airspeed information from the air
data computer.
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation use.
Note that the AHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal operation. AHRS
operation may be degraded if GPS signals are not present (see the AFMS).
Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.
Other Various Red “X” Indications
8-6
Annun_Alerts.indd 6
A red ‘X’ through any other display field (such as engine instrumentation
fields) indicates that the field is not receiving valid data.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:53:52 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
A red ‘X’ may be the result of an LRU or an LRU function failure. The figure presented below illustrates all possible flags and the responsible LRUs.
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air Data
Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
OR
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Unit
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air Data
Computer
Figure 9-5 G1000 System Failure Annunciations
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Annun_Alerts.indd 7
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
GTX 33 Transponder
OR
GIA 63 Integrated
Avionics Units
8-7
7/7/2005 8:53:59 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
8.5 G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE
ADVISORIES
This section describes various G1000 system message
advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or
LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation as shown
previously in the G1000 System Annunciations section.
MFD & PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
mismatch. Xtalk is off.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck.
MFD1 “KEY” KEYSTK – Key is stuck.
8-8
Annun_Alerts.indd 8
NOTE: This section provides information regarding
G1000 message advisories that may be displayed
by the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems,
flight conditions, and other existing operational
priorities must be considered when responding to
a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement (POHS)
takes precedence over any conflicting guidance
found in this section.
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings.
The pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The G1000 system should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The G1000 system
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it several times. The G1000 system should be serviced if the problem persists.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:53:59 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
Comments
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 aviation
database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the aviation database. Attempt to reload
the aviation database. If problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 aviation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terdatabase error exists.
rain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, The
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database G1000 system should be serviced.
error exists.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation database
The PFD and MFD have different aviation database versions installed. Crossfill is off.
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Install correct aviation database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Aviation database
The PFD and MFD have different aviation database types installed (Americas, European, etc.). Crossfill is off. Install correct aviation database type in both displays.
type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Annun_Alerts.indd 9
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
8-9
7/7/2005 8:53:59 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
G1000 system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
error. Config service req’d.
The G1000 system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
mismatch. Communication halted.
serviced.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions
service. Return unit for repair.
may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The G1000 system
should be serviced when possible.
BACKUP PATH – Audio panel using
The audio panel is using a backup communication path. The G1000 system should
backup data path.
be serviced when possible.
8-10
Annun_Alerts.indd 10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:53:59 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GIA 63 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
Comments
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the G1000
system should be serviced.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The G1000
system should be serviced.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should
MANIFEST – GIA2 software mismatch. be serviced.
Communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
Reducing transmitter power.
transmitter will operate at reduced power. If the problem persists, the G1000 system
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
should be serviced.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
is stuck.
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
If the problem persists, the G1000 system should be serviced.
is stuck.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Annun_Alerts.indd 11
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
8-11
7/7/2005 8:54:00 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GIA 63 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Alerts Window Message
Comments
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) positransfer key is stuck.
tion. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
the G1000 system should be serviced.
transfer key is stuck.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not
GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
available from FAF to MAP waypoints.
Monitoring (RAIM) from the FAF to the MAP waypoints.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not
GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
available.
Monitoring (RAIM) for the current phase of flight.
POSN ERROR – RAIM has determined When a RAIM position error is detected, GPS is flagged and the system no longer
GPS position is in error.
provides GPS-based guidance.
DGRD GPS ACC – GPS position
GPS position accuracy has been degraded and RAIM is not available.
accuracy degraded & RAIM unavailable.
GPS1 FAIL – GPS1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver is
unavailable. The G1000 system should be serviced.
GPS2 FAIL – GPS2 is inoperative.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service. be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service. be available. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMTXFR – NAV1 remote
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
transfer key is stuck.
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
NAV2 RMTXFR – NAV2 remote
the G1000 system should be serviced.
transfer key is stuck.
8-12
Annun_Alerts.indd 12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:54:00 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GIA 63 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Alerts Window Message
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
Comments
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The G1000
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The G1000 system should be serviced when possible.
GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 configuration
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – EIS using backup
data path.
Comments
The GEA 71 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GEA 71 is using a backup communication path. The G1000 system should be
serviced when possible.
GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – Transponder using
backup data path.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Annun_Alerts.indd 13
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The transponder is using a backup communications path. The G1000 system should
be serviced when possible.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
8-13
7/7/2005 8:54:00 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
AHRS TAS – AHRS not receiving
airspeed.
AHRS GPS – AHRS using backup GPS
source.
AHRS GPS – AHRS not receiving GPS
information.
AHRS GPS – AHRS not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS GPS – AHRS operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software mismatch.
Communication halted.
BACKUP PATH – AHRS using backup
data path.
AHRS SERVICE – AHRS Magnetic-field
model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – Too far North/South, no
magnetic compass.
Comments
The AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS relies
on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The G1000
system should be serviced when possible.
The AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS limitations. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The G1000 system should be
serviced.
The AHRS has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The AHRS is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 system should
be serviced when possible.
The AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
HDG FAULT – A magnetometer fault
has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
8-14
Annun_Alerts.indd 14
Comments
A fault has occurred in the GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The G1000 system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:54:00 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
Comments
GDC1 CONFIG – GDC1 configuration GDC 74A configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
error. Config service req’d.
memory. The G1000 system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The G1000 system should be
mismatch. Communication halted.
serviced.
BACKUP PATH – Airdata using backup The GDC 74A is using a backup communications data path. The G1000 system
data path.
should be serviced when possible.
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Alerts Window Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the G1000 system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is
is locked.
locked. This occurs when an aviation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This
can also occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
aviation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
Verify user modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after an aviation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed aviation database eliminates an obsolete approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
truncated.
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
APPR VPROF – Approaching VNAV
Aircraft is approaching VNAV profile. Prepare to climb or descend to meet VNAV
profile.
profile.
APPR TRG ALT – Approaching target
Aircraft is approaching target altitude. Prepare to level aircraft.
altitude.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Annun_Alerts.indd 15
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
8-15
7/7/2005 8:54:01 AM
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES (CONT.)
Alerts Window Message
Comments
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate locked This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace
than 10 minutes.
within 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
than 2 nm.
LEG UNSMOOTH – Flight plan leg will The approaching flight plan waypoints are too close to allow for smooth turns.
not be smooth.
Prepare for steep turns ahead and expect noticeable course deviations.
APPR INACTV – Approach is not
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate apactive.
proach when required.
SLCT AUTOSEQ – Select auto
The system notifies the pilot to select auto-sequence mode. Press the OBS softkey to
sequence mode.
deactivate the OBS mode.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI
approach.
to the correct NAV receiver.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
The selected waypoint [xxxx] does not use the WGS 84 datum. Cross-check position
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
with alternate navigation sources.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
The traffic information system TIS has failed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
failed.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
Stormscope has failed. The G1000 system should be serviced.
failed.
Stormscope is using the backup communication path. The G1000 system should be
BACKUP PATH – Stormscope using
backup path.
serviced when possible.
8-16
Annun_Alerts.indd 16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:54:01 AM
STORMSCOPE
SECTION 9 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
The G1000 installed in the Tiger AG-5B aircraft provides the display and control interface for the following
optional weather and audio entertainment systems:
• L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 Series II Weather
Mapping Sensor
• GDL 69/69A XM® Radio System
WARNING: Do not use any G1000 Weather Data
for thunderstorm penetration Weather Data is
approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
CAUTION: NEXRAD weather data is to be used
for long-range planning purposes only. Due to
inherent delays and relative age of the data
that can be experienced, NEXRAD weather data
should not be used for short-range avoidance of
weather.
9.1 STORMSCOPE INTERFACE
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 User’s Guide for a
detailed description of Stormscope operation.
DISPLAYING STORMSCOPE LIGHTNING DATA ON
THE NAVIGATION MAP PAGE
NOTE: The Stormscope has to be receiving valid
heading information in order for Stormscope
lightning data to be displayed on the G1000.
NOTE: If heading is lost, strikes and/or cells must
be cleared manually after the execution of each
turn. This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell
positions are displayed accurately in relation to
the node of the aircraft.
The Navigation Map Page (Figure 9-1) displays cell or
strike data using the yellow lightning strike symbology
shown in Table 9-1.
NOTE: The information contained in this
section must be supplemented with detailed
information contained in the G1000 Multi Function Display Operation Section. This section
assumes the user has experience operating the
G1000 MFD and is also familiar with the applicable optional equipment User’s Guide.
Table 9-1 Lightning Age and Symbols
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-1
7/12/2005 8:21:11 AM
STORMSCOPE
Lightning Mode
and Rate
Surrounding
Lightning
Strikes
Lightning
Indication
Stormscope
Softkey
Figure 9-1 Navigation Map Page Displaying Stormscope Lightning Data
To display Stormscope Lightning Data on
the Navigation Map Page:
1.
P r e s s t h e MAP s o f t ke y. Press the
STRMSCP softkey. Press the STRMSCP
softkey again to remove Stormscope Lightning
Data from the Navigation Map Page.
In normal operation, the mode and rate are displayed
in the top right corner of the Navigation Map Page. The
mode is described by the word ‘STRIKE’ when in strike
mode, or ‘CELL’ when in cell mode.
9-2
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 2
NOTE: “Cell mode” uses a clustering “program” to identify clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Cell mode is most
useful during periods of heavy storm activity.
Displaying cell data during these periods frees
the pilot from sifting through a screen full of
discharge points and helps to better determine
where the storm cells are located.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:16 AM
STORMSCOPE
Stormscope Lightning Data Display Range
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up
to 2000 nm zoom range (north up) on the Navigation Map Page. In the ‘track up’ mode there is a
portion of Stormscope lightning data that could
be behind the aircraft which cannot be seen at this
range. Since the range of the Stormscope is 200 nm (in
front) in addition to another 200 nm (behind) (400 nm
diameter total), the 500 nm range (in north up mode)
shows all the data.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map
Page, turn the joystick clockwise to zoom out or turn the
joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in.
To display the Weather Group Options:
1.
With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press
the MENU key to display the Navigation Map
Setup Menu. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map
Setup’ option.
2.
Press the ENT key. The Map Setup Menu is
displayed. Turn the small FMS knob to select
the ‘Weather’ group.
NOTE: At a map range of less than 25 nm,
Stormscope lightning data is not displayed but
can still be present. The presence of Stormscope
lightning data is indicated by the annunciation
in the upper right hand corner ‘LTNG < 25 nm’
(Figure 9-2).
Figure 9-3 Weather Group Map Setup Menu
To turn Stormscope Lightning Data on or
off:
1.
With the Weather Group selected, press the
ENT key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP
LTNG’.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to display the ‘On/Off’
window.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ and
press the ENT key.
4.
Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
Figure 9-2 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
Customized Display
The pilot can customize the display of Stormscope
lightning data on the Navigation Map Page using the
Weather Group Options in the Map Setup Menu (Figure
9-3).
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 3
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-3
7/12/2005 8:21:20 AM
STORMSCOPE
To select ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ as the Stormscope
lightning mode:
Clearing Stormscope Lightning Data Using the
Navigation Map Page Options Menu (Figure 9-4)
1.
With the Weather Group selected, press the
ENT key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP
LTNG’.
Stormscope data can be cleared from the Navigation
Map Page by using the third Navigation Map Page Menu
option, ‘Clear Lightning Data’.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘STRMSCP
MODE’.
3.
Turn the FMS knob to display the ‘Cell/Strike’
window.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select ‘Cell’ or ‘Strike’.
Press the ENT key.
5.
Push the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
To select a Stormscope lightning symbol
zoom range:
Figure 9-4 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
1.
With the Weather Group selected, press the
ENT key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP
LTNG.
2.
Turn the large FMS knob to select ‘STRMSCP
SMBL’.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the range
window.
4.
Turn the FMS knob to select the desired range
and press the ENT key.
To remove Stormscope lightning data from
the Navigation Map Page:
5.
Push the FMS knob to return to the Navigation
Map Page.
1.
Press the MENU key with the Navigation Map
Page displayed.
2.
Turn the FMS knob to highlight ‘Clear Lightning
Data’ and press the ENT key.
9-4
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 4
NOTE: Periodically clearing Stormscope lightning
data while monitoring thunderstorms is a good
way to determine if a storm is building or dissipating. Stormscope lightning data in a building
storm will reappear faster and in larger numbers.
Stormscope lightning data in a dissipating storm
will appear slower and in smaller numbers.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:22 AM
STORMSCOPE
STORMSCOPE PAGE
Stormscope lightning data is displayed on the
Stormscope Page in addition to the Navigation Map Page.
To select the Stormscope Page:
1.
Turn the large FMS knob until the Map Page
group is selected.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob until the Stormscope
Page is selected (Figure 9-5).
Current Strike Rate
Current Lightning
Mode
North Arrow
Indicator
Map
Orientation
Active Flight
Plan or Direct To
Navigation
Surrounding
Lightning
Strikes
Weather Map
Ranges
Stormscope
Control Softkeys
Figure 9-5 Stormscope Page
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 5
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-5
7/12/2005 8:21:28 AM
STORMSCOPE
Stormscope Page Operations
The following Stormscope Page operations are available using softkeys or page menu options:
• Changing the display range
• Changing the lightning mode between cell and
strike
• Changing the viewing mode between 360° and
120° ARC
• Clearing Stormscope lightning data
To change the display range:
To change the display range on the Stormscope Page,
turn the joystick clockwise to zoom out or turn the
joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in. Display ranges
are 25 nm, (25 and 50) nm, (50 and 100) nm, and (100
and 200) nm.
To change the Stormscope lightning mode
between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’:
1.
Select the Stormscope Page.
2.
Press the MODE softkey. The CELL and STRIKE
softkeys are displayed. Press the CELL softkey
to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE
softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box located in
the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page
To change the viewing mode between
360˚and 120˚:
1.
Select the Stormscope Page.
2.
Press the VIEW softkey. The 360 and ARC
softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 softkey
to display a 360˚ viewing area or press the ARC
softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area
OR:
3.
Press the MENU key. The page menu is
displayed. Turn the FMS knob to select the
desired view. Press the ENT key on the desired
selection.
To clear Stormscope lightning data from
the display:
1.
Press the CLEAR softkey to remove all
Stormscope lightning data from the display
OR: Press the MENU key. Select ‘Clear Lightning
Data’ and press the ENT key.
OR:
3.
Press the MENU key. The page menu is
displayed with ‘Strike Mode’ or ‘Cell Mode’
highlighted. Press the ENT key on the desired
selection.
9-6
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 6
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:28 AM
GDL 69/69A
9.2 GARMIN GDL 69/69A OPTIONAL
INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
The Garmin GDL 69/69A receiver interfaces with
the G1000 to bring XM Weather and XM Digital Audio
Entertainment to the cockpit. XM Weather and XM
Radio operate in the S-band frequency range to provide
continuous uplink capabilities at any altitude throughout
North America.
IMPORTANT: Before the GDL 69/69A can be
used, it has to be activated by XM Satellite Radio.
The GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions that were delivered with the aircraft
contain important information required to initiate XM satellite radio subscription for the GDL
69/69A.
XM weather information is also displayed on the
Primary Flight Display Inset Map. See the G1000 PFD
Pilot’s Guide for more information.
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) are
displayed on all pages. Radar coverage is always
displayed with NEXRAD data.
Complete weather products include the following:
• Graphical NEXRAD Data (NEXRAD)
• Graphical METAR Data (METAR)
• Textual METAR Data
• Textual Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts (TAF)
• City Forecast Data
• Graphical Wind Data (WIND)
• Graphical Echo Tops (ECHO TOP)
• Graphical Cloud Tops (CLD TOP)
GDL 69 WEATHER
• Graphical Lightning Strikes (XM LTNG)
XM weather information provided by the GDL 69 is
displayed on the following MFD Maps and Pages:
• Graphical Storm Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
• Navigation Map Page (NEXRAD and XM Lightning
only)
• Weather Data Link Page (complete GDL 69
capability)
• Nearest Pages (NEXRAD and XM Lightning only)
• Airport Information Page (NEXRAD and XM
Lightning only)
• Flight Planning Maps (NEXRAD and XM Lightning
only)
• AUX - Trip Planning Map (NEXRAD and XM
Lightning only)
• Weather Information Page - part of the
Waypoint Airport Information Page (METAR and
TAF information only)
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 7
• NEXRAD Radar Coverage (displayed with
NEXRAD data)
• SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
• Surface Analysis including City Forecasts (SFC)
• County Warnings (COUNTY)
• Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
• Hurricane Track (CYCLONE)
• Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFR)
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-7
7/12/2005 8:21:29 AM
GDL 69/69A
Displaying XM Weather Products on the
Navigation Map Page (Figure 9-6)
• XM LTNG - Turns the display of XM Lightning on
or off and selects the desired display range.
The Navigation Map Page displays NEXRAD, Cell
Movement, TFRs, and XM Lightning data.
• CELL MOVEMENT - Turns the display of storm cell
movement on or off. The Cell Movement option is
only shown when NEXRAD is turned on.
Navigation Map Page Weather Control Softkeys
The following softkeys control the display of NEXRAD
and XM Lightning weather products on the Navigation
Map Page:
NEXRAD – pressing the NEXRAD softkey displays
NEXRAD weather and coverage information. The
NEXRAD option is mutually exclusive with the
TOPO, TERRAIN, and STORMSCOPE options, that
is, when NEXRAD is activated, TOPO and/or
TERRAIN, and/or STORMSCOPE are turned off.
XM LTNG – pressing the XM LTNG softkey displays
XM lightning information. XM Lightning is mutually exclusive with the STORMSCOPE option.
To display weather data on the Navigation
Map Page:
1.
Press the MAP softkey.
2.
Press the NEXRAD or XM LTNG softkey to display the desired weather. Press the applicable
softkey again to remove weather data from the
Navigation Map Page.
Navigation Map Setup Options (Figure 9-7)
The user can customize the display of XM weather
on the Navigation Map Page by using the Map Setup
Weather Group Options Menu. The following options are
available:
NOTE: In Figure 9-7, the Stormscope menu
options are only shown when the Stormscope
unit is installed. Stormscope is not a GDL 69
Weather Product.
To customize the Navigation Map Page:
1.
Press the Menu key on the Navigation Map
Page.
2.
Select ‘Map Setup’ and press the ENT key.
3.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the group
selection window. Turn the small FMS knob
to select the ‘Weather Group’ and press the
ENT key.
4.
While the Map Setup menu is displayed, turn
the large FMS knob to highlight and move
between the product selections. When an item
is highlighted, turn the small FMS knob to
select the desired option and press the ENT
key.
Displaying Weather Data on the Nearest Pages
In addition to the Navigation Map Page, the Nearest
Pages display Stormscope, NEXRAD, and XM Lightning
data.
• NEXRAD DATA - Turns the display of NEXRAD data
and radar coverage on or off and selects the desired
display range.
9-8
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 8
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:29 AM
GDL 69/69A
NEXRAD
Storms/Legend
NEXRAD
Weather
NEXRAD Softkey
Figure 9-6 Navigation Map Page Displaying NEXRAD Weather
Displaying METAR and TAF information on the
Airport Information Page
METAR and TAF text is displayed on the Airport Information Page when the WX softkey is pressed. Once
the WX softkey is pressed the page title changes from
‘WPT - Airport Information’ to ‘WPT - Weather Information’. The METAR data that is displayed is first displayed in a decoded fashion, then the raw text is displayed.
TAF information is only displayed in its raw form.
NOTE: METAR is the Aviation Routine Weather
Report and is generally standard around the
world. The temperatures are given in Celsius
degrees. The atmospheric pressure however is
reported in hecto pascals everywhere, but the
US where the atmospheric pressure is reported
in inches of mercury. For aviation purposes the
standard temperature and atmospheric pressure
are 59° F (15°C) and 29.92 in. Hg (1013.2 hPa).
NOTE: TAF is an airport forecast. TAF is generally
` standard around the world. TAF forecasts significant weather changes, temporary changes, probable changes and expected changes in weather
conditions..
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 9
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-9
7/12/2005 8:21:35 AM
GDL 69/69A
To display METAR and TAF text on the Airport Information Page:
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the WPT Page
Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Airport
Information Page.
3.
Press the WX softkey to display METAR and TAF
text (METAR and TAF information is updated
every 12 minutes).
Displaying Weather Data on the AUX - Trip
Planning Page Map
NEXRAD and XM Lightning Data can be displayed
on the AUX - Trip Planning Page Map by pressing the
NEXRAD and XM LTNG softkeys.
Displaying Weather Data on the Flight Plan Page
Maps
NEXRAD and XM Lightning Data can be displayed on
the Flight Plan Page Maps by pressing the NEXRAD and
XM LTNG softkeys.
Displaying Weather on the Weather Data Link
Page (Figure 9-8)
The Weather Data Link Page displays all available
weather products. The display of the weather data can either be selected by softkeys located at the bottom of the
display or through the Weather Data Link Setup menu.
To select the Weather Data Link Page:
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the Map Page
Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Weather
Data Link Page.
Weather Data Link Page Softkeys
The following softkeys perform the GDL 69 weather
functions on the Weather Data Link Page:
NEXRAD – press the NEXRAD softkey to show
NEXRAD weather and radar coverage information
(both are activated at the same time). Composite
data from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the
United States is shown. This data is composed
of the maximum reflectivity from the individual
radar sweeps. The display of the information is
color-coded to indicate the weather level severity.
The update rate is every five minutes. Refer to the
legend for a description of the color code.
Figure 9-7 Map Setup Options
9-10
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:38 AM
GDL 69/69A
Figure 9-8 Weather Data Link Page
NOTE: WSR-88D weather surveillance radar
or NEXRAD (NEXt generation RADar) is a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved
the detection of meteorological events such
as thunderstorms, tornadoes, and hurricanes.
An extensive network of NEXRAD stations
provides almost complete radar coverage of the
continental United States, Alaska, and Hawaii.
The unobstructed range of each NEXRAD is 124
nautical miles.
NEXRAD Abnormalities
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed
NEXRAD images. Some, but not all, of those include:
• Ground Clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 11
at the sun
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which
may cause shadows
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can
cause alterations in radar scans
NEXRAD Limitations
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar
displays. Some, but not all, are listed here for the user’s
awareness:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient
information to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics (hail vs. rain, etc).
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum
antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD site
cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges,
and has no information about storms directly over
the site.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-11
7/12/2005 8:21:44 AM
GDL 69/69A
• The resolution of displayed NEXRAD data is 2 kilometers. Therefore, when zoomed in on the display,
each square block is 2 kilometers. The intensity
level reflected by the square will be the highest level
sampled within the 2 kilometer square area.
NEXRAD Intensity
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD
echo intensities (reflectivity) measured in dBZ
(decibels of Z). “Reflectivity” is the amount of
transmitted power returned to the radar receiver.
Reflectivity (designated by the letter Z) covers a wide
range of signals (from very weak to very strong). So, a
more convenient number for calculations and comparison, a decibel (or logarithmic) scale (dBZ), is used. The
dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal returned
to the radar increases.
ECHO TOP – press the ECHO TOP softkey to show
the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. This may not indicate the top of
a storm or clouds, only the highest radar return
echo. The information is derived from NEXRAD
information and indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is falling. ECHO TOPS and
Radar coverage are activated at the same time.
ECHO TOPS are mutually exclusive from both
NEXRAD and CLOUD TOPS, that is, when ECHO
TOPS is activated, NEXRAD and CLOUD TOPS
are removed. Refer to the Legend for a description of the ECHO TOPS coding. The update rate
is every 7.5 minutes.
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same
color scaling to represent altitude. Turning on
both products at the same time is not allowed.
9-12
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 12
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:46 AM
GDL 69/69A
RADAR COVERAGE – The display of Radar Coverage is always active when NEXRAD and ECHO
TOPS are selected and indicates the currently
available NEXRAD Radar coverage and ECHO
TOPS areas by showing the area in a grayishpurple color where information is not being
collected. Areas where radar capability exists, but
is not active or is off-line, will not be shown as
available. Areas where radar coverage is not available will be shown in grayish-purple. The update
rate is every five minutes.
CLD TOP – press the CLD TOP softkey to show
the cloud top altitude determined from satellite
imagery. Refer to the legend for a description of
the CLOUD TOPS color coding. The update rate
is every 15 minutes.
LTNG – pressing the LTNG softkey shows the location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. The
update rate is every five minutes.
NOTE: Strike location falls within a 2 km region.
Therefore, the exact location of the strike is not
displayed.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 13
CELL MOV – pressing the CELL MOV softkey
shows the storm cells identified by the groundbased system. The movement is depicted by an
arrow. The update rate is every 12 minutes.
SIG/AIR – pressing the SIG/AIR softkey shows
SIGMET and AIRMET information to advise
the pilot of potentially hazardous weather. The
advisory covers an area of at least 3,000 square
miles at any one time. The update rate is every 12
minutes.
NOTE: SIGMETs are broadcast for hazardous
weather that is considered of extreme importance
to all aircraft. SIGMETs (acronym for “SIGnificant
METeorological information”) warn of the following weather hazards: severe icing, severe and
extreme turbulence, dust storms, sandstorms, or
volcanic ash lowering visibility to less than 3
miles. A Convective SIGMET (WST) is issued for
hazardous convective weather (such as tornadoes, thunderstorms, hail) and covers severe or
great turbulence, severe icing, and low-level wind
shear. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical
position.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-13
7/12/2005 8:21:47 AM
GDL 69/69A
NOTE: AIRMETs are broadcast for weather
phenomena that potentially affects all aircraft.
For pilots of light aircraft, AIRMET (acronym for
“AIRman’s METeorological information) gives
valuable information about the following conditions: moderate icing, moderate turbulence,
sustained winds 30 knots or greater at the surface, widespread area with a ceiling of less than
1,000 feet and/or visibility less than 3 miles and
extensive obscurement of mountains. These are
important to light aircraft, as they have limited
flight capabilities due to lack of equipment and/or
instrumentation.
When enabled, the following AIRMETs can be
displayed:
•
•
•
•
•
Icing
Turbulence
IFR conditions
Mountain obscuration
Surface winds
Refer to the legend for a description of the color
coding.
METAR – press the METAR softkey to display
METARs (METeorological Aviation Reports).
METARS are shown as colored flags at airports
providing METAR reports. Refer to the legend for
a description of the color code. The update rate is
every 12 minutes.
LEGEND – press the LEGEND softkey to display
the Weather Legend Window. Turn the small or
large FMS knob to scroll up or down through the
legend list. Press the small or large FMS knob or
the ENT key to remove the legend display. The
Weather Legends Window describes the graphic
symbols and color coding of the information for
each product that is active.
9-14
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:49 AM
GDL 69/69A
To view the available legends:
1.
Press the LEGEND softkey to display the available legends.
2.
Turn either the small or large FMS knob to
scroll through the legends if more are available
than fit in the window.
3.
To return to the previous page and remove the
legend window, press the LEGEND, ENT, CLR
key, or the FMS knob.
SFC – pressing the SFC softkey for Surface
Analysis shows current or forecast conditions.
The city forecasts information is combined with
the surface conditions. The SFC softkey label
changes to reflect the forecast time selected.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24,
36, and 48 hours. The update rate is every 12
minutes.
OR:
4.
On the Weather Data Link Page, press the
LEGEND softkey which displays the Page Menu
Options. Turn either the large or small FMS
knob to select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the
ENT key.
MORE WX – press the MORE WX softkey to
display the following group of softkeys for
additional weather control:
NOTE: City Forecast and METAR information
is only displayed within the installed Aviation
Database service area.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 15
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-15
7/12/2005 8:21:51 AM
GDL 69/69A
FRZ LVL – press the FRZ LVL softkey to display
contour lines for freezing levels. The update
rate is every 12 minutes.
NOTE: When no data is shown at a given altitude
for any of the weather features, the data for that
altitude has not been received or the data is out
of date and has been removed from the display.
Wait for the next update. The update rate is every
12 minutes.
WIND – press the WIND softkey to show wind
speed and direction at a selected altitude from
the ground up to 42,000 feet in 3,000 foot
increments. The WIND softkey label changes
to reflect the winds aloft altitude selected. The
update rate is every 12 minutes.
COUNTY – pressing the COUNTY softkey provides
specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings for Tornado, Severe Thunderstorm,
and Flood conditions provided by the National
Weather Service (NWS). Refer to the Legend for
a description of the county warning icon. The
update rate is every 5 minutes.
9-16
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:57 AM
GDL 69/69A
CYCLONE – pressing the CYCLONE softkey shows
the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and
their projected track at various time intervals.
The update rate is every 12 minutes.
Weather Data Link Page Setup
The pilot can customize the display of XM Weather
data on the Weather Data Link Page using the Weather
Page Options Menu (Figure 9-9).
To customize the display of weather data
on the Weather Data Link Page:
1.
Press the Menu key on the Weather Data Link
Page.
2.
Select ‘Weather Setup’ on the Page Menu and
press the ENT key.
3.
Turn the large FMS knob to highlight and
move between the product selections. Turn
the small FMS knob to select an option for
each selection and press the ENT key.
Map Panning Information-Weather Data Link
Page
Map panning moves the map beyond its current limits
without adjusting the map range. When the panning
function is selected by pushing the joystick, a panning
arrow flashes on the Weather Data Link Page. Panning over
AIRMETs, County Warnings, TFRs, Echo Tops, METARs,
SIGMET’s, and Cell Movement displays text information
for the selection. This information is displayed in the
same location as the “map pointer information” on the
Navigation Map Page.
To display information for selected weather
products:
1.
Push in the joystick to display the panning
arrow.
2.
Move the joystick to place the panning arrow
on the desired product. Press the ENT key to
display pertinent information for the selected
product.
Note that pressing the ENT key when panning over an AIRMET or a SIGMET displays an
information box that gives the actual text of
that alert. Panning over an airport with METAR
information does not display more information
but allows the user to press the ENT key and
select that Airport’s Information Page and
displays the actual text. Pressing the ENT key
when panning over a TFR displays TFR specific
information for the panned TFR.
Figure 9-9 Weather Data Link Page Menu
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 17
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-17
7/12/2005 8:21:59 AM
GDL 69/69A
WEATHER PRODUCT SYMBOLS
Weather Product Age (Table 9-2)
Figure 9-10 shows the symbol for each weather product (read from left to right) . When a weather product is
active, the product symbol is displayed in the lower right
of the screen.
The times for each of the enabled products are displayed
on the right side of the display. Times are based on Zulu
times when the data was assembled on the ground, not the
time the data was received by the FIS sensor. When the age
of a weather product is greater than half of the expiration
time, the product time will change from cyan to amber in
color.
Current weather products use an age stamp,
‘Age: _ _ _’ in minutes. Reported (forecasted) weather
products use a date/time stamp; ‘_ _/_ _ /_ _:_ _’.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NEXRAD
Cloud Top/Echo Top
XM Lightning
Cell Movement
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
METARs
City Forecast
Surface Analysis
Freezing Levels
Winds Aloft
County Warnings
Cyclone Warnings
Echo Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive)
Figure 9-10 Weather Product Symbols
9-18
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:21:59 AM
GDL 69/69A
Weather Product
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
City Forecasts
County Warnings
Cyclone Warnings
Echo Tops
Freezing Levels
METARs
Lightning
NEXRAD
Radar Coverage
Cell Movement
Surface Analysis
TFRs
Winds Aloft
TAFs
Clouds Tops
Expires After
“n” minutes
60
60
60
60
30
60
90
30
30
30
30
60
60
90
60
60
Table 9-2 Weather Product Age
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 19
GDL 69A – XM DIGITAL AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT
Digital audio entertainment is available through the
XM Satellite Radio Service using the GDL 69A. XM
Satellite Radio allows for a variety of radio programming
over long distances without having to constantly search
for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage
far exceeds land-based transmissions.
XM Information Page
The XM Information Page provides XM Radio identification numbers, service level, and weather products.
To select the XM Information Page (Figure
9-11):
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the Auxiliary
Page Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the Aux
- XM Page. Radio and Info softkeys are displayed.
3.
Press the INFO softkey to show the XM Information Page where information about the XM
Satellite Radio feature is displayed.
4.
Press the RADIO softkey to show the XM
Radio Page where the audio entertainment is
controlled.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-19
7/12/2005 8:22:00 AM
GDL 69/69A
Data and Audio Radio ID
Weather Products Window
Each GDL 69A contains a unique Data Radio ID and
Audio Radio ID that allows XM to communicate with the
radio. The owner must activate XM service by providing
the Radio ID(s) to XM to authorize the installed services
for that radio.
The Weather Products Window shows the list of
available weather products and indicates the selected
products for the current subscription. The boxes for active
weather products are filled. Before activation, all boxes are
clear.
Service Class
The ‘Service Class’ refers to the groupings of weather
products available for subscription.
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
Weather
Products
Window
INFO
Softkey
RADIO
Softkey
DONE
Softkey
Figure 9-11 XM Information Page
9-20
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 20
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:22:05 AM
GDL 69/69A
XM RADIO PAGE (FIGURE 9-12)
To step through channels one at a time:
The XM Radio Page provides information and control
of the audio entertainment features of the XM Satellite Radio.
1.
While on the XM Radio page, press the CHNL
softkey. The user can also push the FMS knob
to highlight the channel list and turn the large
FMS knob to scroll through the channels.
2.
Press the CH + softkey to go up through the
list in the Channel window or move down the
list with the CH – softkey.
XM Radio Softkeys
The following XM Radio softkeys are located below the
display and provide control of the GDL 69A :
RADIO – press the RADIO softkey to access the XM
Satellite Radio audio functions.
INFO – press the INFO softkey to show XM Information, such as Radio IDs, Service Class, and
Weather Products.
DONE – the DONE softkey is used during the activation process as described on page 9-7.
CHNL – press the CHNL softkey to allow selection
of radio channels.
CATGRY – press the CATGRY softkey to allow
selection of radio categories.
VOL – press the VOL softkey to adjust the audio
volume or to mute the audio.
PRESETS – press the PRESETS softkey to access
preset channels (PS1 - PS15) or to set a new
preset (SET).
Active Channel
The Active Channel field on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the XM Radio is
using. The Channel feature is used to navigate through
the channels in the selected category. You can step through
the channels one at a time or you may also select a channel directly by channel number.
To select a channel directly:
1.
While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL
softkey.
2.
Press the DIR CH softkey. The channel number
in the Active Channel window will be highlighted (Figure 9-14) .
3.
Press the numbered softkeys located on the
bottom of the display to directly select the
desired channel number.
4.
Press the ENT key to activate the selected
channel.
Category
The ‘Category’ field of the XM Radio Page displays the
currently selected category of audio. Categories of channels such as jazz, rock, or news, can be selected to list the
available channels for a type of music or other contents.
One of the optional categories is ‘PRESETS’ if the user desires to view what channels have been programmed.
Channels
The Channels window of the XM Radio Page shows a
list of the available channels for the selected category.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 21
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-21
7/12/2005 8:22:05 AM
GDL 69/69A
Active
Channels
Channel
List
Categories
Field
Volume
Field
Figure 9-12 XM Radio Page
9-22
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 22
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:22:11 AM
To adjust the volume:
1.
With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the
VOL softkey.
2.
Press the VOL – softkey to reduce volume or
press the VOL + softkey to increase volume.
(once the VOL softkey is pressed, the volume
can also be adjusted using the small FMS
knob). Pressing the MUTE softkey toggles the
muting of the radio audio volume.
Presets
Figure 9-13 Categories List
To select a category:
1.
Press the CATGRY softkey key on the XM Radio
Page.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to display the ‘Categories’ list (Figure 9-13). Highlight the desired
category with the small FMS knob and press
the ENT key. Selecting ‘All Categories’ places
the channels from ‘All Categories’ in the Channels field (press the CAT + and CAT - softkeys
to cycle through the categories).
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned
a preset number. The preset channel can then be selected
directly and added to the Active Channel list for listening.
To set a preset channel number:
1.
On the Radio Page while listening to the Active
Channel that you want to assign as a preset,
press PRESETS.
2.
Press the SET softkey.
3.
Press the preset key (PS1 - PS15) to assign
to the active channel. Press the MORE softkey if
necessary.
To select a preset channel number:
Volume
The Volume ‘control’ (Figure 9-14) sets the audio volume level, as well as mutes the audio. Pressing the VOL
softkey brings up the Volume bar graph, muting softkey,
and the Volume control softkeys.
1.
While on the Radio page, press the PRESETS
softkey.
2.
Press the numbered softkeys (PS1 - PS15) on
the bottom of the screen to directly select the
desired preset channel. Press MORE, if necessary.
Figure 9-14 Volume Control
Figure 9-15 Direct Channel Selection
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 23
7/12/2005 8:22:14 AM
GDL 69/69A
GDL 69 TROUBLESHOOTING
Although it is the responsibility of the facility that installed the GDL 69/69A to correct any hardware problems,
the user can perform some quick troubleshooting steps to
find the possible cause of a failure.
First, ensure that the owner/operator of the aircraft in
which the GDL 69/69A is installed has subscribed to XM
Radio, and that it has been activated. Perform a quick
check of the circuit breakers to ensure the GDL 69/69A
has power applied. If a failure still exists, review the messages listed in Table 9-3. The advisory messages may provide insight to a possible failure.
For troubleshooting purposes, the Status, Serial Number, and Software Version numbers for the GDL 69/69A
are displayed in the LRU Information Window on the System Status Page (Figure 9-16).
Figure 9-16 LRU Information Window
To select the System Status Page:
1.
Turn the large FMS knob to select the AUX
Page Group.
2.
Turn the small FMS knob to select the System
Status Page.
9-24
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 24
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/12/2005 8:22:17 AM
GDL 69/69A
Message
CHECK ANTENNA – XM Radio Page, the active channel is
replaced with this message
UPDATING – XM Radio Page, the active channel is
replaced with this message
NO SIGNAL – XM Radio Page, the active channel is
replaced with this message; also displayed on the Weather
Data Link Page when the signal strength is too low for the
receiver
LOADING – XM Radio Page, the active channel is replaced
with this message
OFF AIR – XM Radio Page, the active channel is replaced
with this message
--- – XM Radio Page, the active channel is replaced with
this message
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE – Weather Data Link
Page, displayed in the center of the screen in yellow
ACTIVATION REQUIRED – Weather Data Link Page,
displayed in the center of the screen in yellow
Description
Antenna is not connected
Updating encryption code
Loss of signal
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication with the GDL 69 within the last five minutes
XM Data receiver is not activated
Table 9-3 Advisory Messages
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 25
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
9-25
7/12/2005 8:22:17 AM
Opt Equipment_00617-00_0A.indd 26
7/12/2005 8:22:17 AM
APPENDIX A
SD CARD USE
4.
The G1000 system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to
load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations, SD cards are required for terrain database storage
as well as aviation database updates.
After the update completes, the PFD starts in
normal mode. Remove the aviation database
update SD card from the PFD.
5.
Turn the G1000 system OFF.
6.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the MFD. The
MFD and PFD aviation databases are now
updated.
7.
Verify that the correct update cycle is loaded
during startup of the MFD.
AVIATION DATABASE
Jeppesen aviation databases are released every 28 days,
and are provided directly to the pilot by Jeppesen. Updates must be loaded to both the MFD and PFD using an
aviation database update SD card provided by Jeppesen.
The card reader downloads the aviation database files and
stores them in the PFD and MFD internal memory.
NOTE: The display downloads the aviation
database and stores it internally. The aviation
database SD card is not required to remain in
the display after the update.
To update the Jeppesen aviation database:
1.
With the G1000 system OFF, insert the aviation
database update SD card into the top card slot
of the PFD (Label of SD card facing left).
2.
Turn the G1000 system ON. The following
prompt is displayed on the upper left corner
of the PFD:
3.
Press the ENT key to confirm the database
updated. The following prompt is displayed:
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 1
TERRAIN DATABASE
G1000 topography and terrain data are stored on an
SD card provided by Garmin. Since this database is not
stored internally in the MFD or PFD, a terrain SD card
must be kept in both displays to retain terrain and topography data. A terrain card should be inserted into the
bottom card slot of the PFD and MFD.
NOTE: If the terrain SD card is removed from the
display, the TOPO and TERRAIN softkeys are not
functional and are grayed out on the MFD Map
Page.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
APP-1
7/7/2005 8:50:28 AM
APPENDIX B
Abbreviation or Acronym
ADF
AF
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
ALT
AMPS
ANNUNC
APPR
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ATC
ATCRBS
AUTOSEQ
AUX
Definition
Automatic Direction Finder
Arc to fix
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
Altitude
Amperes
Annunciation
Approach
Approach
Airport
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Arrival
Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
B ALT
BARO
BKSP
BRG
Barometric Altitude
Barometer
Backspace
Bearing
C
CA
CALC
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
COM
CONFIG
COPLT
CR
CRG
CRNT
CRS
CRSR
CTRL
CVR
Celsius
Course to Altitude
Calculator
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist
Channel
Course to Intercept
Cloud
Clear
Communication Radio
Configuration
Co-pilot
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
Course
Cursor
Control
Cockpit Voice Recorder
APP-2
Appendices.indd 2
Abbreviation or Acronym Definition
CVRG
Coverage
CYL
Cylinder
D ALT
DB
DBASE
DBZ
DEC FUEL
DECLTR
DEP
DF
DFLT
DFLTS
DIS
DME
DOP
DP
DSBL
DTK
Density Altitude
Database
Database
Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Decrease Fuel
Declutter
Departure
Direct to Fix
Default
Defaults
Distance
Distance Measuring Equipment
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Disabled
Desired Track
ECU
EGT
EIS
ELEV
EMI
ENDUR
ENGD
ENR
ENT
EPE
ERR
ESA
ETA
ETE
EXPIRD
Engine Control Unit
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
Elevation
Electromagnetic Interference
Endurance
Engaged
Enroute
Enter
Estimated Position Error
Error
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Expired
FA
FAA
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
Forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance,
Flight Director
Fuel Flow
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
FFLOW
FIS-B
FISDL
FM
FMS
FOB
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:28 AM
APPENDIX B
Abbreviation or Acronym
FPL
FPM
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Definition
Flight Plan
Feet Per Minute
Frequency
Freezing
Flight Service Station
Foot/feet
G/S
GAL
GDC
GDU
GEA
GIA
GL
GMU
GND
GPH
GPS
GRS
GS
GTX
Glideslope
Gallon(s)
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Gallon(s)
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Global Positioning System
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed
Garmin Transponder
HA
HDG
HF
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
hPa
HR
HSI
HUL
Hz
Hold Terminating at Altitude
Heading
Hold Terminating at Fix
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination
Hectopascal
Hour
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz
I
IAF
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicated
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 3
Abbreviation or Acronym Definition
INT
Intersection(s)
IrDA, IRDA
Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK
KG
KHz
KM
KT
Key Stuck
Kilogram
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot
L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LED
LIFR
LO
LOC
LON
LRU
LTNG
LVL
Left
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Light Emitting Diode
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Low
Localizer
Longitude
Line Replacement Unit
Lightning
Level
M
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
METAR
MFD
MGRS
MIC
MIN
MKR
MOA
MOV
MPM
MSA
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
Middle Marker
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
Maximum
Meteorological Aviation Routine
Multi Function Display
Military Grid Reference System
Microphone
Minimum
Marker Beacon
Military Operations Area
Movement
Meters Per Minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
Nexrad
Navigation
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
APP-3
7/7/2005 8:50:29 AM
APPENDIX B
Abbreviation or Acronym Definition
nm
Nautical Mile(s)
NRST
Nearest
O
OAT
OBS
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
P ALT
PA
PASS
PFD
PI
POH
POHS
POSN
P. POS
PRES
PRESS
PROC
PSI
PT
PTCH
PTT
PWR
Pressure Altitude
Passenger Address
Passenger(s)
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Present Position
Pressure
Pressure
Procedure(s)
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Pitch
Push-to-Talk
Power
QTY
Quantity
R
RAD
RAIM
REF, REFS
REM
REQ
RES
RF
RMI
RNG
RNWY
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RVRSNRY
RX
Right
Radial
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
References
Remaining (fuel remaining above Reserve)
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Range
Runway
Revolutions per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve
Reversionary
Receive
SA
SAT
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL
SFC
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Surface
APP-4
Appendices.indd 4
Abbreviation or Acronym
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
Sim
SLCT
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SW
SYS
Definition
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Select
Slip/skid
Symbol
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Special Use Airspace
Suspend
Software
System
T HDG
TAS
TAF
TAT
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
TIS
TKE
TMA
TRG
TRK
TRUNC
TX
True Heading
True Airspeed
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
Total Air Temperature
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
Traffic Information System
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Target
Track
Truncated
Transmit
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
Unavailable
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator / Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
V
Vne
Vr
Vx
Vy
VA
Airspeed/Velocity
Never-exceed Speed
Rotate Speed
Best Angle of Climb Speed
Best Rate of Climb speed
Heading Vector to Altitude
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:29 AM
APPENDIX B
Abbreviation or Acronym
VD
VERT
VFR
VHF
VI
VLOC
VM
VMC
VNAV
VOL
VOR
VPROF
VR
VS
Vspeed
Definition
Heading Vector to DME Distance
Vertical
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
Heading Vector to Intercept
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VNAV Profile
Heading Vector to Radial
Vertical Speed
Airspeed
WAAS
WGS-84
WPT
WPTS
WW
WX
Wide Area Augmentation System
World Geodetic System - 1984
Waypoint(s)
Waypoints
World Wide
Weather
XFER
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
Transfer
Transponder
Cross-talk
Cross-track
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 5
Abbreviation or Acronym Definition
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
APP-5
7/7/2005 8:50:29 AM
APPENDIX B
Navigation Term
Bearing
Calibrated Airpseed
Course
Course to Steer
Crosstrack Error
Cumulative
Distance
Dillution of Precision
Desired Track
Efficiency
Endurance
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Position Error
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time Enroute
Fuel Flow
Fuel On Board
Groundspeed
Heading
APP-6
Appendices.indd 6
Definition
The compass direction from your present
position to a destination waypoint.
Indicated airspeed corrected for installation
and instrument errors.
The line between two points to be followed
by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer in order
to reduce course error or stay on course.
Provides the most efficient heading to get
back to the desired course and proceed along
your flight plan.
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
The ‘great circle’ distance from your present
position to a destination waypoint.
A measure of GPS satellite geometry quality
on a scale of one to ten (lower numbers
equal better geometry, where higher numbers
equal poorer geometry)
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
A measure of fuel consumption, expressed in
distance per unit of fuel.
Flight endurance, or total possible flight time
based on available fuel on board.
The recommended minimum altitude within
ten miles left or right of the desired course on
an active flight plan or direct-to.
A measure of horizontal GPS position error
derrived by satellite geometry conditions and
other factors.
The estimated time at which the aircraft
should reach the destination waypoint, based
upon current speed and track.
The estimeated time it takes to reach the
destination waypoint from the present position, based upon current groundspeed.
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of fuel
per hour.
The total amount of usable fuel on board the
aircraft.
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based
upon indications from a magnetic compass or
a properly set directional gyro.
Navigation Term
Indicated
Leg
Left Over Fuel On Board
Left Over Fuel Reserve
Minimum Safe Altitude
Track
Track Angle Error
Vertical Speed Required
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
Definition
Information provided by properly calibrated
and set instrumentation on the aircraft panel.
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
The amount of fuel remaining on board after
the completion of one or more legs of a flight
plan or direct-to.
The amount of flight time remaining, based
on the amount of fuel on board after the
completion of one or more legs of a flight
plan or direct-to, and a known consumption
rate.
Uses Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitudes (Grid
MORAs) to determine a safe altitude within
ten miles of the aircraft present position.
Grid MORAs are one degree latitude by one
degree longitude in size. The Grid MORA
clears the highest elevation reference point in
the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of the grid.
The direction of aircraft movement relative
to a ground position. Also referred to as
‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and your current track.
The vertical speed necessary to descend/climb
from a current position and altitude to a
defined target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:30 AM
APPENDIX C
QUESTIONS & ANSWERS
This Appendix answers common questions regarding
G1000 system operational capabilities. If a particular
subject is not covered in this Appendix, the index may be
used to find the appropriate section in this manual. If a
sufficient answer is still not found, an authorized Garmin
dealer or contact Garmin directly (see Copyright page).
Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach
operations?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of
tracked GPS satellites.
• Eliminates a corrupt satellite from the navigation
solution.
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do
not provide the necessary coverage to support a
certain phase of flight.
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to
determine whether the number of available satellites is sufficient to satisfy requirements.
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must
track at least five (5) satellites. A minimum of six (6) satellites is required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000 system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Annunciation and
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 7
Alerts Pilot’s Guide). Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when
crossing the FAF, the pilot must fly the missed approach
procedure.
N OT E : I f R A I M i s n o t p r e d i c t e d t o
b e a va i l a b l e f o r t h e f i n a l a p p r o a c h
course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available
from FAF to MAP” message and the INTEG
annunciation flagging.
Why are there not any approaches available for
a flight plan?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind that
some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a published
approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available
procedures.
What happens when an approach is selected?
Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure,
or an arrival be stored?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into
the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan – along with
a header line showing the title of the selected instrument
procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan
remains active, unless the instrument procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is
loaded, or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a
departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active
flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint infor-
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
APP-7
7/7/2005 8:50:30 AM
APPENDIX C
mation from the current database to define the waypoints.
If the database is changed or updated, the G1000 system
automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the
flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted
from the flight plan.
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the
G1000?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 system
meets the requirements of TSO-C129 Class A1 or A2 installation. Non-precision GPS approaches are not to be
flown with an expired database. See the approved Aircraft
Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more information.
What does the OBS softkey do?
The OBS softkey is used to select manual sequencing
of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and
prevents the system from sequencing to the next waypoint
in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic
waypoint sequencing is continued, and the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan
once the aircraft has crossed the present active waypoint.
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
• Manual course change on HSI is not possible
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach course
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
• Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns
APP-8
Appendices.indd 8
When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot
to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the CRS/
BARO knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
One application for the OBS softkey is holding patterns. The OBS softkey is used to suspend waypoint sequencing and select the desired course along the waypoint
side of the hold. For many approach operations, setting
and resetting of waypoint sequencing is automatic. Holding patterns that are part of an approach automatically
disable waypoint sequencing, then re-enable waypoint
sequencing after one time around the holding pattern. To
fly the holding pattern a second time, press the OBS softkey. An example of this operation is an approach which
begins with a holding pattern at the initial approach fix
(IAF).
The most common application for using the OBS softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a “SUSP” annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed approach
point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from
automatically sequencing to the missed approach holding
point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing the SUSP softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS softkey
then resumes its normal functionality.
WARNING: The G1000 does not provide guidance to the missed approach hold point (MAHP).
Always follow published missed approach procedures when flying a missed approach.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:30 AM
APPENDIX C
Why does the G1000 not automatically sequence
to the next waypoint?
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when
automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no “OBS” or “SUSP”
annunciation). For automatic sequencing to occur, the
aircraft must also cross the “bisector” of the turn being
navigated. The bisector is a perpendicular line between
two flight plan legs which crosses through the waypoint
common to both legs.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach,
a departure, or an arrival?
The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of the
flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD,
from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the desired waypoint and pressing the ACT LEG softkey, then
the ENT key to approve the selection. The GPS then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
The G1000 smoothes adjacent leg transitions based
upon a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up
to 25°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
1) A waypoint alert (“NEXT DTK ###°”) flashes on
the PFD 10 seconds before the turn point.
2) A flashing turn advisory (“TURN TO ###°”)
appears on the PFD when the pilot is to begin
the turn. The HSI (GPS mode) automatically
sequences to the next DTK value.
3) The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has
been crossed.
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 9
When does the CDI scale change?
When 30 nm from the destination, the G1000 begins
a smooth CDI scale transition from 5.0 nm (en-route
mode) to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). When 2 nm from the
FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
to 0.3 nm (approach mode). When executing a missed
approach, the CDI can be returned to the 1.0 nm scale by
pressing the SUSP softkey. The CDI is also set to 1.0 nm
(terminal mode) within 30 nm of the departure airport.
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when
OBS mode is active?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment
is based on the cross-track distance to the desired course,
not on angular relationship to the destination. Therefore,
the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant regardless of
the distance to the destination and does not become less
sensitive when further away from the destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure?
How is the missed approach holding point
selected?
To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does
not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP softkey is pressed AFTER
crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the approach
plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the
MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG softkey to activate the missed
approach portion of the procedure.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
APP-9
7/7/2005 8:50:31 AM
APPENDIX C
After a missed approach, how can the same
approach be re-selected? How can a new
approach be activated?
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot
may reactivate the same approach for another attempt
from the Procedures Page. Once the clearance is given
for another attempt, activate the approach from the Procedures Page by highlighting “Activate Approach?”, then
pressing the ENT key. The G1000 provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the
approach in sequence from that point on.
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current
approach prior to crossing the missed approach
point (MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an
alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current approach?” appears. The G1000
directs you back to the transition waypoint and
does NOT take into consideration any missed
approach procedures, if the current approach is
reactivated.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select
the new procedure from the Procedures Page. To view
the Procedures Page, press the PROC key and rotate the
large FMS knob to highlight “Select Approach?”. Select
the desired approach from the list shown and press the
ENT key. Select the desired transition, then activate the
approach using the ENT key.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press
the Direct-to key and select the desired airport using the
small and large FMS knobs. Press the ENT key to accept
the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
APP-10
Appendices.indd 10
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:31 AM
APPENDIX D
G1000 MAP DATUMS
The G1000 system supports the following map datums.
WARNING: WGS 84 is the default datum and
should be used in all situations except when
another datum is specifically required for safe
navigation. Pilots using map datums other than
WGS 84 do so at their own risk.
ADINDAN
Ethiopia, Mali, Senegal, Sudan
AFGOOYE
Somalia
AIN El ABD 1970
Bahrain Island, Saudi Arabia
ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965
Cocos Islands
ARC 1950
Botswana, Lesotho, Malawi, Swaziland, Zaire, Zambia, Zimbabwe
ARC 1960
Kenya, Tanzania
ASCENSION IS 1958
Ascension Island
ASTRO B4 SOROL ATOLL
Tern Island
ASTRO BEACON “E”
Iwo Jima Island
ASTRO DOS 71/4
St. Helena Island
ASTRONOMIC STN 1952
Marcus Island
AUSTRALIAN GEOD 1966
Australia, Tasmania Island
AUSTRALIAN GEOD 1984
Australia, Tasmania Island
AUSTRIA NS
Austria
BELGIUM 1950
Belgium
BELLEVUE (IGN)
Efate and Erromango Islands
BERMUDA 1957
Bermuda Islands
BOGATA OBSERVATORY
Colombia
BUKIT RIMPAH
Indonesia
CAMP AREA ASTRO
Antarctica
CAMPO INCHAUSPE
Argentina
CANTON ASTRO 1966
Phoenix Islans
CAPE
South Africa
CAPE CANAVERAL
Florida, Bahama Islands
CARTHAGE
Tunisia
CH-1903
Switzerland
CHATHAM 1971
Chatham Island (New Zealand)
CHUA ASTRO
Paraguay
CORREGO ALEGRE
Brazil
DANISH GI 1934
Denmark
DJAKARTA (BATAVIA)
Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
DOS 1968
Gizo Island (New Georgia Islands)
EASTER ISLAND 1967
Easter Island
EUROPEAN 1950
Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, France,
Germany, Gibraltar, Greece, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal,
Spain, Sweden, Switzerland
EUROPEAN 1979
Austria, Finland, Netherlands, Norway, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 11
FINLAND HAYFORD 1910
G. SEGARA
GANDAJIKA BASE
GEODETIC DATUM 1949
GGRS 87
GUAM 1963
GUX 1 ASTRO
HERAT NORTH
HJORSEY 1955
HONG KONG 1963
HU-TZU SHAN
INDIAN BNGLDSH NEPAL
INDIAN MEAN VALUE
INDIAN THAILAND VIETN
INDONESIA 74
IRELAND 1965
ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969
JOHNSTON ISLAND 1961
KANDAWALA
KERGUELEN ISLAND
KERTAU 1948
L.C. 5 ASTRO
LIBERIA 1964
LUZON MEAN VALUE
LUZON MINDANAO IS
LUZON PHILIPPINES
MAHE 1971
MARCO ASTRO
MASSAWA
MERCHICH
MIDWAY ASTRO 1961
MINNA
NAD27 ALASKA
NAD27 BAHAMAS
NAD27 CANADA
NAD27 CANAL ZONE
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
Finland
Borneo
Republic of Maldives
New Zealand
Greece
Guam Island
Guadalcanal Island
Afghanistan
Iceland
Hong Kong
Taiwan
Bangladesh, India, Nepal
India
Thailand, Vietnam
Indonesia
Ireland
Diego Garcia
Johnston Island
Sri Lanka
Kerguelen Island
West Malaysia
Cayman Brac Island
Liberia
Philippines
Mindanao Island
Philippines (excluding Mindanao Isl.)
Mahe Island
Salvage Islands
Eritrea (Ethiopia)
Morocco
Midway Island
Nigeria
North American 1927 – Alaska
North American 1927 – Bahamas
North American 1927 – Canada
North American 1927 – Canal Zone
APP-11
7/7/2005 8:50:31 AM
APPENDIX D
G1000 MAP DATUMS (CONT.)
NAD27 CARIBBEAN
North American 1927 – Caribbean: Barbados, Caicos
Islands, Cuba, Dominican
Republic, Cayman Islands, Jamaica, Leeward and Turks Islands
NAD27 CENTRAL AMERICA
North American 1927 – Central America: Belize,
Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, and Nicaragua
NAD27 CONUS
North American 1927 – Continental United States
NAD27 CUBA
North American 1927 – Cuba
NAD27 GREENLAND
North American 1927 – Greenland (Hayes Peninsula)
NAD27 MEXICO
North American 1927 – Mexico
NAD27 SAN SALVADOR IS
North American 1927 – San Salvador Island
NAD83
North American 1983 – Alaska, Canada, Central America, CONUS, Mexico
NAHRWAN MASIRAH IS
Masirah Island (Oman)
NAHRWAN SAUDI ARABIA
Saudi Arabia
NAHRWAN UNITD ARAB E
United Arab Emirates
NAPARIMA BWI
Trinidad and Tobago
NETHERLAND TRIAG ’21
Netherlands
NOU TRIAG FRANCE
France
NOU TRIAG LUXEMBOURG
Luxembourg
OBSERVATORIO 1966
Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
OLD EGYPTIAN
Egypt
OLD HAWAIIAN KAUAI
Kauai
OLD HAWAIIAN MAUI
Maui
OLD HAWAIIAN MEAN
Mean Value
OLD HAWAIIAN OAHU
Oahu
OMAN
Oman
ORD SRV GRT BRITAIN England, Isle of Man, Scotland, Shetland Islands, Wales
PICO DE LAS NIEVAS
Canary Islands
PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967
Pitcairn Island
PORTUGUESE 1973
Portugal
APP-12
Appendices.indd 12
POTSDAM
Germany
PROV SO AMERICA ’56
Bolivia, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana, Peru, Venezuala
PROV SO CHILEAN 1963
South Chile
PUERTO RICO
Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
QATAR NATIONAL
Qatar
QORNOQ
South Greenland
REUNION
Mascarene Island
ROME 1940
Sardinia Island
RT 90
Sweden
SANTO (DOS)
Espirito Santo Island
SAO BRAZ
Sao Miguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
SAPPER HILL 1943
East Falkland Island
SCHWARZECK
Namibia
SOUTH AMERICAN 1969
Argentina,
Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana, Paraguay, Peru, Venezuela
SOUTH ASIAN
Singapore
SOUTHEAST BASE
Porto Santo and Madeira Islands
SOUTHWEST BASE
Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge and Terceira Islands
TANANARIVE OBSV 1925
Madagascar
TIMBALAI 1948
Brunei and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sabah)
TOKYO
Japan, Korea, Okinawa
TRISTAN ASTRO 1968
Tristan da Cunha
VITI LEVU 1916
Viti Levu Island, Fiji Islands
WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960
Marshal Islands
WGS 72
World Geodetic System 1972
WGS 84
World Geodetic System 1984
YACARE
Uruguay
ZANDERIJ
Surinam
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:32 AM
APPENDIX E
GENERAL TIS INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information in the cockpit of non-TCAS
equipped aircraft. TIS is a ground-based service providing relative location of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C
transponder equipped aircraft within a specified service
volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real time track reports to generate traffic notification. The G1000 system
displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map Page of
the MFD. TIS information may be displayed for overlay
on the default map page on the MFD, as well as on the
PFD map inset. Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage volume. The
G1000 system displays up to eight traffic targets within a
7.5 nautical mile radius, from 3,000 feet below, to 3,500
feet above the requesting aircraft.
NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder
are invisible to TIS.
TIS VS. TCAS
The main difference between TIS and TCAS is the
source of surveillance data. TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half-second update rate, while TIS utilizes
the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to provide a five-second update rate. TIS and
TCAS both have similar ranges.
TIS LIMITATIONS
This section describes basic TIS limitations and is not
comprehensive. The pilot should review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual
(AIM).
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 13
NOTE: TIS is NOT intended to be used as a
collision avoidance system and does not relieve
the pilot of the responsibility to “see and avoid”
other aircraft. TIS shall not be used for avoidance
maneuvers during IMC or when there is no visual
contact with the intruder aircraft.
TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition
of other aircraft in VMC conditions. No recommended
avoidance maneuvers are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.
While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance,
system limitations must be fully understood to ensure
proper use. Many limitations are inherent in secondary
radar surveillance. Information provided by TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used
by ATC.
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system,
which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system similar
to that used by ATCRBS. TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering. TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between
the aircraft and the Mode-S radar antenna. Whenever the
structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder
antenna and the ground-based radar antenna, the signal
may be temporarily interrupted. Other limitations and
anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM.
WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S
geographical coverage. Operation of the ground
stations is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to
the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
APP-13
7/7/2005 8:50:32 AM
APPENDIX E
NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many
areas of the United States. This is often the case
in mountainous regions.
TIS information is collected during a single radar
sweep. Collected information is then sent through the
Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this,
the surveillance information is approximately five seconds
old. TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction
algorithms to compensate for this delay. These algorithms
uses track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of display. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation
and create slight errors on the Traffic Map Page. Errors
affect relative bearing information and target track vector.
This can cause a delay in the displayed intruder information. However, intruder distance and altitude typically
remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in
spotting traffic.
The following errors are common examples:
Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the
correction of malfunctions by reporting their observations
of undesirable performance. Reporters should identify
the time of observation, location, type and identity of the
aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports
should also include the type of transponder and transponder software version as well. Since TIS performance is
monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC, malfunctions should be reported in the following ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station
(FSS) facility.
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report
(Postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs,
General Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards
District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base
Operators).
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers
excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm
may report incorrect horizontal position until the
maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course
that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head-on), and
either aircraft abruptly changes course within
0.25 nautical miles, TIS may display the intruder
aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved
within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder aircraft
course stabilizes.
APP-14
Appendices.indd 14
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:32 AM
APPENDIX F
MAP SYMBOLS
Item
Interstate Highway – 2-digit drawn inside
AIRPORT
Item
Symbol
Unknown Airport
Symbol
Interstate Highway – 3-digit drawn inside
State Highway – 2-digit drawn inside
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
State Highway – 3-digit drawn inside
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
State Highway – 4-digit drawn inside
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
State Highway – 5-digit drawn inside
US Highway – 2-digit drawn inside
Towered, Serviced Airport
US Highway – 3-digit drawn inside
Restricted (Private) Airport
National Highway – 2-digit drawn inside
Heliport
National Highway – 3-digit drawn inside
National Highway – 4-digit drawn inside
NAVAIDS
Item
Symbol
National Highway – 5-digit drawn inside
Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
Small City or Town
Medium City
NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon)
Large City
VOR
VOR/DME
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
BASEMAP
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 15
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
APP-15
7/7/2005 8:50:33 AM
APPENDIX F
TRAFFIC
MISCELLANEOUS
Item
Symbol
Traffic
Item
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Proximate Traffic
Default Map Cursor
Symbol
Elevation Pointer Cursor
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Measuring Cursor
Traffic Advisory
Overzoom Indicator (map toolbar)
LIGHTNING STRIKE
Terrain Proximity Enabled (map toolbar)
Item
Lightning Strike – Age is 0-6 Seconds
Symbol
Traffic Enabled (map toolbar)
User Waypoint
Wind Vector
Lightning Strike – Age is 6-20 Seconds
Lightning Strike – Age is 20-60 Seconds
Lightning Strike – Age is 60-120 Seconds
APP-16
Appendices.indd 16
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:34 AM
APPENDIX F
LINE SYMBOLS
Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Symbol
Mode C Tower Area
Warning Area
Alert Area
Caution Area
Danger Area
Prohibited Area
Restricted Area
Training Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)
State or Province Border
International Border
Road
Railroad
Lattitude/Longitude
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 17
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
APP-17
7/7/2005 8:50:36 AM
APPENDIX F
OBSTACLE DATABASE
Obstacle
Color
RED
YELLOW
GRAY
Indication
WARNING: Obstacle height is at or above 100 ft below the current
aircraft altitude.
CAUTION: Obstacle height is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
current aircraft altitude.
SAFE: Obstacle height is lower than 1000 ft below the current aircraft
altitude.
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1000 ft AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1000 ft AGL)
TERRAIN COLOR CHART
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft AGL
Figure F.1 Terrain Color Chart
APP-18
Appendices.indd 18
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:38 AM
APPENDIX G
G1000 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
GDU 1040 MFD & PFD
GIA 63 INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNITS
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
Display:
7.70 inches (19.56 cm)
11.80 inches (29.97 cm)
3.55 inches (9.02 cm)
6.6 lb (2.99 kg)
9 – 33 Vdc
10.4-inch diagonal XGA
1024 x 768 pixels
262,144 colors
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Altitude Range:
-40º C to +55º C
95% non-condensing
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Bezel Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
7.70 inches (19.56 cm)
1.3 inches (3.4 cm)
7.79 inches (19.70 cm)
1.7 lb (0.8 kg)
11 – 33 Vdc
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Altitude Range:
-20º C to +70º C
95% non-condensing
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
Appendices.indd 19
-40º C to +65º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
GPS SPECIFICATIONS
Receiver:
12 parallel channel PhaseTrac12™
Acquisition Time:
15 seconds (warm)
45 seconds (cold)
Update Rate:
Once per second, continuous
Accuracy:
Position – 49 feet (15 meters)
Velocity – 0.1 knot RMS steady state
Dynamics:
1,000 knots maximum velocity
6g maximum acceleration
VHF COM PERFORMANCE
Channels:
Frequency Range:
Transmit Power:
760 (25 kHz spacing)
or 2280 (8.33 kHz spacing)
118.000 MHz to 136.975 MHz
16 watts
VHF NAV PERFORMANCE
VOR Frequency Range:
G/S Frequency Range:
LOC Frequency Range:
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7.26 inches (18.44 cm)
3.83 inches (9.73 cm)
9.73 inches (24.71 cm)
4.9 lb (2.22 kg)
22 – 33 Vdc
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
108.00 MHz to 117.95 MHz
329.15 MHz to 335.00 MHz
108.10 MHz to 111.95 MHz
APP-19
7/7/2005 8:50:39 AM
APPENDIX G
GDC 74A AIR DATA COMPUTER
GEA 71 ENGINE/AIRFRAME UNIT
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Height:
Width:
Length:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
3.23 inches (8.20 cm)
3.05 inches (7.75 cm)
6.45 inches (16.38 cm)
1.69 lb (0.77 kg)
10 – 33 Vdc
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
6.30 inches (16.0 cm)
1.23 inches (3.12 cm)
8.73 inches (22.17 cm)
1.75 lb (0.712 kg)
9 – 33 Vdc
AIR DATA SPECIFICATIONS
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Pressure Altitude Range:
-1,400 feet to 50,000 feet
Vertical Speed Range:
-20,000 fpm to +20,000 fpm
Airspeed Range:
450 knots
Airspeed Mach Range:
<1.00 Mach
Total Air Temperature Range:
-85º C to +85º C
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
6.30 inches (16.0 cm)
1.72 inches (4.4 cm)
11.05 inches (28.1 cm)
3.0 lb (1.36 kg)
11 – 33 Vdc
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
APP-20
Appendices.indd 20
-55º C to +70º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
GDL 69/69A WEATHER DATA LINK
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Height:
Width:
Depth:
Weight (GDL 69A):
Voltage Range:
6.15 inches (15.62 cm)
1.05 inches (2.66 cm)
7.20 inches (18.26 cm)
1.86 lb (0.84 kg)
9 – 33 Vdc
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
-20º C to +55º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
-45º C to +70º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/7/2005 8:50:39 AM
APPENDIX G
GRS 77 AHRS
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Height:
Width:
Length:
Weight:
Voltage Range:
AHRS PERFORMANCE
3.25 inches (8.36 cm)
3.75 inches (9.53 cm)
8.5 inches (21.59 cm)
2.40 lb (1.08 kg)
10 – 33 Vdc
Bank/Pitch Error:
Maneuvers Range:
Rotation Rate:
Heading:
±1.25º within 30º roll, left or right
and 15º pitch, nose up or down
360º pitch and roll
±200º per second
±2º straight and level flight
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
INITIALIZATION LIMITATIONS
Temperature Range:
Altitude Range:
For successful in-flight initialization of the GRS 77, the following attitude limitations must be met:
-55º C to +70º C
-1,500 feet to 55,000 feet
Primary AHRS operation:
Reversion AHRS operation:
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Appendices.indd 21
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
±20º bank and ±5º pitch
±10º bank and ±5º pitch
APP-21
7/7/2005 8:50:39 AM
Appendices.indd 22
7/7/2005 8:50:39 AM
INDEX
A
Activate approach 2-41
Activate a flight plan 7-44, 7-53
Active Channel 9-21
Active Channel list 9-23
Active flight plan 7-25, 7-39
Active Flight Plan Page 7-42
Active Flight Plan Page options 7-42
Active frequency 3-2
ADVISORY 8-2
Advisory 2-43
Advisory Messages 9-25
Age stamp 9-18
AHRS 1-2, 1-13, 8-14
Aircraft alerts 8-3
AIRMET 9-13
Airport frequency 7-119
Airport Frequency Information field
7-67
Airport Information Page 9-7, 9-9
Airport information window 2-30
Airport Runway Information Field 7-68
Airport Symbols 7-10
Airspace 7-10
Airspace boundaries 7-26
Airspace messages 7-129
Airspeed indicator 2-9
Airspeed trend vector 2-9
Air Data Computer (ADC) 1-1, 1-2
Alerting System 8-1
Alerts window 2-43, 8-1
Alert levels 8-2
Altimeter 2-12
Altitude buffer 7-110
Altitude reference bug 2-12
Altitude trend vector 2-12
ALT mode 2-22
ALT softkey 4-3
Ammeter 6-2
Annunciation window 2-43, 8-1
Annunciator lights 5-4
Approach APP-7, APP-8, APP-9, APP10
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Index.indd 1
Approach(es) 7-61
Approach Information Page 7-69
Approach markers
Outer, Middle, Inner 5-6
Signal sense, marker 5-6
Approach Page menu 7-75
APR softkey 7-74
Arc HSI 2-16
ARINC 429 1-2
ARINC leg types 7-61
Arrivals and departures 7-60
Arrival Alerts 7-111
Arrival Page Menu 7-72
Arrow, double green 3-8
Arrow, single green 3-8
Arrow, single magenta 3-8
ARTCC 7-125
ASSIST softkey 6-4
Attitude Heading and Reference System
(AHRS) 1-2
Attitude indicator 2-10
Audio Alerts 7-111
Audio panel controls
COM1, COM1 MIC 5-2, 5-4
COM2, COM2 MIC 5-2, 5-4
COPLT key 5-8
NAV1, NAV2 5-7
SPKR 5-5
Auto-tuning 3-9, 3-10, 3-16
Automated airborne determination
2-22
Automatic sequencing APP-8, APP-9
Automatic squelch 3-3, 3-6
Auto zoom 7-9, 7-18
Auxiliary Page Group 7-92
Auxiliary window 2-27
AUX - Trip Planning Map 9-7
Aviation database APP-1
Aviation group options 7-25
Aviation map data 7-10
B
Backlighting 1-11, 2-4, 7-1
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
BACK softkey 4-1
Barometric setting box 2-12
Bearing pointers 2-18
Bearing source 2-18
BKSP softkey 4-1, 4-4
C
Canceling direct-to navigation 7-41
Category 9-21
CATGRY softkey 9-21
CAUTION 8-2
Caution 2-43
CDI 8-16
CDI scale 7-112, APP-9
CDI scaling 7-63
CDI softkey 3-8
cell data 9-1
Change fields 2-38, 7-51
Changing the Map Scale 7-31
Channel List 9-22
Channels 9-21
Checklists 1-14
CHNL softkey 9-21
City Forecast Data 9-7
CLEAR softkey 9-6
Closest point of flight plan 7-50
Closest point of FPL 2-37
Code selection softkeys 4-1, 4-4
CODE softkey 4-1
Communication frequency window
2-20
COM channel spacing 3-6, 7-113
COM Configuration 7-112
COM frequency window 3-1
COM tuning knob 3-3, 3-4, 3-5
COM volume/squelch knob 3-3, 3-6
Controls 1-6
Convective SIGMET 9-13
Copy a flight plan 7-54
COUNTY softkey 9-16
County Warnings 9-7
Course 2-16
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 2-17
I-1
7/11/2005 4:31:46 PM
INDEX
Create a new flight plan 7-54
Create a new waypoint 7-91
Creating a flight plan 2-33
Creating a Profile 7-105
Customized Display 9-3
CYCLONE softkey 9-17
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) 6-2
CYL SLCT softkey 6-4
D
Database 1-10, APP-1
Data and Audio Radio ID 9-20
Date/Time box 7-107
dBZ 9-12
Declutter 2-25
Decluttering 7-11
Default power-on settings 5-4
Delete 2-34
Delete all flight plans 7-56
Delete all user waypoints 7-89
Delete a flight plan 7-55
Delete a user waypoint 7-91
Delete a waypoint 7-46
Deleting a Profile 7-106
Density Altitude 7-95
Departure Procedures 7-71
Departure timer 7-97
Digital Audio entertainment 9-19
Dilution of Precision 7-101
Direct-to 2-30
Direct-to navigation 7-37
Direct-to Page 7-37
Direct-to Waypoint 7-38
Display backup 1-12, 2-42
Display Units 7-107
DP softkey 7-71
E
ECHO TOP 9-12
Edit a flight plan 7-44
Edit flight plan 7-56
Emergency frequency 3-3, 3-7
Engine Indication System (EIS) 6-1
I-2
Index.indd 2
ENGINE softkey 6-1, 7-2
Entering a transponder code 4-4
Entering Flight ID 4-2
Estimated Position Error 7-101
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) 6-4
F
FIS weather information 9-7
Flight ID 2-29
Flight plan 2-32
Flight planning 7-42
Flight Planning Maps 9-7
Flight Plan Catalog Page 7-52
Flight Plan Catalog Page operations
7-52
Flight Plan Catalog Page options 7-52
Flight timer 7-97
Freezing Levels 9-7
Frequency list 7-69
Frequency spacing 3-6, 3-8
Frequency transfer arrow 3-4, 3-5
Frequency transfer key 3-3
FRZ LVL softkey 9-16
FSS information 7-125
Fuel flow indicator 6-2
Fuel Planning 7-94
Fuel quantity 6-3
Fuel range ring 7-22
Fuel reserve ring 2-24
G
G1000 Multi Function Display Pilot’s
Guide 9-1
GDL 69 Troubleshooting 9-23
GDL 69 Weather Interface 9-7
Generic timer 2-28, 7-97
GND mode 2-22
GPS APP-7
GPS receiver 1-13, 7-104
Graphical Cloud Tops 9-7
Graphical Echo Tops 9-7
Graphical Lightning Strikes 9-7
Graphical METAR Data 9-7
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
Graphical NEXRAD Data 9-7
Graphical Wind Data 9-7
Ground Clutter 9-11
GTX 33 Transponder 4-2
H
Heading 2-16
HI SENS 5-6
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
2-15
Hurricane Track 9-7
I
Icing 9-14
Ident 2-22
IDENT softkey 4-3, 4-5
ID indicator 3-3, 3-5, 3-8
IFR conditions 9-14
INFO softkey 3-10, 9-21
Inset map 2-24
INTEG 2-19
Intercom system (ICS) 5-8
Interrogation 2-22
Invert 2-34
Invert and activate a flight plan 7-54
Invert flight plan 7-46
J
Jeppesen APP-1
Joystick (bezel) 1-6
K
Key 1-7, 1-8
Key(s)
CLR 1-6
COM Frequency Toggle 1-6
Direct-to 1-6
ENT 1-6
FPL 1-6
MENU 1-6
NAV Frequency Toggle 1-6
PROC 1-6
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:31:47 PM
INDEX
Knob(s)
ALT 1-6
COM 1-6
COM VOL/SQ 1-6
CRS/BARO 1-6
FMS 1-6
HDG 1-6
NAV 1-6
NAV VOL/ID 1-6
L
Land data 7-18
Land group options 7-27
LEAN softkey 6-4
LEGEND 9-14
LEGEND softkey 9-14
Liquid crystal displays 7-1
Loading Departure options 7-47
Load an Arrival 7-48
Load approach 2-36, 7-49
Load arrival 2-36
Load departure 2-35, 7-47
localized SIGMET 9-13
long-range planning 9-1
LRU Information Window 9-24
M
Magnetic Variation 7-81
Magnetometer 1-1, 1-2
Manual sequencing APP-8
Manual squelch (MAN SQ) 5-9
Manual tuning 3-4
Map Datums 7-108
Map datums APP-11
Map group options 7-16
Map orientation 7-9
Map Page group 9-5
Map Panning 9-17
Map panning 7-12
Map scale 7-9
Map setup 7-16
Map Symbols APP-15
Marker beacon 5-6
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Index.indd 3
Marker beacon annunciation 2-13
MASQ 5-7
Measuring bearing/distance 7-29
Menus 2-26
Message advisories 8-8, 8-10, 8-12,
8-13, 8-14, 8-15, 8-16
METAR 9-9
Metric display 2-13
MFD Data Bar Fields 7-111
MFD softkeys 7-2
Minimum runway length 7-113
Missed approach APP-8
Missed approach procedure APP-9
MKR/MUTE 5-6
Mode A 2-22
Mode C 2-22
Mode S 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, APP-13, APP-14
Mode selection softkeys 4-1, 4-3, 4-4
Mode S transponder 2-22
MORE WX softkey 9-15
Morse code identifier 3-3, 3-5, 3-8
Mountain obscuration 9-14
Muting
COM 5-5, 5-10
N
National Weather Service 9-16
NAV1 5-7
NAV2 5-7
Navigation frequency window 2-20
Navigation Map Page 7-8, 9-2
Navigation Map Page options menu
7-16
Navigation mode selection 3-8
Navigation source 2-19
Navigation status bar 2-21, 3-2
NAV frequencies 3-8, 3-11, 3-16, 3-17
NAV frequency window 3-1
NAV range ring 7-20
NAV station identifiers 3-8
NAV tuning knob 3-3, 3-4, 3-5
NAV volume/ID knob 3-3, 3-8
NDB Information Page Options 7-80
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
NDB Page Menu 7-80
Nearest Airport 7-113
Nearest airport 7-40
Nearest airports 2-29
Nearest airports, frequency tuning 3-9,
3-13
Nearest Airports Page 7-118
Nearest Pages 9-7
Nearest Page Group 7-115
NEXRAD 9-7
NEXRAD Abnormalities 9-11
NEXRAD Intensity 9-12
NEXRAD Limitations 9-11
NEXRAD softkey 9-8
Normal operating mode 1-11
O
OBS 2-19
OBS mode APP-8
Oil pressure indicator 6-2
Oil temperature indicator 6-2
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 1-2,
2-23
P
PA 5-5
Page groups 7-6
Pan map 2-26
Performance APP-19, APP-21
Pitch indication 2-10
PLAY key 5-10
Point-n-shoot flight plan 7-57
Power 7-31, 7-97
Power-up 1-9
Power-up test 7-31
Presets 9-23
PRESETS softkey 9-21
Primary Flight Display (PFD) 2-1
Procedures 7-60
Procedures Page 7-60
Procedures window 2-38
PTT 5-5
I-3
7/11/2005 4:31:48 PM
INDEX
R
Radar coverage 9-12
RADIO softkey 9-19, 9-21
RAIM APP-7
Recently used VORs 3-12
Recorded COM signals 5-10
Registered Trademark i
Remove approach 2-37
Remove arrival 2-37
Remove departure 2-37
Remove departure, arrival, or approach
7-50
Removing Stormscope Lightning Data
9-4
Rename a user waypoint 7-91
Renaming a Profile 7-106
Restore defaults 2-38, 7-51
Reversionary mode 1-12, 2-42, 5-2
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) 6-2
Roll indication 2-11
RX indicator 3-5, 3-6
S
Satellites APP-7
Scheduler 7-98
SD card 1-8, 1-14, APP-1
Secure Digital 1-8
Selecting a COM radio 3-6
Selecting a NAV radio 3-8
Select approach 2-39, 7-49, 7-62
Select arrival 2-40
Select departure 2-41, 7-47
Service Class 9-20
Severe Thunderstorm 9-16
SFC softkey 9-15
SIGMET 9-13
SIGMETs/AIRMETs 9-7
Slip/Skid indicator 2-11
Softkey
ENGINE 7-2
SYSTEM softkey 7-2
Softkeys 2-5
I-4
Index.indd 4
Sort by comment/number 7-56
Speaker 5-5
Special Position Identification (SPI)
2-22
Specifications APP-19, APP-20
Specifying a course to a waypoint 7-41
Speed indication 2-9
Speed ranges 2-9
Spell N Find 7-38
SPKR key 5-5
Standard instrument departures 7-47
Standby frequency 3-2, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15
Standby frequency field 3-3, 3-4, 3-10,
3-16, 3-17
Standby mode 2-22
STAR softkey 7-72
STBY softkey 4-3
Stereo Headsets 5-2
Stop navigating a flight plan 7-53
Store Flight Plan 7-45
Storing a flight plan 2-33
Stormscope Page 9-5
Stormscope Page Operations 9-6
Storm cells 9-13
Strike data 9-1
Strike location 9-13
Stuck microphone 3-7
Surface Analysis including City Forecasts 9-7
Surface winds 9-14
SUSP 2-19
Symbols APP-15
System annunciations 8-1, 8-5
System Status Page 9-24
System time box 2-23
System time format 7-107
T
Tachometer 6-2
TAF 9-9
TCAS 4-2
TCAS symbology 7-31
Temporary Flight Restrictions 9-7
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
Terrain APP-1, APP-18, 2-25
Terrain data 7-21
Terrain data scale 7-21, 7-22
Terrain information 7-15
Terrain Proximity Page 7-34
Terrain Proximity Page operations 7-36
Textual METAR Data 9-7
Textual Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts
9-7
Timer/References 2-27
Time offset 7-107
TIS 7-15, APP-13
TIS symbology 7-31
TIS Traffic Advisory 7-32
TIS Ttraffic status 7-33
Topo 2-25
Topographic Information 7-14
Topo data 7-20
Topo scale box 7-21
Total flight hours 6-6
Track vector 7-19
Traffic 2-25, 7-15, APP-13
Traffic Banner 7-33
Traffic group options 7-23
Traffic Information Service (TIS) 2-23,
4-2
Traffic label 7-25
Traffic Map Page 7-30
Traffic Map Page operations 7-31
Traffic mode 7-23
Traffic symbol 7-24
Transponder-equipped aircraft 4-2
Transponder code field 4-1
Transponder code selection 4-4
Transponder ground mode 4-3
Transponder mode field 4-1, 4-3, 4-4
Transponder standby mode 4-1, 4-3
Transponder Status bar 4-1, 4-3, 4-4,
4-5
Transponder status bar 2-22
Trip planning operations 7-93
True airspeed box 2-9
Turbulence 9-14
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:31:48 PM
INDEX
Turn rate indicator 2-17
TX indicator 3-5
U
Update rate 9-12
User Waypoint Information Page 7-88
V
Vertical deviation/Glideslope indicator
2-13
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Page 7-58
Vertical navigation profile 7-58
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) 2-14
Vertical speed pointer 2-14
VFR 2-22
VFR code 4-5
View Recent User WPT List 7-89
VLOC receiver 7-63
Voice alerts 8-4
VOL/PUSH ID knob 3-3, 3-8
VOL/PUSH SQ knob 3-3, 3-5
Voltmeter 6-2
Volume 5-5, 9-23
Volume/squelch control 5-9
VOL softkey 9-21
VOR/ILS approach, frequency activation
3-10
VOR frequency loading 3-14
VOR list 7-83
VOR Page Menu 7-83
VOR selection 3-2, 3-8
Vspeeds 2-28
Vspeed bug 2-28
Vspeed references 2-9
Waypoint Page group 7-65
Weather Data Link Page 9-7, 9-10,
9-15, 9-17
Weather Data Link Page Softkeys 9-10
Weather Group Options 9-3
Weather Group Options Menu 9-3
Weather information 2-26
Weather Legends Window 9-14
Weather Products 9-20
Weather Product Age 9-18
Weather Product Symbols 9-18
Wind shear 9-13
WIND softkey 9-16
Wind vector 7-19
WPT - Weather Information Page 9-7
WPT Page Group. 9-10
WSR-88D weather surveillance radar
9-11
WX softkey 9-10
X
XM Information Page 9-19
XM Lightning 9-7
XM LTNG softkey 9-8
XM Radio 9-7
XM Radio Interface Softkeys 9-21
XM Radio Page 9-21
XM Satellite Radio 9-19
XPDR softkey 4-1, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5
Z
Zoom range 2-25, 9-4
W
WARN 2-19
WARNING 8-2
Warning 2-43
Warning, altitude 5-2
Waypoint Facility or City Location 7-67
Waypoint identifier 7-66
190-00617-00 Rev. A
Index.indd 5
Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Tiger AG-5B
I-5
7/11/2005 4:31:49 PM
Index.indd 6
7/11/2005 4:31:49 PM
Index.indd 7
7/11/2005 4:31:49 PM
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p: 913.397.8200 f: 913.397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p: 503.391.3411 f: 503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Unit 5, The Quadrangle
Abbey Park Industrial Estate
Romsey, SO51 9DL, U.K.
p: 44/0870.8501241 f: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p: 886/2.2642.9199 f: 886/2.2642.9099
www.garmin.com
© 2005 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
Index.indd 8
190-00617-00 Rev. A
7/11/2005 4:31:57 PM
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising